Survivor: Madagascar



 

''Deep in the bowels of an immense jungle off the coast of Africa, 18 strangers from different walks of life will come together, in the adventure of a lifetime. Confronting a mysterious land of unique wildlife, ancient customs unknown to the outside world and an enduring culture, they must be ready to face the elements...and ultimately each other, or be voted out! In the end, only 1 will remain to claim the million dollar prize, and the title of Sole Survivor! This..is Survivor: Madagascar!''

Contestant Profiles

 * Paul Anderson
 * Louis Barnes
 * Adam Wallman
 * Otto Axelson
 * Chong Ackerman
 * John Lockhart
 * Ernest Willis
 * Chris Wheatman
 * Glenn Marx
 * Amy Stealer
 * Lex Donnelly
 * Karen Oaks
 * Kristie Plotz
 * Hannah Stephenson
 * Jessica Powell
 * Christine Brogovich
 * Layla Lee
 * Emma McKimson

Episode 1: "I Just Did Something a Little Bit Unscrupulous"
As the coarse, choppy waters of the Indian Ocean pummeled themselves onto the idyllic sandy brown beach, the authoritative voice of a man in his fifties could be heard.

"Over the last eighteen years, Survivor has travelled the globe far and wide to locations practically untouched by the average man."

As he narrated, footage of past season locations was shown, including Borneo, Australia, Palau, Samoa, the Philippines and Fiji.

"This season, that very trend only continues, as we set sail to Madagascar! Long untouched by the outside world and shrouded in mystery, this immense island is home to bizarre wildlife that exists nowhere else on earth, sacred social customs and a history that spans thousands of years!"

Ring-tailed lemurs were shown frolicking through trees, followed by Malagasy people engaging in tribal rituals.

"Beneath me, eighteen Americans are about to embark on a journey to this strange land, where not only will they be forced to endure the unforgiving elements, but also each other!"

One of the contestants, this one named Paul Anderson, gave the first confessional of the season.

(CONF): "I've been watching this show since I was twelve and to finally be here, I just keep PINCHING myself because I don't think it's really true!", said Paul, who proceeded to do just thatt. "...IT'S REAL!" he yelped as he proceeded to fake fainting.

The next contestant, Jessica Powell, then gave one of her very own.

(CONF): "Throughout my life, everyone around me has underestimated me for being an attractive female!", said Jess "Without exception, I've always proven them wrong and this time will be no different!" a svelte brunette woman proclaimed confidently.

The last contestant to speak up for a while was a mustached, tattooed man named Adam Wallman.

(CONF): "Ever since watching Boston Rob take advantage of those idiots on Redemption Island, it's been my dream to do the same and brainwash people left and right! No one's gonna touch me!" Adam cockily boasted. "I'll be mean, I'll be tough, I won't care who I hurt!"

Eventually, Probst concluded his narration.

"In the end, only one will remain to claim the million dollar prize and the title of Sole Survivor! Thirty-nine days, eighteen people, one Survivor!"

As the camera zoomed quickly into the fishing trawler, Probst addressed the ecstatic crowd of eighteen.

"Welcome to Survivor: Madagascar!", he greeted excitedly. "For the next thirty-nine days, this island will be your home! Guy in the business suit, what's your name?"

The man, who lightly adjusted his red tie, replied.

"Barnes. Lous Barnes. And as you've probably determined from my intro, I'm a secret agent in addition to an investment banker."

Louis' response elicited polite chuckles from the seventeen other competitors, while he then gave a confessional of his own.

(CONF): "When people read my description, they'll probably assume I'm going to be some type of breakout character akin to Rudy Boesch, Keith Nale or even Joe Del Campo!", said Louis. "After all, the older players are always America's heroes! But that's a misconception! Richard and Russell will be brought to their knees, as I'm going to create a Survivor empire!"

Probst then pointed to the man seated next to Louis. He appeared to be in his mid-sixties and was wearing a white undershirt, which concealed his lean, toned build. His long, shaggy gray hair was tied back in a man bun, leaving his silver-salted beard in plain sight. "Older man in the sleeveless shirt, what's your name?"

"Well, I'm really Rob", he started "But I know how many of THOSE guys you've had. Cesternino, Mariano, what's so special about an Ackerman? If anything, please call me Chong!" Chong's choice of nickname led to another eruption of laughter across the boat, with the older contestants more receptive to his not-so subtle reference.

(CONF) "All my life, people have told me I was basically Tommy Chong's....Chong character! Frankly, they're wrong! I've been like this way before it was in vogue and just because he made pot and long hair popular again in the 80s, doesn't mean that he made me!" Chong stated to the camera.

Eventually, Probst turned to Jessica, who was wearing a casual business-dress combo. "Sharp looking young woman, what should I call you? Any monikers of your own?" Chuckling at Probst's sarcasm, she shook her head vigorously.

"Nah, I'm good with just Jessica. Though Jess is acceptable too!"

(CONF) "Half of the people on this boat that I'm surrounded by, I sincerely believe that they're actors in elaborate disguises.", said Jess "That older man...I think he called himself Chong, whatever his moniker was, he DEFINITELY was recruited!"

Probst then faced the group once more, his grin growing ever-so obvious. "Alright, you want me to tell you how this is going to go down?" Before he could finish, a blond man with a Swedish accent interrupted him.

"Are we going to be on a tribe with super-players like Brad Culpepper, Ben and Domenick?" He snarked. Most of the boat was howling loudly in chortling laughter.

"No, not this season", Probst replied back without changing his demeanor. "By the way joker, what's your name?"

The Swede smiled wryly, happy he got the host's attention. "I'm Otto Axelson and please, just call me Otto! No Donaldson, no Cochran, no Abbatte, just Otto!"

Probst nodded. "Alright Otto. Tell your friends here that this season is going to have the One World twist!" With that, the 18 castaways shared collective gasps. Otto was quick to share his thoughts in the confessional.

(CONF) After I made my pre-requisite sarcastic remark for the day, Probst admonished me and was like: "No Otto, that's not the twist! You're just going to all live together!"', said Otto "My face was completely resembling the screaming painting by Leonardo Da Vinci! Not only has that twist not been used for 13 seasons, but One World was a TERRIBLE season! Please tell me there's no Redemption Island with a cameo by Ozzy and Boston Rob!" he begged to the camera as he jokingly fainted.

"Here's how it's going to work", Probst explained. "I'm going to call your names and tell you which tribe you're a part of. Once that's done, collect as many supplies as you can in 60 seconds. After THAT'S over, you guys will race to your new home. The first tribe there will win a case of flint. Whether you give it to the other tribe or keep it for yourself, that's up to you. Louis, Paul, Otto, Ernest, Chris, Amy, Layla, Christine, Emma, you are Drakaka, which is Malagasy for crab", he said as he threw the nine of them green colored buffs. "Jessica, Karen, Hannah, Lex, Kristie, Adam, Chong, John, Glenn, you are Ahay, Malagasy for lemur", he told them as he threw them nine purple buffs. "Okay, Survivors ready? GO!"

With that, the contestants scurried in varying directions, some colliding into each other. Louis, who had a mischievous smirk on his face, "accidentally" tipped over the supplies that were intended for Ahay, sending the various fruit, vegetables and supplies into the ocean.

(CONF) "Usually, these types of preliminary challenges result in an even number of supplies for both tribes.", Louis said to the camera. "Of course, the goal is to weaken the enemy, so I just did something a little bit unscrupulous!"

He then hopped over to where his tribemates were, cutting the raft loose and jumping into the water, as he beckoned for assistance from below. "HEY, YOUNG GUY! HURL THE FRUIT DOWN PLEASE!", he said to Paul. Paul nodded, then carefully tossed the fruit into the raft, hopping into the water after him.

(CONF) "I noticed Louis toss Ahay's supplies into the ocean and if you want me to be honest, I would have called him out immediately." Paul said. "But if I have visible ethics and morals, he's going to out me as being a threat to his reign, so I'll be his little sycophant for now, the Matt to his Rob, if you will! Besides, we could have recovered some adequate service vessels from that boat!"

Over on the other side of the boat, the members of Ahay were shocked to see all of their potential supplies lost at sea. Forced to jump in the ocean with nothing but their clothes, uncertainty permeated the group. Eventually a muscular, middle aged man in a green cameo shirt scowled unhappily.

(CONF) "We were told to grab as many things as we could and then jump into the water", said John, a drill instructor. "But just as Jeff said "GO", I could see someone in the corner of my eye tossing our stuff away. I don't know exactly who it is, but I have some gut feelings and when I find out, they're going to hear from me, no doubt about it!"

Another member of Ahay, this one a young girl named Lex, was wearing a Rolling Stones t-shirt and denim jeans. She voiced her consternation and dissatisfaction as well.

(CONF) Being a guitarist and all, you know a ROCK guitarist, I'm used to hearing some loud noises.", said Lex. "Hell, I think half my vocabulary is onomatopoeia or whatever you call it, but I heard this loud BLAM-BROOSH noise! I got a little bit wet before I jumped in, so maybe someone dropped something in the sea? I dunno! Who would be dumb enough to do THAT?!"

As the daily current picked up steam, the members of Drakaka were beginning to pant. Wheezing and hissing could be heard from all members, except for Louis, who was perched onto the raft as if he was their Sultan. "I think we'll be about an hour or so more! We have to paddle faster or those idiots are going to catch up to us!" he barked to the rest of the tribe. Most of them seemed irritated by his domineering attitude, except for a woman in her early 40s. The woman had frilly red hair and was cloaked in a green flower dress. She didn't seem annoyed, in fact she seemed rather happy.

(CONF) "While we were swimming ourselves silly, the man in the suit kept telling us how fast to go, how we need to kick the other tribe's butt and other sorts of dictatorial stuff!" Said Amy as she told the camera. "Me, I think we shouldn't be this aggressive early on. I know that it's a contestant with money at stake, but me? I don't mind who gets there first! I'm just happy to meet all sorts of great people!"

Ahay was not faring quite as well as their opponents. Several of the contestants seemed to be running out of metaphorical steam, despite the lack of supplies preventing the raft from being weighed down. As all hope seemed lost, a toned woman in her 20s hitched onto the raft and began kicking her legs vigorously, as if she was a human motor. "Don't worry guys, this is nothing!" she reassured them as she smiled brightly. Her light brown hair shimmering in the bright sapphire sky, everyone felt at ease.

(CONF) "I'm a really athletic person, so these types of situations are a snap for me!" said Hannah, a physical trainer from Miami. "I've been swimming all of my life, running all of my life, if I was able to fly for all of my life, I would surely do that too! This? This is basically like walking for some people!"

Approximately two hours later, Drakaka finally arrived at it and Ahay's camp. As the raft washed ashore with all of their supplies intact, the nine tribe-members shared collective sighs of relief as they welcomed their new home with open arms. Several members ran around to explore the location, while a young British woman with long brown locks and a t-shirt that read "KEEP CALM AND CARRY ON" was left to gather the supplies.

(CONF) "Immediately once we were washed ashore, my tribe was absolutely ECSTATIC!" said Emma, an accountant. "I suppose it's nice that we've finally made it home, but I think that they should have helped a bit! Instead, the majority of them chanted "Oh my god! A bloody beach! Sand! Water! Rocks! Where can I get one of theses beaches?!" If this is a teaser for the tribe's behavior, consider this a long, LONG season ahead!"

As the members of Drakaka got used to their surroundings, Otto found a small brown box labelled "FLINT", grinning as he picked it up. He then walked over to his tribe and announced the good news.

(CONF) "So far, this day has been absolutely splendid!" Otto exclaimed. "I entertain the tribe, we arrive at the beach first and now, we've found the flint and we'll probably have fire! With a day like this, I feel like the immunity challenge has our tribe name metaphorically written over it in scribbly signature!" he chuckled.

After Otto told Drakaka the good news, Amy had everyone huddle up as if they were a football team, as she looked directly at them, her smile perpetual. "So guys, since we ended up getting the flint and we all seem to be in good spirits, I think we should get to know each other a little bit, maybe tell each other something interesting about each one another. Anyone wanna go first?" Almost as if he was another one of her students, a young man in a fishing cap raised his hand sheepishly. He had a prominent mustache and emerald green eyes. With total sincerity, he chimed in.

"May I go m'aam?" he asked Amy. She was touched by his politeness and nodded back at him, giving him the metaphorical okay. "Sure! You're definitely a very polite person, which I admire! What's your name, son?"

"Me? I'm Ernest. Ernest Willis. Ah'm from West Virginia in this little mining town. When I was 16, I had to drop out of High School to support my ma' and meemaw after my pa died. It was hard, but ah' certainly am doing well now, thank you very much!"

(CONF) "Ah ain't rich, Ah'm gonna be upfront about that!" said Ernest, who worked in a coal mine in his town. "Ya know where I'm from, we ain't used to seeing much money, so to go all the way and get the prize, that'd be nice!"

While most of the tribe responding with polite acknowledgement, Amy seemed genuinely invested in his story. "Oh, that's very nice! I'm glad you persevered!"

(CONF) "Hearing Ernest's story really touched me!" Amy said as she addressed the camera. "I teach a lot of kids from underprivileged backgrounds and it's such an injustice that they have to go through with that! His positive attitude and drive are just wonderful qualities and I'm surely happy to be on the tribe with him!"

As others in the circle began to swap tales of their own, Louis had a look of subtle disgruntlement on his face, as if he wanted to be anywhere else but there.

(CONF) "This 'getting to know each other' crap, it doesn't suit me!" Louis addressed the camera bluntly. "I don't remotely care whether someone came from no money, I don't care whether they're related to royalty, I don't even care if they're trying to support their family! To me, it's completely irrelevant to the ferocious strategy I associate with the game! I'd ditch this circle and search for the idol, but given the fact that Jeff had to re-use a twist from one of the worst seasons, I'm stuck here for a while!"

While Drakaka continued to learn a little bit about one another, Ahay's boat finally washed ashore. The members, similarly to their own, were drenched from head to toe, only they didn't have any supplies with them, nor did they win the coveted flint. Adam was eager to make their presence known and shouted into the sky: "WILMAAAAAAAAA, I'M HOOOOOOMEE!", much to Ahay's amusement.

(CONF) "That guy in the tank top, the young one, I believe his name's Adam, he's a pretty funny guy", said Glenn, a retired army pilot. "I wish I had a zinger like that one, but that's not really me! I wouldn't mind spending time with him, I suppose we could balance each other out fairly well."

As the rest of the Ahay tribe greeted the members of Drakaka, Amy was visibly warm to the group, smiling and hugging each and every member.

(CONF) "Amy's little display of camaraderie to the other tribe...I think their name was Awey or some other crap, it really, really unnerved me", said Louis. "A lot of people probably are going to brush off my concerns and say something like 'Oh, you're just being silly, she's being nice!', but I think that that level of friendliness is dangerous and I'm DEFINITELY going to have to keep my eye on her."

Just as she did for her own tribe, Amy huddled up the members of Ahay and asked them tidbits about their lives. First she turned to a young woman in a dress similar to hers, only pink. "What's your name?", she asked with utter enthusiasm. The girl, who was named Kristie, giggled at Amy's energy and replied back with equal zest. "I'm Kristie and I make clothes!" she exclaimed. "Very nice! I really like your dress, looks like mine!" Amy complimented her. "Thanks!", said Kristie.

(CONF) "Amy is a really, really great person!", said Kristie. "She only saw me for a minute and yet she's asking me what I do, telling me I have great taste in clothing, it's so great to meet someone who cares so much about everyone else!"

Amy then turned to an Asian-American woman close in age to her. She was wearing a blue blazer with a lime-green Legend of Zelda t-shirt underneath. The woman, named Karen, replied back politely to her. "Hi, my name's Karen", she told Amy. "I'm a computer programmer, so in short, I'm the person who codes the games your children and me play when we want to be lazy! So in essence, I work hard to help people be lazy! Paradoxical, isn't it?" With that, the entire tribe laughed.

(CONF) "I don't think that anyone could have guessed I was a mother based on my attire", Karen said to the camera. "I'm not in a dainty, socially appropriate dress and I think that just intimidates people, when they see me wearing clothes intended for teenage boys. But Amy, she didn't care and I definitely appreciated that!"

About a mile or so away, Paul was conversing with Otto about Dragon Ball Z. The two perched themselves on a small rock, barely large enough to fit them both.

"So, I think that the problem with the Cell and Buu sagas were that Goku was endlessly shoe-horned in even after he died in battle with Cell", Paul said. "I definitely think that his contributions where he saved the world in the end were important, but I really wish Toriyama stuck to his guns and allowed Gohan to be the hero. Would've felt more natural to me, but just like Boston Rob is for this show, no Goku, no money, if you know what I mean."

"Yeah, I certainly agree with that!", Otto responded. "I think that the Frieza saga encapsulated the most essential ideas for the show, namely ascendency in both the literal and metaphorical sense and the idea that symbols can be tangible, that they are not just ideals. I think that when Goku turned Super Saiyan, it really should have been the penultimate portion of the show."

(CONF) "I'm certainly thrilled to have met Otto!", Paul gleamed. "I probably would have had no issue having my poker face sewn on for the entire game, so to speak, but to just let my medium-length hair down and not just gamebot yap every minute, I'm certainly happy about it! Besides, it's not everyday you meet someone who looks like him who likes shonen anime!"

Although Amy left to tend to Drakaka again, the members of Ahay were having a blast regardless. Lex and Chong were particularly hitting it off.

"You like what band you said?" Chong jokingly asked Lex for what felt like the millionth time. "Sorry, I'd remember you, but with my nickname, what you see is what you get!" Lex jokingly punched Chong in the arm and dramatically sighed, feigning utter annoyance.

"Nirvana!" she yelped. "I know you're probably going to think 'OMG, a 20 something who likes a band people in their 40s listened to when they were twenties', but it's just REALLY good!"

"Alrighty then", Chong replied with a playful smile on his mug. "Why not show the world what they're about, ya know..do a cover act of them, sorta like Sha Na Na!"

Lex rolled her eyes with an ever-growing smile, then obliged Chong's request, allowing the rest of the tribe to hear. With a faux-dramatic voice, she cleared her throat for the others to hear. "Ladies and gentleman...I present to you....NIRVANA!" She dramatically strummed along with 'Drain You', using her hands to resemble a guitar. "And what a show you're in for tonight! I just so happen to be the best air guitar player on the island of Madagascar!"

"To be fair, you're probably the only one.", Adam quipped. Everyone else laughed. Lex finally belted out the words, trying her best to imitate her garbled mentor.

"Onebabytoanothersayshowluckytomeetya! Onebabytoanothersaysiwilldamnmeetya! Dadada! Andwe'rerdsadjd! And we're rdsdsddsa!", soon nothing Lex was saying was coherent, but giving who she was impersonating, nobody batted an eye. Eventually, she smashed the invisible instrument to pieces as her monstrously loud crowd of 8 applauded and cheered. Chong imitated a groupie, earning another playful punch from Lex. "CALL ME!"

(CONF) "I'm definitely not afraid to make a fool of myself", Lex said. "I have an indie rock band called Splemain, we're pretty big, playing gigs on the West Coast and all and this is nothing new to me! Hell, this is totally mild in my business!", she said as she stuck out her tongue.

(CONF) "Lex definitely reminds me a lot of my own daughters", Chong remarked to the camera. "I have one who's 40 now and when she was her age, you just could NOT stop her from singing! It was totally euphoric and I'm loving reliving it!"

While Louis walked along the beach thinking deeply, he bumped into Otto and Paul. Brushing off his clothes, he admonished the two. "Hey, watch where you're going! What the hell are you two even doing alone on the beach? Making out?"

Otto and Paul deeply struggled to stifle their laughter, doing the best they could to answer Louis stoically.

"Uh...discussing game stuff. Ya know, alliances, idols, backstabbing, telling the jury how much they should buck up and get over it like Russell did! Right Otto?" Paul motioned to him.

"Yeah, nothing but dirty game stuff! He answered to Louis in the most serious manner he could. "What can we do for you?"

Louis raised an eyebrow, but didn't have time to ask them anything more about what they were doing. "Look, I need you guys to work with me, okay? You know, be in an alliance, pledge eternal loyalty forever to the state, yadda yadda yadda. Do you get my drift?"

Paul sincerely wanted to tell him off, but he wasn't in the mood. Nodding back cartoonishly, he replied. "Yeah, sure, whatever you say. You tell me who to vote for and I'll do it! Right Otto?" he said as he nudged Otto even harder.

"Yeah, right! Forever loyalty, no one betrays anyone, we worship the dominion of Louis!"

"Great, we shouldn't have any problems then! I'll tell you guys who to vote for tonight and we'll be good. Capische?"

"Capische", the two replied in unison. Louis smiled and walked off satisfied, while the two chortled louder than a pack of hyenas once he was out of ear shot.

(CONF) It's considered to be unbecoming of people when they claim to be in a comfortable position of power, but I think it's fair for me to say that I'm in one." Louis told the camera. "Otto and Paul said they'll do what I say, so I don't think I'll have to worry about them just yet. As long as I can find a few others who won't question me, this should be smooth sailing."

A booming voice could be heard through the heavens as John beckoned for both tribes. "Everyone, front and center!", he shouted in his best drill sergeant voice. "If we want to call this jungle our home, we should make it one by building a shelter! Who here is really good at building?" A scruffy male in his twenties called out to John, his voice akin to a quiet whisper. "Uh, I'm a good builder.", he said. "I couldn't hear you, what'd you say?!" John hollered. "I'm really good at building things", he replied in a more booming voice. "Thank you, what's your name?", he asked him. "I'm Chris." he said as he was given the machete by John. While Drakaka had left it there, no one was claiming it so John thought it wouldn't be a problem to use. "Pleased to meet you Chris!" He said as he watched him hack away at the trees madly. Within moments, Chris reduced them to lumber.

(CONF) "I'm really, really outdoorsy and creating things out of wood, this is nothing to me!", Chris told the camera. "I live in Alaska and built my own house off-grid, so I'm certainly within my rights to say I have experience!"

Chris hauled the bundle of wood over to John and helped him begin assembling the floor of the shelter. The two were soon deep in work, their movements synchronizing with each other.

Chong watched the progress from afar, raising his arms into the sky as he closed his eyes and began meditating softly. "Ummmmm", he chanted to himself. "Ummmmm." As he was in the middle of it, Adam noticed him, then tapped him on the shoulder. "Yo, Tommy Chong dude. What's up with those arm motions?" Chong was a little bit startled, but otherwise regained his composure and turned to Adam, happy to find someone else interested in his practices.

"Good question. I'm currently meditating and when you're doing that, you want to start out by finding your center, so to speak. You have to clear your mind, envision nothing but total, utter nothingness. Ever do it?"

"Nah, I've never done that kinda stuff.", said Adam. "Everyone around me always said it made no sense."

"Well they're definitely wrong. Here, lemme' help you out since you're new." With that, Chong helped his new apprentice into place, lifting his arms into the air as Adam closed his eyes, trying to follow.

(CONF) "Chong is someone who definitely amuses me!" Adam detailed. "Whenever I think of a hippie stoner guy, I picture someone like him! I always thought that they were kinda flaky, but after learning about this meditation stuff, I think he's funny enough for me to keep around!"

Eventually, the clear skies transitioned to a pitch black as the day came to a grinding halt. Chris and John had made substantial progress on the shelter and it was enough to house almost everyone.

"Bedtime!" John yelled. The two tribes collided into each other as they tried to find space in the shelter. Since it wasn't completely built yet, room was limited. Several tribemates, including Paul and Otto, huddled up with one another in an attempt to conserve room. Some had their feet jutting out such as Karen, while others were not going to get any space at all. Much to Louis' disappointment, he was one of those people.

"It's not so bad", John reassured him. "Sleeping under the stars is almost as good. Besides, it'll probably be up and ready tomorrow!"

Grumbling, Louis mustered up a cheshire grin. "Yes...very nice...thank you", he growled as he plopped onto the sand, disheveled. Suddenly, as he watched his competitors quickly fall asleep, he hatched an idea. "I guess this bed of sand has a silver coating after all!"

(CONF) "When John the military man told me that I'd have to sleep on the sand, I was REALLY angry!" Louis proclaimed. "But I realized that by sleeping on the sand, no one will notice if I go looking for the idol. There's no way this mission could go wrong!"

Louis slowly propped his toned frame up, then tip-toed into the distance. He intended to proceed through the bushes to avoid being spotted, but that clearly was not a plan meant to be as he slipped on a rock and face-planted in the sand. While not physically harmed, Louis' ego surely took a bruising. "Grrrr...", he hissed.

"Hey, what's that noise?" Jessica called out. Gulping, Louis tried to think of a plausible excuse. "I was...looking for some berries. Haven't eaten anything today yet you know..." Jessica eyed him suspiciously, then fell back to sleep.

(CONF) "I heard Louis prowling around outside the shelter and believe me, this was audible!" said Jess "He claimed that he was looking for food, but who looks for food at night when everyone else is sleeping? That's just not a believable story and he better not think I buy it..."

The members of Drakaka and Ahay were fast asleep when another person decided to leave the shelter. Stepping carefully over his sleeping tribemates, Chris hopped out of the fortress and galloped down the beach. Trekking through the jungle, he proceeded with caution, given the utter darkness surrounding him. He then noticed a cliff and smiled brightly, akin to a child in a candy store. Unable to contain his excitement, he ran up the cliff and gazed at the beach below, able to see everything below him.

(CONF) "I just could NOT sleep!" said Chris. "I really should be tired given how hectic this day has been, but to be able to look at the world below me with nothing but the stars above? That's PERFECT! I love going on hikes like this back at home, but it's deadly cold for most of the year, so I'm not able to!" Full of unbridled ecstasy, Chris howled throughout the sky, as the night abruptly ended. The golden brown sun was making its ascent into the sky as the collective Drakaka/Ahay camp was once more full of life. John and Chris were hauling wood over the shelter to work on it, while others, such as Karen and Jessica, decided to walk along the beach, sharing their hobbies.

"You REALLY like video games?!", Jessica squealed happily. "That's incredible! I have some gamer friends on Steam who are your age, but I've never actually met a gamer your age in real life before! What're your favorites?"

Karen laughed like a schoolgirl at Jess' astonishment. "I know, I know, crazy that anyone over the age of 18 could enjoy mentally stimulating activities under the guise of a virtual reality! Because that's just childish!" the two laughed. "My favorites are definitely Ocarina of Time and the FireEmblem series!"

Jess was more than pleased. "Stellar choices! Though to me, Majora's Mask was my favorite Zelda game. I liked the day/night system and I thought that the storyline elicited this impending sense of doom, sorta like a well-made thriller movie." "Valid points Jess, valid points", Karen nodded.

(CONF) "It can be really hard being a girl and liking games as intensely as I do", Jess told the camera. "But when I met Karen, who was 20 years my senior and had the EXACT SAME LEVEL OF AFFINITY as me, I just wondered if this was some sort of elaborate simulation, sorta like that early episode of Rick and Morty! But hey, if this is a simulation, I'm more than happy to stay in it!"

Meanwhile in one of the grassy fields that was reachable from a path by the shelter, Christine and Layla were conversing.

"Ya know, I think that most of y'all are good people, but Louis, something about him just smells FISHY!" Layla proclaimed. "There's always that one guy on each season who's looking for trouble and I think he's trouble with a capital T! Do you feel me?" Layla asked Christine.

"Yeah, something's definitely off with him. We should keep an eye on Louis and see if he plans anything else."

(CONF) "Me and Layla were having a little girl time in the meadow and we both agreed that Louis definitely is stumbling into trouble if he's not actively looking for it." said Christine. "I don't know if we're going to win this challenge tomorrow or not, but if things go wrong and we lose, I definitely want to vote for him."

"And what's really crazy is that I'm a business person like him! You'd think that we'd bond more, have common ground and just see eye to eye!", she told Layla. "You own a business, really?" she asked, her curiosity piqued.

"Yeah, I own a chain of beauty salons. Of course, it's nothing like working on Wall Street, but it's still the BASIC concept." said Christine.

"You're right. That is kinda odd. I guess not everyone can be a match." Layla replied.

(CONF) "Christine's a pretty nice lady and it's great she agrees with me about Louis.", said Layla "People like him, we don't tolerate those kinds of folks where I'm from. We call them snakes and we tell them to leave town! I'm hoping we can do the same with him!"

A loud grumble could be heard from Ernest's stomach while he turned to Chris. "You done building the shelter? 'Cause if ya are, ah think ah'm gonna go fishin' and get me some grub. Wanna come?" Chris was delighted to hear the mention of fishing and sprinted over to earnest like a puppy on Red Bull.

"You don't even need to ask! Lemme grab the spear we got from the boat and I'll be right there!". In a moment, he emerged with the aforementioned spear, the two waddling over to the waves as they then swam in.

(CONF) "Ah'm happy to go fishing with Chris", Ernest told the camera. "We gotta be able to look out for ourselves and get food, so havin' more hands makes for lighter work, that's for sure!"

The two men dove down underneath the blue water, surveying the ocean floor for fish. Chris swam a little farther ahead and noticed a rather large brown fish approaching them. Bobbing his head out of the water, he turned to Ernest.

"I found one! Let's get it!" With that, Ernest followed Chris' lead and the two plopped their bodies underneath the ocean and stabbed the fish rapidly. Eventually, it stopped moving and Ernest impaled it through the stomach, eventually resurfacing.

"We did it!", Ernest cheered. "Ah knew that bringing ya along was gonna be a good idea!"

"Don't mention it!", Chris said in return. "Let's go back to camp and show this to everyone, it's getting pretty late." The two made their way back to the shelter where the majority of Drakaka and Ahay was huddled around. Ernest held up their catch proudly, to the hoorays of everyone. Handing it to Chris, he took out a piece of flint.

"It was pretty easy", he told everyone huddled around. "We just went out, ducked our heads under real quiet and BAM, ya got dinner!"

"Can you come back with a cheeseburger next time?" Paul asked in jest.

"Believe me, ah'd like that just as much as you", Ernest replied with a hearty laugh, as he held the fish over the flames.

(CONF) "Ernest just came back with this HUGE fish and I was ECSTATIC!", said Paul. "I feel like normally on Survivor the first few days are fish-less and fire-less, but he's surely proven both of those notions wrong!"

Louis took a small portion of the fish and scarfed it down, but he wasn't completely satisfied.

(CONF) "I'll admit I was surprised to see Ernest come back with a fish that big, let alone anything at all", said Louis. "The kid doesn't exactly seem like the sharpest tool in the shed. If anything, I thought he'd resort to eating bugs tonight. Besides, he shouldn't feel TOO proud of this. Any idiot can catch a fish at least once. It's whether he repeats this that proves he's competent or not."

After both tribes finished their feast, John put out the fire, then crawled into bed. "We better have energy for our first challenge tomorrow", he told the rest of Ahay. Without any energy to protest and conceding to his point, the rest of Ahay scooched into the shelter snuggly. Most of Drakaka followed suit, with even Louis hitting the hey.

The next morning, the sun did not fail to rise once more, as the warm bright yellow permeated camp. Otto was the first to exit the shelter, grinning when he saw parchment sticking from the nearby tree. "Treemail, treemail!" he exclaimed. Paul, Louis and Amy followed, watching as he read the note.

"Welcome both tribes, today's the day, for your very first task. If you plan out your actions well, victory in you'll bask. There's running swimming and puzzles so make sure you're ready, cause' if you do this correctly your tribe will shoout yipee!", he followed along. "Hmmm, it seems like this challenge will have multiple parts", he suggested to the others.

(CONF) "I just received the treemail for the day and it implied that the challenge has several components, including running, swimming and building a puzzle.", said Otto. "Statistically, it feels unlikely we'll all be contributing to every portion, as most challenges involving several components involve delegating tasks to certain tribe members."

Louis smirked sadistically upon reading the note, clenching his hands in fists. "Let's give those weaklings hell!"

(CONF) "I'm incredibly confident for today's immunity challenge and I think I'm pretty justified to feel that way", said Louis. "I took away Ahay's supplies, so they should be MUCH weaker than us and therefore most likely to fail in the challenge. Yeah, we're going to win this easily."

As the two tribes proceeded to the challenge beach, Jeff called out for them. "Come in guys!" With that, Drakaka, then Ahay entered the field respectively. "Welcome to your first immunity challenge. Want to know what you must do?" he asked. Both tribes called out "YES!" together as Jeff began to explain.

"Alright, for this challenge, you guys will be divided into three pairs of three. The first pair will run out into the jungle and collect oars that the second pair must use. The second pair must use those oars to swim out to a buoy, then diving into the water and dragging back a VERY heavy case of puzzle pieces. The third pair will need this box of puzzle pieces to assemble a stacking puzzle. First tribe to assemble their puzzle, wins immunity and is safe from tribal council." Jeff revealed the immunity idol, which resembled a lemur. It was carved out of wood and had a rather perturbed look in its face. "I'll give you guys a moment to strategize and then you're off."

Louis turned to Drakaka and explained the break-down "Alright, I think Christine, Amy and Emma should run, while me, Ernest and Chris should swim. Paul, Otto and Layla could solve the puzzle." Layla was not pleased with this arrangement, however. "Ya know, I'm not the best at puzzles, she told him." "C'mon, you're going to do this and you can do it, he ordered her. Meanwhile, John was determining tasks with Ahay. "I think that Kristie, Lex and Hannah could run, me, Chong and Adam could swim, while Glenn, Karen and Jessica could solve the puzzle, since you guys seem to be good at that. Okay?" The other Ahays nodded at these arrangements.

"Alright, for Drakaka, Christine, Amy and Emma will run, Louis, Ernest and Chris will swim and Paul, Otto and Layla will be solving the puzzle. For Ahay, Kristie, Lex and Hannah will be running, John, Chong and Adam will swim and Glenn, Karen and Jessica will solve the puzzle. For immunity, Survivors ready? GO!"

With that, the two sets of runners darted off into the jungle. Kristie, Lex and Hannah were making quick progress, while Amy was slowing down Drakaka after she tripped.

"Ahay takes off with a HUGE lead! Amy's bringing up the rear for Drakaka!", Probst yelled. "Don't worry, we can do this!", Amy told her fellow runners, but the gap between them and Ahay was only growing. As Christine, Amy and Emma were climbing up the ladder, Kristie, Lex and Hannah already had collected their oars and were heading back to the beach. Louis was growing impatient as he awaited the return of the three, while he grumbled as John, Chong and Adam received their oars and headed out to their buoy.

"Ahay is KICKING Drakaka's butt in this challenge! Can they make a recovery?" Finally, Louis received the oars from Christine, Emma and Amy, then hopped into the boat with Ernest and Chris. John, Adam and Chong reached their buoy and dived into the water to unhook the crate. Louis tried to guide the canoe in the right direction, but Ernest was doing a poor job paddling. "Come Ernest, pick up the pace!" he barked at him. As they eventually jumped into the water, Chong, John and Adam had returned to shore, pushing the crate up to their challenge platform. Jessica, Karen and Glenn were then able to begin assembling the puzzle.

"Drakaka is STILL behind! The gap grows larger!", Jeff exclaimed. Jessica, Glenn and Karen were placing pieces onto the podium as Louis, Ernest and Chris returned. "Go Drakaka, start building!", said Probst, as Paul, Otto and Layla dumped the pieces onto the podium. Otto and Paul were making progress, but Layla was completely confused, placing pieces into incorrect slots as she started panting. Jessica, Glenn and Karen were approximately halfway done at that point. "Ahay connects another piece as they continue to take the lead!". Paul and Otto began to connect the feet of the lemur together, but Layla was not much help as the two insisted they solve the puzzle alone. While they began to catch up somewhat, it was for naught, as Jessica placed the head onto the lemur, calling Jeff over to check the puzzle. "Jessica thinks she has it and she does. AHAY WINS IMMUNITY AND IS SAFE FROM THE VOTE!" Jeff cried out as the tribe ran together and group-hugged as they cheered raucously. "Ahay, immunity is yours and you're safe from the vote, no one from your tribe is going home tonight. Drakaka, I've got nothing for you except for a date with me at Tribal Council. You have the afternoon to figure it out, so grab your stuff and head back to camp."

(CONF) "We decisively had our asses handed to us and that's thanks to Louis for having Layla assemble a puzzle." said Paul "She's definitely a nice girl, but she couldn't assemble her way out of a paper bag!"

Back at camp, Drakaka was dejected due to their defeat. Amy however did not seem as glum and went over to Ahay to congratulate them on their success. "We may have lost, but good job guys!", she told the tribe as they settled in for the night.

(CONF) "It was sad losing the challenge today and I will fully admit it was my fault in the running section." said Amy. "But I think that there's a bright future ahead for this tribe and good sportsmanship is never unwelcome!"

Louis turned to Paul and Otto and whispered to them. "You know the plan, right?" he asked them. "Amy?" the two asked together. Louis nodded to affirm this. "Amy", he confirmed.

(CONF) "I think we could have had a decent shot at that challenge today if it wasn't for Amy", Louis said. "She stumbled several times and Ahay was already far ahead by the time she recovered, so she's useless to us in the long run. Additionally, I saw her hanging out with the Ahay tribe before and that tells me she's not willing to vote with us, which makes her a threat."

Christine turned to Layla to discuss the vote later that night. "I really think Louis made a bad choice picking you for the puzzle, no offense. He claims to be a leader and yet he picked someone who wasn't even good at their task. Want to vote for him?" she asked.

"Yeah, for sure. He definitely made a big mistake and he's really arrogant." Layla said "We can't have someone like that poisoning the tribe."

Louis turned to Chris as he caught him walking along the beach. "Hey, I need you to do me a favor, okay? Please stop hanging out with Ernie, as he's bad news.", Louis said.

"Why is that? I mean, we caught some pretty good fish last night.", Chris said.

"It doesn't matter if he catches a million fish", Louis replied. He wants to keep around Amy and she both sucked in the challenge and was talking to members of Ahay. Do you really want to lose every challenge?"

"Well...no, not really. I admit you do have a good point", Chris replied to him. "So, I'm voting out Amy tonight?"

"Yes, vote for Amy.", Louis told him. "Alright", Chris replied, a little bit apprehensive.

(CONF) "Louis was right that Amy didn't do well in the challenge and we need to have strength if we want to win", Chris said. "But at the same time, Louis is kinda a jerk, even if he's often right..."

Amy and Ernest were walking on the beach as they discussed the inevitable.

"I really feel it's not right to have Louis here", Amy told Ernest. "I know I didn't do a good job today, but he's such a nasty, vindictive person, from what I've seen of him. I really don't like that type of behavior."

"Yeah, ah'm not wild about Lou either. I definitely don't want him making this time out here hell and I'm with you, don't worry about it." he reassured to her.

(CONF) "I really, really like Ernest and I'm happy he's sticking with me", Amy said. "He reminds me a lot of my son, who is equally as loyal and equally as willing to stay with you until the end, so I feel good and I feel confident."

Just before he prepared to head to tribal council, Paul turned to Emma. "Have any idea who you're voting for?" he asked her.

"I'm not quite sure", Emma answered honestly. "I think that there are arguments to be made for eliminating either Louis or Amy.", she replied.

(CONF) "Paul approached me asking if I was going to vote out either Louis or Amy", Emma said to the camera. "And I despise dishonesty, so I told him that I wasn't sure. Amy tripped a few times and slowed us down on the running portion, but Louis did make the decision of choosing Layla of all people for the puzzle. I suppose I'll decide once I'm at tribal council."

With that, Drakaka headed down the winding path to the place no Survivor contestant ever desired to be, unless they were an unrepentant quitter...tribal council. Eventually, the 9 arrived and turned toward Jeff, who gave them the instructions all first time tribal council attendees received.

"Behind each of you is a torch, please take one and dip it in the fire. In this game, fire represents life and once it's gone, so are you.", With that, all nine of them did exactly as he said, dipping their torches into the flames as they set them aside behind them.

"Layla, what do you think caused the tribe to flounder so badly in the challenge today compared to Ahay?", Jeff asked her.

"Well, I think that a lot of it had to do with the fact that I was chosen to do the puzzle, I feel", she replied. "Louis told me that I was to do the puzzle and despite me insisting I'm not good at puzzle...I do the puzzle anyway!" Upon hearing this, Jeff turned to Louis. "Louis, is what you're saying true, that you made Layla do something she wasn't good at, even though she warned you that she wasn't good at it?"

Louis sighed, expecting a question like this. "Yes Jeff, but the truth is, she probably would have done even worse at the swimming portion, I figured that with two intelligent guys in Otto and Paul doing the puzzle and me swimming, any ineptitude Layla had at puzzles wouldn't matter." Louis replied.

"Paul, what do you make of this, the idea that one weak person shouldn't weigh down the tribe, even if they're really bad at something?"

"I think it's a really, really silly idea, because in Survivor, you're supposed to minimize any chance of risk there is. If there's a relatively low chance your tribe will fail, that still should be avoided if a different decision can lower the chance of failure even more." Paul said.

"Amy, you didn't do too well at the challenge today, I know you bumped and slipped a few times during the running portion. Do you think that should affect the vote tonight?" Probst asked.

"I really, sincerely think that that should be overlooked", Amy said. "Yes, I clearly am not the best runner, but I'm a nice person and the tribe seems to be harmonious whenever I'm around. Louis is really, really controlling and he's done some things to rub me the wrong way."

"Like what? What have I done?" Louis asked with irritated curiosity.

"Well, when I was having everyone introduce themselves earlier today, you kept eyeing me and I felt really uncomfortable", Amy said.

"That's because you could have been conspiring with the other tribe! How am I supposed to know you're not making alliances with them?!" he snarled back.

"Not everything is an alliance!", exclaimed Amy "Why can't I simply be being a friendly, kind person? If you think that there's an ulterior motive whenever anyone's kind, then you're not the type of person I want to associate with!"

"Fine, I'm not bothered by that prospect", Louis replied. "Emma, what do you want to base your vote off of tonight?", Jeff asked.

"Well, I implied this to Paul before and I will be upfront now in that I want this to be a vote that benefits the tribe ultimately", Emma said. "Amy's a kind, wonderful woman and I appreciate her contributions immensely, but with her fumble at the challenge, I don't know if that could cause problems down the line. And while Louis wasn't wrong that she caused such problems, he's been very abrasive, so I'm not sure."

"Sure or not, it is time to vote. Chris, you're up", Jeff called to him. Chris headed over to the voting stall and pulled out the pen, jotting down a name onto it. He then revealed to the camera that he had voted for Amy. "I sincerely think you're a great person and I'd love to be in contact with you after the game. But we can't have constant failures in the challenges. I wish you luck."

Layla then headed up, jotting down Louis' name in capital letters with an exclamation point. "I can't stand the problems you're causing anymore. I think our tribe will be a lot more functional without you here." Paul, Otto, Louis, Amy, Christine and Ernest then voted successively, while Emma was the last to vote. She neatly scribed a name onto the parchment, which was not visible to the camera. Her back could be seen as she said. "This is a decision that will ultimately benefit the tribe, so I am willing to make it." After she placed her vote in the urn, she sat back down.

"I'll go tally the votes", Jeff said as he headed to the urn. "If anybody has the hidden immunity idol and you want to play it, now would be the time to do so." Nobody took Jeff up on his offer, so he proceeded. "Once the votes are read the decision is final, person voted out will be asked to leave the tribal council area immediately. I'll read the votes.", he said as he removed the top of the urn.

"First vote...Louis", he said as Louis watched him closely.

"Second vote...Amy, that's one vote Louis, one vote Amy."

"Third vote, Louis. That's two votes Louis, one vote Amy."

"Fourth vote, Amy. We're tired that's two votes Amy, two votes Louis."

"Fifth vote, Louis, that's three votes Louis, two votes Amy."

"Sixth vote, Amy. That's three votes Louis, three votes Amy."

"Seventh vote, Louis. That's four votes Louis, three votes Amy."

"Eighth vote, Amy. That's four votes Louis, four votes Amy, one vote left." Louis and Amy both looked visibly nervous as they anticipated the result.

"First person voted out of Survivor: Madagascar is........Amy, you need to bring me your torch." Amy was clearly disappointed, but expected this result. She complied with Jeff's order as she grabbed her torch, waving goodbye to her tribe. "Amy, the tribe has spoken", Jeff said as he snuffed her torch. "It's time for you to go.", he said as she walked out, but not before giving a parting message to her tribe. "Good luck guys!", she said before finally disappearing into the night.

"If this vote demonstrated anything, it's that this is a fractured group that doesn't have a united vision. If you don't want to come back here, I suggest you figure out how to fix that.", Jeff said. "Grab your torches, head back to camp, good night", he continued as the remaining Drakaka members headed out of tribal council, their torches still lit.

Amy's Final Words: "It definitely feels sad being voted out first. Not doing well in the challenge seemed to seal my fate and Louis had more support than I did. That said, I'm happy I got to experience this and I'm not going to dwell on what didn't go well. I just hope my tribe does well in the future and good luck to them."

Episode 2: "She Screwed Up Even with Both Legs Working!"
''Last time on Survivor...the 18 castaways were divided into two tribes; Drakaka and Ahay, but not before being told they would be living at the same beach. Immediately, Louis began scheming when he dumped all of Ahay's supplies off the boat before they could get any, causing confusion and anger in Ahay. Once ashore, Amy became everyone's friend, taking interest in their lives and hobbies. Paul and Otto become buds quickly, eventually being strong-armed into an alliance with Louis. At the immunity challenge, Louis' questionable decisions and Amy's poor performance in the challenge caused Ahay to run to victory. Louis and Amy were the targets for the night, him for his unpleasant, forceful personality and strange decisions in the challenge and Amy for tripping during the challenge. Emma was unsure of who to vote for, wanting to make the best decision for her tribe. In the end, strength took precedence as Amy became the first person voted out of Survivor: Madagascar. 17 are left, who will be voted out tonight?''

As the moon stood proudly in the sky, the remnants of the Drakaka tribe returned to camp, laying their torches against the tree. Ernest seemed especially downtrodden over Amy's elimination.

(CONF) "Ah was not happy to see Amy get the boot." Ernest said. "Louis was pissing me off with his bossiness and orneriness and ah wanted to see him go. Ah ain't on top and ah also ain't gonna kiss Louis' butt, so ah better just keep fishin' if ah' don't want him to see his eyes on me next."

Emma was having mixed feelings herself, having made the deciding vote against Amy.

(CONF) "It was certainly a difficult decision to vote against Amy", said Emma. "But while Louis is an obnoxious twit, he did seem at least somewhat more physically competent than she did."

Louis walked off from the group, mentally sighing as he narrowly escaped elimination before.

(CONF) "Tribal council had a really close vote tonight, so that explains how the other four saw me", Louis said. "That said, I shouldn't have to adjust too much and besides, I'm sure I could strong-arm at least one of them away from voting against me again."

Christine was about to return to the shelter when she saw Louis approaching her. "What is it?", she sighed.

"I know you probably voted against me last night", Louis started. "But I think you'd be better served by joining up with me. Do you really want your name written down if we lose again next round?" Christine paused for a moment, considering his words.

"I suppose you are right", Christine said. "Alright, I guess I'm in." she told him.

"Wise choice", Louis said as he walked off.

(CONF) "I might have just stumbled into an alliance with Louis", Christine said. "However, he is pretty forceful and will do anything to get his way, so I better pacify him by doing this."

Morning came quickly, as the members of Ahay were still basking in the positive energy that their victory yesterday brought. Everyone was having a good time, especially Lex and Chong. While Lex had the opportunity to teach Chong some of her favorite songs a few days ago, it was now his turn.

"So, what's the name of this song again?" Lex asked with a similar playfulness as Chong did earlier. Chong didn't hit Lex like she hit him, but he did get jokingly exasperated.

"I tooooooooold you", Chong drew-out for dramatic emphasis. "Hellloooooo-goodbyeeeee." he continued.

"Why don't you siiiiiing it for meeeeeeeee?" Lex asked, continuing the gag.

"Okaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaay", Chong retaliated, topping her "record". Lex felt it was appropriate to playfully punch him, as he then proceeded onto "stage".

Chong cleared his throat then turned toward his audience of one. Donning his best Ed Sullivan impression, he turned to Lex with a look of mischief on his face. "Ladies and gentlemen......THE BEATLES!" he bellowed as the entertainment "arrived". He "strapped" on his air guitar and began to "strum" along to the song.

"I say yes, you say no, I say stop, you say go! Go go, oh oh! You say goodbye and I say hello! Hello, hello! I don't know why you say goodbye I say hello!". He then proceeded to "smash" the air guitar, bowing. "Thank you, thank you very much!" he told Lex as he finished up in his "gig". Lex was left in stitches from his performance. "I definitely can get used to hearing that!", she told him happily.

(CONF) "I definitely think I know more old music than average for someone my age, but Chong is teaching me songs I've never gotten the chance to ever hear!" said Lex "My dad never had taste like this! HIS idea of a good song? Something by Willie Nelson!", she exclaimed while sticking out her tongue in disgust.

(CONF) "It's really great teaching Lex about my favorite bands!", Chong said. "The Beatles...the Beatles were my LIFE while I was growing up! Especially George, I can't wait to show her some of his stuff."

As Paul slipped out of the shelter, he noticed parchment sticking out of the same tree that it was sticking out of yesterday. Heading over, he pulled out the note and yelled in a manner similar to Otto's. "TREEMAIL!" he beckoned for his tribe. As they huddled over him, he began to read the note out loud. "Perched on a precipe you'll be, you're gonna have to leap. And if you destroy the china, then real well you will sleep.....hmm, that sounds, interesting." he said.

(CONF) When I read the treemail for the challenge today, I noticed it mentioned a precipe and leaping", Paul said to the camera. In Australian Outback, the second ever challenge was the one where they jumped off the cliff and had to swim down the river. They haven't done that for years, so I'm not sure that's exactly what they're doing, but I surely am going to have a fanboy moment if that IS the challenge!"

The scene then cut to the Ahays, who had just finished reading the note themselves. Adam was holding it, while Glenn looked over his shoulder. "A precipe, huh?", Adam inquired. "...What's a precipe?"

"It's a cliff", Glenn said. "I found that out in the air force."

"Oh", Adam replied.

(CONF) "I'm not too worried about the challenge today", Glenn said to the camera. "We didn't exactly have to jump off CLIFFS in the military, but we did have to swim for long periods of time, so I'm kinda desensitized to that by now."

(CONF) "Glenn's teaching me a lot of things!", said Adam. "Pretty useless things, but things still. Though why DOES anyone even need to say precipe when cliff works just fine?!"

As the two tribes arrived to their challenge site, it turned out that Paul was right. Perched atop a 40-foot cliff was Jeff, who greeted the two tribes as they arrived at the challenge site.

"Ahay, getting your first look at the new Drakaka tribe. Amy, voted out at the last tribal council!" Karen seemed visibly disappointed.

(CONF) "I'm really going to miss Amy for sure", Karen said. "I had fun with her and I'm sure we would have continued to."

"Alright, ready to get to today's immunity challenge?" Jeff asked the two tribes. After receiving an enthusiastic "YES!" from both, he then went on to explain everything.

"As you can see, we're standing on a really tall cliff.", Jeff said. "One at a time, both tribes are going to jump off the cliff into the river below. Once you've jumped off, you will swim out to a crate in front of you, green for Drakaka and purple for Ahay. Once the tribe member has touched the crate, the next person will then jump and touch the crate, so on and so forth. After that, you will swim down the river and onto shore with the crate. One remaining tribe member will take out four plates inside the crate, along with a slingshot and ammo. The goal is to smash the four plates to pieces with your slingshot before the other tribe. First tribe to smash all four plates wins reward. Wanna know what your playing for?"

Everyone nodded, waiting for Jeff to announce the prize.

"The winning tribe will get a nice big bundle of fishing gear! You've got poles, you got rope, you got bait, spears, Hawaiin slings and scuba masks! So if you want it, smash those plates!", Jeff told them. "Ahay, you have one extra member, so you're sitting someone out. Who will it be?"

Kristie volunteered to sit out the challenge. "I'll do it Jeff!" she said. "Kristie's sitting out, everyone get in your spots.", said Jeff.

"Alright, so for Drakaka, Emma will be smashing the plates and for Ahay, Karen will be smashing the plates. Otherwise, everyone's jumping. Survivors ready? GO!"

With that, the two tribes began hurling themselves off the cliff. Paul and Adam were the first to jump, as they both let out yelps of excitement.

"Wohoooo!", Paul shouted as he plummeted into the river. Once he resurfaced, he quickly began swimming to the crate. Despite his rather hairy chest, he made it just a few seconds before Adam did to his. Otto then dove off and swam to the crate, as Glenn did a few seconds later once he was cleared to.

"Drakaka with a slight lead", Jeff said. Soon, Chris jumped for Drakaka, while Chong jumped for Ahay. After that, Ernest, John, Louis, Hannah, Christine, Lex, Layla and Jessica jumped off jumped off. Once Jessica touched the Ahay crate, both tribes were cleared to begin swimming.

"Drakaka and Ahay are now good to go, start swimming!" Chris tugged onto the front of the crate and Otto pushed from behind. Ahay was having a little bit more trouble moving ahead with the rapids in front of them, with Adam practically frozen in place.

"Adam having a little trouble, costing some time for Ahay!" Probst announced. By then, Drakaka was already halfway downstream, close to shore. Glenn managed to close the gap somewhat, but Ahay was still behind. At that point, Drakaka had gotten their crate to shore and opened it, setting up the plates for Emma to shoot.

"Drakaka is ready to shoot their plates, Ahay is STILL in the water, pick it up!", Jeff said. Eventually, they finally made it onto the beach, but had a lot of time to make up as they set up the plates for Karen. Emma methodically placed the ammo in her slingshot and fired at one of the plates, smashing it into pieces.

"Emma connects, Drakaka smashes their first plate!" said Probst. Karen took a shot at hers, but ended up missing. "Karen misses that plate by a LONG shot!", Probst continued. Emma then fired at the next plate and it was practically obliterated. "Emma keeps it up, Drakaka is CRUSHING Ahay!" While Karen was able to hit a plate finally, Emma had then hit her third plate in a row. "Emma is on FIRE in this challenge, on FIRE!", Probst emphasized. Karen was ready to hit her next plate when she heard a smashing sound. "Drakaka smashes their last plate and wins reward!" yelled Probst. Karen dropped her slingshot in frustration as the members of Drakaka cheered wildly, running over to Probst. "Drakaka, nice job in the challenge today. The fishing gear is yours, head back to camp. Ahay, got nothing for you, head back to camp as well."

(CONF) "I was really proud of Emma for those badass shooting skills!", said Otto. "Losing the challenge yesterday was awful and this might just be the morale boost that we've been yearning for!"

As Drakaka returned to camp triumphantly, they placed their fishing gear on a log while congratulating each other on the job well done. "I was REALLY impressed by that!", Paul told Emma. "I never knew you were much of a slingshot person!"

"Oh, I've been doing this since I was a kid! Quite smashing, as we say in England!"

(CONF) "I was really, really happy that I won the challenge for us today.", Emma said. "A lot of people on the tribe said they didn't see me as being particularly good with slingshots and other kinda of weapons, but I have two older brothers and when you want to get a leg up on a boy, you need to know how to play like one!"

Donning the mask won at the reward challenge, Ernest went into the ocean, intending to come back with fish.

(CONF) "Getting that fishing gear was perfect", Ernest said. "Ah said ah was gonna continue fishin' to make sure the tribe knew ah' was important and ah'm keeping mah promise!"

With that, Ernest dove into the ocean, ready to go fishing. While most of the tribe walked off to hang out, work or have fun, Louis rummaged through the fishing gear, attempting to search for a note of paper. Eventually, he was able to locate it when he smirked happily. "They ALWAYS put them in the fishing gear", he said to himself.

(CONF) "After we won the challenge, I knew that there probably was a clue to the Hidden Immunity idol." said Louis "They usually show up around the second challenge or so, so I figured that when everyone went off, this would be my time to shine and get that idol!"

As he walked off from camp, Louis whistled a tune as he headed down the mountain, ready to read the clue in a second. He heard Chris coming back from what appeared to be yet another trek, then got nervous and jumped into the bush to avoid being seen.

(CONF) "When I was coming back from a trip up the mountain, I saw Louis standing around.", said Chris. "All of a sudden, he just JUMPED into the bush and I have no idea why. I wonder if I should keep my eye on him...?"

Once Chris was out of sight, Louis jumped out of the bush, but unfortunately, his idol clue was nowhere to be found. Upon realizing this, he grumbled. "Eh, I probably don't need it anyway. Russell always found them without clues, so I should be able to no problem!" He began by searching several of the nearby trees, sticking his hands into the various holes and cracks. "Damn it, they're not there.", Louis said. "I wonder if they could be in the lagoon behind these trees." He then ran over to the lagoon, which was muddy and boggy. Jumping in, he prodded through the dirt and grime, finding nothing but worms. "Blegh! Still no idol." After washing himself off, Louis tried to look in the field, but once again, he came off empty handed. "I thought this was supposed to be EASY to find!"

(CONF) "That immunity idol search turned out to be for nothing", Louis said with irritation. "I looked in all the obvious places and yet I got nothing but dirt! At the same time, I don't think I should be too worried, since it's unlikely anyone else is going to find the idol on this tribe! Paul, Otto and Christine are working with me, while Chris seems willing to put up with me for now! I don't know who else voted for Amy last night, but I think it was Emma. Either way, I'm untouchable, idol or not!"

Meanwhile, Ahay didn't seem to mind their loss very much. Jess was hardly phased by Karen's inability to hit the plates, particularly. "We'll probably win immunity anyway", she told her friend.

(CONF) "Drakaka ended up beating us in the reward challenge", Jess told the camera. "That said, it was only reward, so I don't think we're too worse for the wear. Given that we live on the beach, we hopefully can negotiate some type of deal with Drakaka to use the fishing gear half time. Besides, me and Karen are like Mario and Luigi, like Ash and Pikachu, like Jak and Daxter, so one challenge isn't going to break this iconic duo!"

(CONF) "I definitely didn't feel as bad losing since Jess was really supportive", said Karen. "It's definitely great when your team doesn't put you down for stuff like that. I always tell my sons that as long as they learn from their mistakes, condemning them and yelling at them isn't going to help, so great that Ahay isn't doing that!"

Adam and Glenn decided to take the time to explore the mountain, which they had seen Chris travel to several times.

"That weird loner, I think his name is Chris, he's always going up there so maybe we should check it out!", said Adam.

(CONF) "My tribe's pretty good so far, no one's really annoying me or making me want to target them!", said Adam. "But I really, really wanted to spend some time with Glenn, since he's the only guy who's really close in age to me. I like Chong, he's super funny and interesting, but if I'm not with someone around my age for more than a DAY, I want to scream!"

As the two trekked up the mountain, Glenn felt quite content. "Really, really like this part of the island", Glenn told Adam. "It just reminds me of the past and that's the best part."

(CONF) "I've travelled around the world quite a bit", said Glenn. "Not only did I go to Iraq during the war, but I've been to places like Greece, Chile, New Zealand and Mongolia and what I remember most are the mountains! To me, they just are the perfect structure and I like to look at them!"

Adam and Glenn soon found their way to a small pool which was below a cliff and waterfall. "Hey, this looks like the challenge today", said Adam. "We should totally jump in!"

"You sure?", Glenn asked. "We don't know how steep it is."

"I'm sure it's fine", said Adam brushing off his concern. "I've swam in shallower water!". With that, Adam leapt into the water, making a huge splash. "Come in, the water's perfect!", he said.

"Alright, I suppose I can.", Glenn replied reluctantly. He jumped in, splashing Adam. Adam then spat water at him and Glenn wiped it off as Adam laughed, rolling his eyes.

(CONF) "When we found the little rock pool, I was psyched!", said Adam. "I really, really like things like this and I wanted to have fun! Glenn was a little nervous and was worried about the danger and shit, but I showed him that you don't need to be afraid of ANYTHING!".

After the two swam around for a while, they began to make their way back to camp. Glenn followed Adam down the winding path they took to get there, as they moved past the trees. While Adam waited for Glenn to catch up, Glenn slipped and landed hard on his bottom, as he yelped out weakly.

"AUGH!", Glenn groaned. "Ow, this is pretty painful." Adam looked a little concerned and helped him up.

"Can you walk?" Adam asked him. Glenn tried to follow Adam, but he grimaced once he put his left foot onto the ground. "OW!", Glenn exclaimed. "Damn it!". Adam figured this was more serious than it seemed and helped Glenn back to camp by taking his hand and walking him back. He then found his tribe-mates and alerted them to the problem. "I think we need to get one of those medical people here. Glenn fell and he can't really walk right." With that, Jess and John went to find the medical team.

(CONF) "It seems like Glenn messed up his leg a little bit", said John. "I figure that Adam might have had something to do with it, that kid seems like he's always living on the edge."

Eventually, the Survivor medical team arrived at camp and headed over to Glenn. "Hi Glenn, I'm going to check your leg for you, okay?" said Dr. Craig Albright. Glenn nodded in return. "Alright." Dr. Albright then began the examination.

"Can you move your leg up and down?" he asked him. Glenn complied with the request and slowly moved the leg up and down. While he winced a little bit, he was still able to do so. "How much would you say your leg hurts?" Dr. Albright asked.

"Uh, on a scale of 1 to 10, I guess 5 or 6. I can still WALK, but it does hurt." Dr. Albright nodded and paused for a moment.

"Well the good news is that your leg is neither broken, nor is this serious enough for you to be pulled from the game. That said, it seems like you sprained your ankle, so I'd take it as easy as I can." Albright put some bandages and gauze on the wound, then headed off. "Take it easy!"

(CONF) "I banged up my leg pretty bad and man, does it hurt!", Glenn said. "I'm happy I'm not going to get evacuated, but having a sprained ankle definitely is a bummer and I hope it doesn't keep me down in the challenge tomorrow."

After the crew had left camp, Kristie headed over to the shelter and grabbed one of her dresses. "I'm going to use this for extra support for your leg, okay?" Kristie said. "Alright, if you say this works." Kristie then wrapped the dressed around the wound. "My mom's a nurse, so she taught me how to do this. How does it feel?"

"Soft", he said, as the tribe chuckled.

(CONF) "I thought using my dress would be a good bandage for Glenn, so to speak.", said Kristie. "I sometimes will use extra materials that don't make it into the clothing I make for things like that. I've always been told to make something out of nothing and I think I did just that!"

Hannah noticed Glenn seemed down, so she tried to reassure him. "I'm sure you'll still kick ass in that challenge, tiger!", she told him.

(CONF) "Watching Glenn get injured definitely was sad", said Hannah. "But I think he has a pretty good attitude and besides, we won the last immunity challenge and I think we can pull this off too!"

Otto was resting near a tree when he felt a hand tap him. Regaining his composure, he noticed Louis with Christine. "Hey Louis. What's going on here?" Louis was more than happy to answer that question and proceeded to do just that.

"Simple.", said Louis. "This is your new ally Christine. Initially I wasn't so sure about her, but I was able to convince her to join up and I think this is the beginning of a perfect business partnership!"

"Ah, okay", said Otto. "Hi Christine, nice that you're with us"

"Same to you Otto!", Christine greeted back.

"I'll make sure I tell Paul about this", Otto replied as he went off.

(CONF) "So apparently Louis pulled Christine into our little alliance", Otto said. "I wasn't expecting this, as I believe she voted against Louis last night, but having more allies does increase our chances of remaining safe, so viable choice, I suppose."

As the sun set into the night, the two tribes huddled to the shelter for some much needed rest. Once morning came, another paper was found in the tree near the shelter. "Tree mail!", Chong exclaimed as he held out the note. "Today you're gonna have a ball, but things will get real muddy. And if you do not reach the net, you'll see your council buddy.", Chong read. "Hmm, sounds like something involving balls and mud."

(CONF) "Glenn's injury has definitely brought the camp even closer together than it was before.", said Chong "Hopefully his leg's working enough where we can take home another win!"

The two tribes arrived at the challenge site as they noticed what appeared to be a basketball court. Except this one was comprised of not tar or even water, but instead mud. "Come on in guys!", Jeff called out. With that, the two tribes walked over to their respective matts, Adam holding the Ahay immunity idol. "Adam, I'm going to need that back", Probst said as he took the idol from him and placed it back on the stool. Once again, immunity is back up for grabs. You guys ready to get to today's immunity challenge?" Again, both tribes nodded as they awaited their instructions. "For today's challenge, both tribes are going to play a game of Survivor basketball. You will need to wrestle the ball from the other team and throw it into the net to score. The first tribe to three wins immunity. Ahay, because you have one extra member, someone must sit out and you can't sit someone out in back-to-back challenges, so who will it be?"

Glenn believed he was able to take on the challenge, so Ahay decided to select Karen. "I'll sit this one out", said Karen. "Alright, I'll give you guys a moment to strategize", Jeff said. "Alright, for this first round, Paul, Otto and Chris are taking on Adam, Glenn and Chong. Survivors ready? GO!" With that, Chris leapt out to get the ball, motioning for Otto and Paul to stay back. Adam tackled him to the ground, while Glenn had trouble catching up due to his leg. "Chris takes a hard fall for Drakaka!", Probst exclaimed as Chris was doused in mud. While he tried to get the ball free from Adam, it was no use as Adam darted down to the net and hurled the ball in. "Adam connects for Ahay, they lead 1-0!" Paul, Otto and Chris left the court disappointed, while Adam held his head up high while Chong patted him on the back.

"Next round is three women vs. three women. Emma, Layla and Christine are taking on Lex, Hannah and Kristie. Survivors ready? GO!" Hannah lunged at the ball, hurling mud at Layla so that would be slowed down. Though Layla now was caked in brown, slimy mud, she was not going to go down without a fight, as she grabbed Hannah's leg and pulled her into the mud, yanking the ball out of her arms slowly. "Layla is NOT letting Hannah hold onto that ball!", said Jeff. The other Drakakas cheered for Layla as Hannah clamped onto Layla's left leg. Layla yanked Hannah through the field, resulting in Hannah being covered in mud from head to toe. Almost out of energy, Layla hurled the ball into the net. "Layla scores! Drakaka ties Ahay 1-1!"

"For this next round, two men and one woman will be taking on each other. Louis, Ernest and Emma will be taking on John, Jessica and Chong! Survivors ready? GO!" Emma was determined to continue contributing to the challenges, but John had other ideas as he leapt into the air for the ball, then grabbed it as he took a hard fall into the mud. "John LEAPS through the air to get the ball like a maniac and grabs it!", exclaimed Probst in astonishment. Louis tried to chase him down, but John threw a ball of mud at Louis, giving him enough time to score a goal for Ahay. "Ahay connects again and the score is now 2-1!"

"Now two women and one man will be on the court. Christine, Paul and Layla will be taking on Hannah, Jessica and Adam! Survivors ready? GO!" Not willing to have a repeat of last time, Paul grabbed the ball quickly and distracted Adam by dunking mud all over his head. "Paul gets SAVAGE in this challenge!", Probst exclaims. Paul made quick work of the field as he threw the ball upward, scoring a point. "Drakaka scores! 2-2! Next point wins immunity!"

"For the last round, we're having our original lineup! Paul, Otto and Chris will be taking on Adam, Glenn and Chong! Survivors ready? GO!" Adam grabbed the ball and tackled Otto into the mud. Unfortunately for him, Otto was able to get up immediately and grab the ball. Glenn attempted to chase him, but his leg was giving him horrid pain. "Glenn is lagging BEHIND in this challenge!" Ahay and Drakaka both chanted on their respective tribes, but Otto soon connected and hurled the ball into the net. "Otto scores for Drakaka. Drakaka wins immunity and is safe from the vote!" The members of Drakaka all ran onto the mud field and high-fived Otto, who triumphantly held up his mud covered fist. Paul was particularly happy, crowing a sorta battle cry. "Drakaka, in addition to a free mud bath, you have all earned immunity and you are safe from the vote tonight. Ahay, I have nothing for you but a date with me at tribal council. Grab your stuff and head back to camp."

(CONF) "If Louis thinks that he can use the 'You're weak in challenges' card on me now, he's got another thing coming to him!", said Layla. "I played girl's basketball growing up and I showed Hannah what I'm made of, so thank you very much!"

Ahay was pretty bummed out over their loss as they returned to camp, heading over to the ocean to wash off the muddy residue from the challenge.

(CONF) "I really don't understand why Glenn decided to compete in the challenge today", said Jessica. "It makes no sense to allow an injured opponent into battle, no matter how good they are! It's like invading a country when your army, which is normally really strong, all has the flu!"

"So, how bad does it feel?" Adam asked Glenn. "It still hurts pretty bad, I'm not going to lie", Glenn replied to Adam.

(CONF) "Losing the immunity challenge today was hugely upsetting", said Glenn. "I decided to volunteer even with my leg injured and I feel like if I wasn't, then maybe I would have caught Otto."

Karen found Jess washing off the mud as she joined her. "Who are you thinking tonight?", Karen asked her.

"Glenn of course.", Jess replied. "He probably won't be much help with that bum leg of his now."

(CONF) "Unfortunately Glenn got pretty badly injured today", said Karen. "He definitely did well in the first two ones, so him not being able to perform would be a huge problem."

John turned to Glenn and sat down next to him. "I think you should stay", he said. "I know you're injured, but in the army, you're supposed to just walk it off. Besides, I think you're more capable than Karen is, that's for sure."

(CONF) "Most of the tribe is treating Glenn like he's a cripple or something and I am ashamed of them!", John bellowed. "This is considered to be nothing more than a scratch in the army and for them to act like he's on his deathbed shows how we handle difficult situations! Karen screwed up in the earlier challenge even WITH both of her legs working, so why should we keep her over him?"

As Karen and Jess walked back to camp, they noticed John speaking to Glenn. "What do you think he's doing?", Jess whispered to Karen. "I don't know, but I'd be a little bit worried."

(CONF) "When we were heading back to camp, me and Karen saw John and Glenn having some type of conversation, presumably a long one", said Jess. "I don't know this for sure, but I wonder if it's related to Karen, due to her performance with the plate smashing yesterday."

Jess and Karen then approached Adam, who was bathing himself off. "We need to talk", said Karen. "What is it?", asked Adam.

"I know that you and Glenn were hanging out before and seemed to be buddy-buddy, but he really can't stay.", said Jess.

"Do you really think his leg is that bad?" Adam asked.

"Well, to be honest, he didn't do particularly great in the challenge. I know he's your friend, but do you want to keep losing?", Karen asked Adam. Adam sighed in return.

"I guess you're right, even if I'm not happy to do this."

(CONF) "Karen and Jess told me that I have to cut Glenn loose tonight.", said Adam. "I don't WANT to do that, but I also don't want Ahay to go from the top to the bottom, because then we'll have no power".

As John walked down the beach to collect firewood, he ran into Chong. "I think we should get rid of Karen tonight", John told him.

"I don't know", said Chong. "I think Glenn's a good dude and all, but his leg seemed to be in pretty bad shape. Would it really help us?"

"Trust me. I've seen this most of my life in the army and I bet Glenn will be fine in the morning!", John replied.

(CONF) "John told me that he thinks Glenn is completely okay, that Karen should go and how this is "nothing in the army", blah blah blah.", said Chong "Not only do I really like Karen, but she can probably do better in the challenges right now than Glenn. Not that he's a bad guy or anything."

Chong then told Hannah what John wanted to do. "He thinks this is nothing!", he said to her. "I really don't know about that."

"I wish it wasn't true, but he could be in bad pain. That's kinda mean of him to just ignore that", said Hannah.

(CONF) "Apparently John has been telling everyone around that Glenn is in perfect shape and shouldn't be voted out", said Hannah. "One, Glenn's clearly not okay and two, we won't do well if he can't walk! When we head to tribal council, I hope he still doesn't want this!"

Just before tribal council, Chong told Lex about the situation. "What are your thoughts?", Chong asked her.

"Sounds crazy to me. John needs to get with the program", Lex responded.

(CONF) "I haven't really spoken to John yet, but I can just tell he seems like the kinda guy with a stick up his butt.", said Lex. "I know he thinks Glenn is some type of god or something, but he clearly can't move!"

Ahay then headed off to tribal council as Jeff greeted them. "Behind each of you is a torch. Please grab one and dip it in the fire. In this game, fire represents life and once it's gone, so are you. Glenn, how did it feel losing the challenge today, especially with the leg injury you sustained?"

"It was awful, plain and simple. Losing is bad enough, but knowing my leg isn't working just makes it ten times worse.", said Glenn.

"Jess, do you think that Glenn's leg could be a problem down the road?", Probst asked.

"Absolutely", said Jess. "I know Glenn's really strong on a normal day, but something compromise his strength and he's not going to be able to perform at optimal level." John shook his head visibly as Jess gave her answer.

"John, you don't seem to agree with Jess. What's your take on this?", Probst asked again.

"I said it before and I'll say it again.", said John. "Where I work, we treat this like a scratch and you're right back to business. Glenn seems fine, I have absolute faith he'll be fine and I'm not going to be a pansy about this!"

"Glenn, John insists to you that you're totally fine, what do you make of this?", asked Probst.

"I think John means completely well and I don't think he has any bad intentions", said Glenn. "That said, I am in a bit of pain right now and I really don't know how much his claims hold up."

"Karen, what do you make of John's view that Glenn's injury is akin to a scratch?, Jeff asked.

"I genuinely don't understand it", said Karen. "Glenn clearly took a hard fall based on what the medical crew said and he was lagging behind SEVERELY in the challenge. Me and Jess were at camp before and saw John discussing something with Glenn. I know I didn't do perfect in the plate challenge yesterday, so I wonder if John wanted to write my name down".

"John, is Karen right?", Jeff asked.

"Yes sir, she's absolutely right.", said John. "I think Glenn has more potential with all damaged limbs than Karen does with all her limbs intact. It's just what I observed."

"Karen, how do you react to a comment like that, that you're useless even with all your limbs working, while Glenn is invincible in John's eyes regardless." asked Jeff.

"I will say this that while I do like Glenn, he's not Superman.", said Karen. "I'm not Superman, Jess isn't Superman, Adam isn't Superman and neither is John. So I don't agree that Glenn's performance going forward will be on par with it before."

"Adam, what do you make of that, the idea that no one is able to just walk off anything?", Jeff asked.

"I mean, it is true. You can't just be better instantly. Even if I don't want it to be true, it sometimes is." Hannah seemed anxious, as if she wanted to be called on.

"Hannah, what do you make of this? Do you think John's being fair?" Jeff asked.

"No, I really don't. Glenn's strong, but he's hurt and we can't put these expectations on him. I think John's crazy to think that." John looked visibly annoyed as Jeff turned to the tribe. "Well, it's time to vote. Hannah, you're up." Hannah headed up to the voting booth and wrote down "Glenn". "You're a great guy and I liked spending time with you, but you're injured. Recover quick", he said as he put the vote into the urn. John then stepped up and wrote down "Karen". "I believe in the kid and I know he'll do better than you ever will.", he said as he slipped the vote in. Jess then walked up and wrote down "Glenn", while Glenn walked up and wrote down "Karen". Kristie, Lex, Adam, Chong and Karen then voted and sat down.

"I'll go tally the votes", Jeff said as he went to collect the urn. "If anybody has the hidden immunity idol and you want to play it, now would be the time to do so." Nobody stood up or called out for Jeff, so he assumed no one wanted to play it. "Alright, once the votes are read the decision is final. Person voted out will be asked to leave the tribal council area immediately. I'll read the votes."

"First vote, Glenn", Probst said.

"Second vote, Karen, that's one vote Glenn, one vote Karen."

"Third vote, Glenn, that's two votes Glenn, one vote Karen."

"Fourth vote, Karen, that's two votes Glenn, two votes Karen."

"Fifth vote, Glenn, that's three votes Glenn, two votes Karen."

"Sixth vote, Glenn, that's four votes Glenn, two votes Karen, one vote left."

"Second person voted out of Survivor: Madagascar is...Glenn, you need to bring me your torch", Jeff said. Glenn nodded and grabbed his torch, placing it down. "Glenn, the tribe has spoken", Jeff said as he snuffed Glenn's torch. "It's time for you to go." Glenn walked off and waved goodbye to his tribe, disappearing into the night. "You guys can grab your torches and head back to camp. Good night." The rest of Ahay did just that and left tribal council, their torches a lit.

Glenn's Final Words: "The nail in my coffin was me screwing up my leg, for sure. I have no idea how far I would have gone if it wasn't for that, which does suck. I hope John does well and Adam continues to have fun even without me there."

Episode 3: "Like An Annoying Sister, Except With Power!
''Last time on Survivor...Louis sensed that his position in the tribe wasn't completely stable, so he pulled in Christine to vote with the pact. At the immunity challenge, Emma's prowess with a slingshot gave Drakaka fishing gear and a new burst of confidence. At Ahay, Adam and Glenn went on a misadventure, only for Glenn to wind up injuring his leg. Louis told his alliance of their newest member, while at the immunity challenge, Glenn's injured leg slowed down Ahay and gave Drakaka their first immunity win. While most of Ahay thought Glenn would no longer be able to perform in the challenges, John had other ideas and wanted to vote out Karen, feeling she was weaker than Glenn. In the end, the majority got its way as Glenn was voted out. 16 are left, who will be voted out tonight?''

As Ahay returned to camp, Adam laid his torch against the tree, then walked off sighing.

(CONF) "Voting out Glenn tonight was a decision I did NOT want to have to make.", said Adam. "Not only were we having a lot of fun together, but now there's no one my age to hang out with on this tribe! I wonder what I'm going to do.."

"Do you think he's going to be okay?", Kristie asked Hannah. She didn't like to see her tribemates dejected.

"I have a good feeling he will.", said Hannah. "Adam doesn't seem like the type to weep in a corner for hours."

(CONF) "Adam was not happy when we got back to camp", said Hannah. "Every moment until then, I saw him being boisterous, cocky, confident and goofy, this just isn't him. At the same time, I don't think he'll be like this for good!"

John was irritated that the his pleas against Karen fell on deaf ears and he stormed off to collect firewood, clearly flustered.

(CONF) "I kept telling them that Karen wasn't going to do well no matter what", said John. "Did anyone actually listen to me? Not even close. I swear, sometimes I wish I had a tribe of soldiers and they'd just do what I say. At least it'd make sense and be orderly."

While John was returning to camp, he bumped into Hannah by accident. Hannah helped him with the logs brushed off her shirt.

"Oops, sorry about that.", she said. "It's late at night and you can't see, ya know? Maybe next time-"

But before she could finish her sentence, John cut her off.

"What was up with wanting to get Glenn out with the pack?!", John asked, clearly angry.

"Look, he wasn't going to do well in challenges! Didn't you see him yesterday?!", Hannah retorted.

"Don't give me that nonsense!", John exclaimed. "He was more than capable to brush it off and YOU were a huge part of the problem giving him that namsy pamsy approval of leaving! I'm telling you, Karen can't do half the things he could!"

"Ugh, screw this! I'm not going to argue!", Hannah said as she stormed off.

(CONF) "I get that John is really big on work ethic and making sure everyone pitches in, but seriously, Glenn was REALLY badly hurt.", said Hannah "He was probably going to weigh us down, as much as I hate to say it. Why doesn't he get that this isn't the army?"

The sun soon rose in the sky as the members of Drakaka slowly opened their eyes to signal the start of the day. Paul and Otto who had enough energy to put an entire Starbucks store to shame, were giving a "report" on the events around them.

"Good morning on the island of Madagascar!", Paul exclaimed with the passion of a professional weatherman. "I'm your host Paul Anderson and me and my co-host Otto Axelson will be giving you the daily rundown!" Paul handed Otto the 'mic' as it was his turn to 'report'.

"Thank you for that Paul! According to my never-inaccurate-always-right-weather-report, we will be having a balmy 85 degrees today with a slight chance of scattered mudstorms!", in reference to the challenge yesterday.

Louis could hear the two chatter incessantly as he shot awake. "And in other news, I will personally stitch both of your mouths shut if you two don't shut the hell up this instant!", he shouted. Christine heard the commotion and turned to Louis.

"Hey, calm down Louis! Let them have their fun.", Christine said.

"If your idea of fun is having blood pour out of your ears into that ocean, then be my guest.", he replied.

(CONF) "Nobody said that this would be an easy journey", Louis said. "But Otto and Paul, they're like SpongeBob and Patrick but with even MORE grating voices! I know that we're supposed to be allies, but I don't think that earplugs would be too out of line right now!"

Emma remarked at Louis' anger with a little bit of a chuckle. "Come on Louis! You have to admit that it was at least a little bit funny!"

(CONF) "Louis gets rather annoyed by Paul and Otto quite easily.", said Emma. "I know the two can be a bit of a handful at times, but I think they're just having fun and there's no reason to get so riled up about it!"

"I suppose the studio has been shut down for the day!", Otto exclaimed.

"Perhaps we should re-locate!", Paul replied.

"Good idea!", Otto replied again. The two laughed loudly as they frolicked off to the mountain, leaving Louis alone to stew.

(CONF) "It's definitely fun to annoy Louis because he knows that there is nothing he can do about it!", said Paul. "If he eliminates us, he loses his lackeys and then his head's on the chopping block next to those shrunken heads at Tribal Council!"

Eventually, Paul and Otto reached the hill that they tubbed "Chris' Crib". He seemed to stop by there fairly often, enough for it to be associated with him. Paul then "broke" their microphone as he plopped onto the ground next to Otto.

"I was getting bored of fake broadcasting anyway", Paul said. "So, have you heard of edgic by any chance?", he asked Otto.

Otto proceeded to imitate an over-excited fangirl as he squealed with excitement. "Oh my god, I LOVE edgic!", he yelled out. "What do you think Louis is going to be at this point? I'm getting TOTAL OTTN5 vibes from him!"

Paul chuckled. "To be fair, that's not an unfair guess. I don't know what he's saying in the confessionals, but based on the fact that he forced us to be his evil sidekicks and has this alliance go with me, you and Christine, he probably will be CPN3 at least."

(CONF) "I wasn't entirely sure that Paul would understand the intricacies of being a freaky Survivor fan who goes onto reddit and rants about how great terrible seasons are and how terrible great seasons are.", said Otto. "But I keep getting surprised every day! If he doesn't know what the Funny 115 is, then I might have to revoke his membership, though!"

Adam decided to leave the Ahay camp to take a walk. Heading down the winding beach, he eventually took the path to the spot a few others were calling "Chris' Crib".

(CONF) "I really needed to clear my head", said Adam. "I can't stop thinking about Glenn and I'm sure that going back to the pool will make me feel better".

As Adam neared the 'pool', he noticed Otto and Paul perched on the ledge in front of him. He hadn't really spoken to them since arriving, given they were on opposite tribes and all. He overheard them discussing some subject he didn't understand, he thought it was "edgic" or some other stupid, useless term. Still, they were the only people he had seen in a painfully long 9 hours who were his age, so he decided to approach them.

(CONF) "Those two guys, Otto and Paul, are their names I think, were discussing some REALLY weird crap!", emphasized Adam. "I think it's some system where you rate contestants or some shit like that and I was thinking 'WHAT'S THE POINT OF THIS!? IT'S SOOOOO USELESS!' Honestly, they seem like eggheads, but they're young eggheads and I need to speak to some young people right now, so I think I'll give it a go."

Paul and Otto noticed Adam approaching them, then turned to him.

"Oh, hi. You're Adam, right?" Paul asked him.

"Yeah, I'm Adam from the formerly glorious Ahay tribe!", he exclaimed with hints of snark.

"Who did you guys vote out last night? And what do you mean 'formerly'?", Otto asked with an eyebrow raised.

"We had to vote out Glenn. He screwed up his leg pretty bad, remember?", Adam reminded them.

"Oh yeah, he did seem to be limping in the mud field", Paul replied. "Hope he gets better."

"Yeah, I do too.", Adam said back. "Also, what the hell are you guys even talking about?"

"It's called edgic", said Otto. "Basically, you determine what players are considered based on how they behave. It's determined using certain metric figures and statistics-"

"Screw that crap! We're here to be in the real world, so why not follow me and come down to the real 'pool'?", Adam responded.

"Pool?", Paul asked, confused.

"Just follow me and you'll see!", Adam said as Otto and Paul ran after him.

(CONF) "I hadn't really spoken to Adam before this moment, but he seemed really eager to hang out with us!", Paul said. "I don't know what exactly he means by a 'pool', but maybe this is worth checking out! I could use a refrain from edgic anyway. I like it, don't get me wrong, but Otto can speak about it for an entire DAY without getting bored and even that's too much for me."

The three headed over to Adam's designated swim spot, gazing at the pristine pool of water directly below a waterfall and cliff.

"See?! Pretty cool, isn't it?", Adam told them. "Well, don't just stand there you two ladies, hop in! Last one in's a rotten egg!", he said as he threw off his shirt and cannonballed into the water. Paul smirked at Otto as he made a pushing motion. "Want to go in yourself or do you need help?", Paul quipped to him.

"Statistically, I probably have a better chance of surviving myself, so I pick option AYYYYYYYYY!", Otto wailed as he hurled himself off the perch into the water, splashing Adam.

"Hey Paul, I can come back up that cliff! Want me to 'help' you in? It could be an educational experiment!", Otto teased.

Suddenly, Paul puffed his chest upwards and assumed a heroic, booming voice. "PLANKMAN CANNOT BE HELPED!", he bellowed as he lined his arms up to his body, then leapt into the air, careening into the water below. "PLANK AWAY!", he shouted as he splashed the two. He proceeded to spit a mouthful of water at the two. "That's my OTHER super power!"

Adam rolled his eyes as he retaliated with a wave of his own. "Have you been hanging out with Chong by any chance?", he snarked in reference to Paul's rather...animated demeanor.

"Who's Chong? The old guy with the long grey hair and beard?", Paul asked, curious.

"Right, him. He's a friend of mine on Ahay.", explained Adam. "He says some REALLY, REALLY out there stuff, but it's okay because he's from the sixties."

Understanding the implications, Otto and Paul sarcastically replied. "OHHHHHHH", in unison, as if they didn't get the blatant stoner hippie reference. "Hmmm, that sounds pretty cool.", Otto said. "You should invite him 'over' here sometime. As crazy as Paul is now, I can't WAIT to see how he'll act with his influence!"

(CONF) "Wow, I can't believe this is happening!", Adam exclaimed. "I was begging and I mean BEGGING to speak to someone around my age. I don't know exactly how old Paul and Otto are, but they both look young so that's good enough for me! Damn it, this day has been AWESOME!"

"This has been fun, but we probably should head back to camp soon. Louis is going to get suspicious.", Paul said to Adam.

"Now it's my turn to ask about your tribemates.", said Adam. "Louis is the bossy guy in the business suit, right?"

"Right", Paul confirmed. "Except me and Otto aren't really friends with him. We're just in an alliance right now so that he doesn't come hunting for us, which again, he'll probably do soon if we don't get back to camp."

"Alright, that makes sense", Adam replied. "Stop by camp anytime! I could do this all day!", he said as he ran back.

"If only HE was on our tribe instead of Louis", Otto lamented. Suddenly, Otto saw a fairly large crevice next to the ledge he, Paul and Adam jumped off of. "I wonder what that is."

(CONF) "After Adam left and me and Otto decided to head back, Otto noticed this little hole near the rock we jumped off of.", Paul explained. "I know that nobody has mentioned having the idol yet, so that does make me pretty curious".

As the two headed up the rock "stairs", Otto investigated the crevice and reached his hand in. Just as they suspected, inside it was the Hidden Immunity Idol! While Paul and Otto were tempted to fan-girl squeal once more, they kept their composure for fear of anyone else hearing them.

"This is HUGE! HUGE!", Otto exclaimed to Paul, grinning ear to ear.

(CONF) "I was ready for this to be an averagely fun day", Otto said. "We meet a new friend, we hang out like frat boys for a bit and our "parent" reprimands us for staying out too late. But no, apparently this day had other plans, because we have found the idol! This is the type of thing that I always would dream of while watching the show on TV, so I'm REALLY tempted to pinch myself right now!"

"I think I'll hold onto this for now and in case one of us needs it, we'll play it on each other", Otto suggested to Paul.

"That's a decent plan, but what about Louis?", Paul asked. Suddenly, it was as if a lightbulb factory had been installed in Paul's brain and it received a LOT of investment capital. Forming an evil grin that the Joker himself would be envious of, Paul whispered deviously to his friend. "This gave me a little idea", Paul cackled.

"What is it?", Otto asked, curious.

"Louis probably wants the idol, right?", Paul began. "You know, being the try-hard 'villain' and all?"

Otto then started to see his point. "I'm listening", he said.

"So, I don't want him to actually know about this idol, because then he'll probably demand it", Paul explained. "But he seems so arrogant, so delusional and desperate for power that maybe if we created a plausible FAKE idol, we can give it to him and not only prevent him from finding out about ours, but we could also put a target on him!"

"Hmmm...that sounds really, really screwed up and underhanded", Otto said in a seemingly admonishing voice. "I LOVE IT! Let's go get some of the materials we got from the boat and make it look REALLY, REALLY convincing!", Otto said as he placed the real idol in his pocket and ran off with Paul.

(CONF) "I'm glad that Otto liked my plan", said Paul. "Bob made a fake idol in Gabon and gave it to Randy, which was absolutely hilarious! If we give this to Louis, I bet he's not even going to realize that he's being bamboozled!"

The two headed off to a stump in the woods, laying down all the materials they could find. Otto took the piece of back and pinched small holes through it, inserting a decent amount of string.

"This'll definitely help, since most idols are attached to some type of rope." Otto said. "Paul, may I have the paste and beads, please?"

"Sure thing!", he said as he handed him those very items. Otto then carefully fastened the beady eyes onto the idol, along with an equally beady nose and face. "What do you think?", Otto asked.

"I think it looks very convincing! Perfect!", Paul exclaimed. Eventually, the two ran down to the beach, anticipating Louis' reaction.

Back at camp, Louis was growing impatient.

"Christine, where the hell ARE those two?!", Louis hollered. "We're supposed to discuss business!"

"Oh, come on Louis", Christine replied. "I'm sure Otto and Paul had a very good reason for being gone that long."

"Again, as I said a few days ago, what could they possibly be doing for this long? Making out?!", Louis wondered. "Forget it, I'm going to go look for them myself."

(CONF) "Louis really, really needs to stop being so rigid", said Christine. "Yes, we're in an alliance and have to work together, but these demands with no leeway, I don't think they're going to help anyone in the long run!"

"Louis?", Layla asked with exasperation.

"Louis", Christine confirmed.

Just as Louis was about to head up the hill to read Otto and Paul the riot act, the two darted to him, panting. "Sorry about that Lou", Otto said in his best 'tired' voice. "But we were doing something REALLY important!"

"Like what?", Louis asked. "Hosting your little weather show?"

"Even better!", Paul exclaimed. "We found you the idol! Otto, care to show him?"

Otto pulled out the "idol" and handed it to Louis. He would never be able to forget the look on his face.

"Oh my god! You two actually did something useful!", Louis exclaimed. "Do you know what this means?!"

"You'll never shut up about it?" Paul joked.

"Haha", Louis replied sarcastically. "It means we're in complete and utter power! No one could get close to us before, but now, we're practically GODS! Thanks you two!"

"Anytime", Otto replied, struggling immensely not to laugh.

(CONF) "Jesus, I really didn't expect that to be so easy", Paul remarked. "But there's no reason for me to complain about that. It's a shame that this season wasn't filmed in April, because if you ask me, this is THE greatest April Fool's Day trick in the history of history, belated or not!"

Once again, as Louis walked off satisfied, Otto and Paul cackled like hyenas once he was out of earshot. "Wait until Adam hears of this!", Otto exclaimed.

(CONF) "I think that I was born to win this game!", Louis exclaimed. "It's the only logical explanation for why my OWN ALLIES handed over the idol to me. I may have thought those two were a bunch of irritating imbeciles, but at least they're painfully LOYAL ones! Wow, nothing can go wrong now! Finals, here I come!"

Back at the Ahay camp, Hannah had the tribe involved in a game of baseball, or at least whatever the Survivor equivalent was. With Chong at bat, Hannah made the pitch as he slugged the splinter into the air, "running" oh so slowly. "And you're out!", Hannah exclaimed.

(CONF) "I think we're all getting over the loss and Glenn's elimination", said Hannah. "Me and the others have been playing all sorts of games and I never thought that it'd be this much fun on a deserted island! But hey, everyone seems to be having a good time, so that's fine with me!"

As Adam headed back to his tribemates, Chong and Lex greeted him enthusiastically.

"Hey, Adam! You're just in time", Chong explained. "Hannah has started her own MLB team! I have a pretty shoddy batting average, but you just might be the muscle we need!"

"Yeah, and I'm providing background music!", said Lex.

"Uh..okay, I guess I'll get in line", said Adam.

(CONF) "Things were pretty strange when I got back to camp", said Adam. "Of course, giving I live with a hippie, a rockstar and a really peppy athlete, it's not hard to see why!"

As Adam eventually made it to bat, he hit a "home run" as he ran around the literal sand diamond, decisively safe. "AND THE CROWD GOES WILD! ADAM WALLMAN IS THE SEASON MVP!", Adam yelled.

(CONF) "Adam was really, really peppy when he got back to camp", said Hannah. "He normally is, but given how upset he was last night over Glenn, it seems strange. Besides, he was also gone for a really long time and that makes me wonder."

While most of the other Ahay tribe members headed off, Hannah stopped Adam for a moment. "Hey, is it okay if I speak with you?", Hannah asked.

"Uh, sure", Adam responded. "What's up?"

"Why were you gone for so long?", Hannah asked. "I just wonder, because I feel like it was a few hours at least."

"Nothing, just exploring I guess", Adam said in response. "Why should it matter?"

"I'm a really friendly person, but I just hope you weren't speaking to anyone on the other tribe, it makes me nervous.", said Hannah. "I get that it's a social game, but it has limits." Hannah then walked off as Adam was left to process what she just said.

(CONF) Immediately after we were done playing that game, Hannah pulled me over and kept asking me tons of questions like "What were you doing? Who were you talking to? Are you sure you're with us'", said Adam. "I find it really, really annoying that she's suggesting I could be a traitor, just because I'm talking to people from the other tribe on a season where that's the twist! She's like a sister, except with power! And it does make me nervous that she could want me out. Maybe I should stop her before she can "stop" me.

Turning to find his significantly older buddy, Adam ran into Lex.

"Oops, sorry", Adam said. "What are you even doing here?", Adam asked.

"I kinda just wanted to take in my surroundings and just feel everything", said Lex. "It reminds me of my gigs."

"That's...nice I guess", Adam replied. "Hey, does Hannah make you 'nervous' at all?", he wondered.

"Nervous? Not really, in fact she's really nice!", Lex exclaimed. "That game of baseball we were playing, that was awesome!"

"Yeah, but after you left, she told me that me being gone for so long made her nervous. She thinks I'm plotting against her or something and that makes me think she wants me next.", Adam explained. "You're a social person, right?" Adam asked her.

"Well, of course!", Lex exclaimed. "I don't think I can be a MINUTE without someone else!"

"In that case, you should be on the top of her hit list soon!", Adam said. "If she thinks I'M a danger because I made a few friends with green bandannas, then you should be wanted by the FBI, if you know what I mean!"

"Hmmm, that does make sense", Lex noted. "So, what should we do?"

"I was thinking that maybe we could throw the challenge and take her out.", Adam explained "Besides, she could be a physical threat in the merge. Chong will probably be on board if we talk to him and her and John were bickering with each other last night, so that's at least half the tribe. What do you say? Are you in to remove the social-hater?"

Lex was shocked, as she heard from friends of hers that it was a no-no to throw challenges on Survivor, that only the worst types of players had the audacity to do something like that. Still, Adam had a reasonable point. If Hannah was going to get paranoid over simple social interaction, then who was to say she wouldn't be next?

"You know what, I think I'll do it", Lex decided. "I'll go tell Chong and then we should be good!"

"Thanks!", Adam yelled back. "Yes, this is too easy!"

(CONF) "Adam told me that Hannah was being really nosy about his social life on the island", Lex explained. "I really, really like her, but that's not cool! I want to, you know, MAKE FRIENDS when I'm here and if someone's going to tell me "no", I don't want them here! I know it's considered wrong to throw a challenge, but if I need to do it, so be it!"

Chong was in a deep sleep as Lex approached him. He wanted to conserve energy for whenever the next challenge would be and sleeping cleared his mind. Suddenly, he felt someone tap him on the knee as he sprung awake. "Hey, who's there?!", Chong said as he tried to regain his composure. "Oh, hey Lex! What's going on? Is it tomorrow yet? Did I miss the challenge?"

"No silly", Lex said as she giggled at Chong's responses. "I need to talk to you."

"What's going on?", he asked with curiosity.

"I was talking to Adam earlier and he thinks that we should throw the challenge tomorrow", Lex explained. Chong was speechless, his jaw practically unhinged from his skull.

"Throw the challenge?! Why should we do that?!", he said with confusion.

"Simple", Lex explained. "Apparently Hannah said some really controlling, dictator kinda stuff to Adam when he came back to camp, something about how he can't have talk to members from the other tribe because it makes him look suspicious. I really don't want someone tell me who can be my friend, you know?"

Chong listened to her, nodding and "mmphming" when appropriate. "That DOES sound really unfair!", Chong exclaimed." I thought Hannah was super chill and friendly before this! How does talking to someone on the other tribe mean you're a traitor?! That doesn't even make any sense!"

"I thought the same thing!", Lex replied "If she's going to be that crazy about who we talk to, I don't want her here! What's next, she tells me when and where I can go to the bathroom?!"

"Yeah, I'm on board with you", Chong said. "I guess when Adam comes by we can figure this out specifically, but I'll totally help you guys now."

(CONF) "Lex told me that it was in our best interest to throw tomorrow's challenge", said Chong. "Initially, I didn't understand why she wanted to do that, but when she told me how Hannah had a fit over where Adam was, I just couldn't support that. I've been fighting against people like that my whole life and I'm not gonna stop now!"

As the sun began to set, Adam approached the two. "Alright guys, here's the deal", Adam whispered so that he would ensure no one else heard. Whatever the challenge is tomorrow, we're gonna throw it", he explained as the two nodded. "I think it's immunity since we didn't have a challenge today, so I doubt they'll have time to only do reward. Lex, I want you to hardly move in this challenge. Go slow, trip, pant, just do "poorly", okay?"

Lex nodded. "Yeah, I'm down with that." Adam then continued.

"I'm going to talk to John after the challenge", he explained. "Him and Hannah were fighting last night and if I can give him some spiel about how Hannah didn't work enough, or how I think she wants to vote out another strong person, he'll eat that all up."

"Alright, that sounds like a good plan", Chong said. "Tomorrow, we're gonna show Hannah what happens when you are authoritarian like that!"

(CONF) "I'm so pleased with myself right now", said Adam. "I convinced Lex and Chong to pull off this stunt tomorrow and then I'll get out Hannah. I guess you could say that I'm like a bull. If anyone shows me read, I'll have to run them out of the stadium. This'll work, line, hook and sinker."

The two tribes were fast asleep as the night proceeded uneventfully. The moon then lost the daily battle with the sun as it rose once more, ready to ruin the sleep of people everywhere. Hannah plopped out of bed as she ran over to the tree, serenading to her tribemates.

"TREEMAAAAAAIL!", she called out. "''Today you'll get both food and you will be safe for this round. Just follow the reptile and chase the other tribe 'round". ''

"Sounds like it will involve running", Karen said.

"In that case we are DESTINED to win!", Hannah exclaimed with joy.

(CONF) "I've been running since I was 5!", Hannah exclaimed. "I've been doing it for fun, in school, just everywhere I run! So when I heard that today's challenge involved running, I figured that this should be a blowout, an easy victory!"

The two tribes headed to the challenge field as Jeff called them in. "Come on in guys! Drakaka, getting your first look at the new Ahay tribe, Glenn voted out at the last tribe council." A few Drakaka members seemed a bit surprised, but otherwise no one really reacted. "Drakaka, gotta take back that back", Jeff said as he told back to the immunity idol and placed it onto the perch. "Once again, immunity is back up for grabs! For today's challenge, both tribes will carry a VERY heavy stuffed snake and run around a track with it. It is going to be difficult and cumbersome to carry, so if you want to drop out at any point, just let go of the snake and come sit on the bench. The first tribe to touch the other tribe and catch up with them, wins immunity! In addition, you're playng for reward. Wanna know what you're playing for?", Jeff asked.

Everyone nodded excitedly as they waited for Jeff to tell them.

"The winning tribe gets their very own Survivor garden! Spices, vegetables and fruit! Losing tribe gets nothing! I'll give you a moment to strategize!"

Eventually, the two tribes were on opposite sides of the track as they waited for Jeff to give the okay. Adam turned to Lex so she could confirm the plan, with her nodding to him.

"For immunity and reward, Survivors ready? GO!" Immediately, Drakaka sped across the track faster than lighting. Ahay tried to flee from them, but they were lagging behind, as Lex started to become winded.

"Lex is struggling! Could this spell trouble for Ahay?" Probst asked.

"Come on, pull me!", Lex yelled out. The other Ahay members tried to compensate for Lex's inability to keep up, but they were finding it difficult. Jess was visibly sweating. As this occurred, Louis had Drakaka lunge closer.

"The gap is getting smaller, Ahay has to pick up the pace!", yelled Probst. At that moment, Lex plopped to the ground, almost like the raggedy snake they were carrying.

"Lex plummets to the ground! Drakaka is gaining on Ahay!" Hannah began getting nervous and yelled at Lex. 'Come on, you can do this Lex!" Lex "complied" as she 'struggled' to get up. While she resumed running, she must have had lead weights attached to her, as she was moving an inch per hour. Louis and Paul were quick to take advantage of this, darting even closer to Ahay.

"Louis is GAINING on Ahay! They will need superpowers to avoid this!" Just then, Lex let go of the snake, as it then felt 1,000 pounds heavier to the rest of her tribe. "I'm sorry guys, I just can't carry it!", she said as she ran to the bench. "Damn it!", John yelled out. While he tried his best to compensate for the loss, it was growing increasingly hopeless. Otto began galloping like a horse, while Louis and Paul continued driving the head.

"Drakaka is less than 3 feet away from Ahay!" Probst yelled. Chong proceeded to yell a dramatic "NOOOOOOOO!", as he witnessed Louis touch the back of their snake.

"It's over! DRAKAKA WINS IMMUNITY AND REWARD!", Probst screeched. All of the Drakaka members excitedly ran over to collect their earnings, with Paul and Otto doing a bizarre victory dance. Ahay on the other hand, looked completely crushed. "Drakaka, once again immunity is yours. Enjoy your new spice garden with your night off. Ahay, I have nothing for you. You have tribal council with me tonight, so grab your stuff and head back to camp."

(CONF) "That challenge seemed pretty odd", said Jess. "I know Lex isn't Herculean in terms of strength, but that performance made an uncoordinated five year old look like an Olympic medalist! I definitely think something's up!"

Back at Drakaka, the tribe was elated over their second immunity victory in a row. "And I thought we'd be the next Matsing!", Paul exclaimed.

(CONF) "It was definitely amazing winning another immunity challenge", said Paul. "We got some really good spices, some fruit and some peppers, so I think we're not going to be hungry tonight."

Otto, while pleased, did not quite buy the win. "Hey guys, do you think something was a little...weird about our victory? Lex was doing some strange stuff."

Chris shook his head. "Maybe she was acting a little bit weird, but that just seems like who she is", he responded.

(CONF) "Otto was a little bit concerned about the challenge today", said Chris. "He thought that maybe Lex was intentionally losing, not doing her best, but I really don't think that's the case. Besides, we won and that's what matters most!"

Meanwhile at Ahay, the tribe's mood was soured over the second consecutive immunity loss.

(CONF) "Losing ANOTHER immunity challenge?!", Hannah shouted with disbelief. "And even more importantly, a RUNNING challenge?! It just doesn't add up. But Lex was doing some shady, suspicious things, so I wonder if this wasn't a true loss."

Hannah then approached Karen and Jess and explained her concerns

"Look, I don't want to be a sore loser", Hannah started "But I think someone on the tribe tampered with the challenge."

"You mean like throwing it?" Karen asked, concerned.

"Yeah, exactly!", said Hannah. "Didn't you notice how epically bad Lex was doing, like worse than normal bad?"

"Hmmm...", said Karen. "She actually did seem to be doing pretty poorly, even worse than she normally does. I always pictured her as being average at challenges."

"Well", said Hannah "I think we should vote her out. What if she has some alliance and she plans on doing this in the future?"

"That's a good point", said Karen. "John did try to target me last night, but I feel like he would never try to lose. I'm in"

(CONF) "Hannah told me that apparently Lex was throwing the challenge today", Karen started. "And that does make me a little bit angry. I don't want to have my game sabotaged by her if she has an alliance I don't know of, so I think we better take action against her while we can."

Adam went to find John, who was chopping wood again. "Hey John, can I talk to you for a moment?", Adam asked.

"Yes, what is it?", asked John.

"I think we should vote out Hannah tonight.", said Adam "What are your thoughts on that?"

"Well, me and her did have some words last night.", said John. "I really can't see why she didn't want to save Glenn! But I don't know, she IS pretty strong!"

"True", said Adam "But remember how much she was playing around yesterday instead of pitching in? That never makes for a good, cohesive camp, right?"

"Actually, you ARE right!", John yelled out "All she was doing was playing that stupid excuse for baseball! If she's not going to help out around camp, then she's as good as gone! I'll vote for her!"

"Perfect, thanks for helping John", Adam said as he walked off.

(CONF) "At first, I was confused as to why Adam wanted Hannah out", said John. "Sure, we agued, but I knew she was good at challenges. But when he pointed out the nerve she had to goof off like this is some type of party instead of busting her butt around camp, that's when I realized how much sense this makes!"

John then met up with Chong and Lex. "Alright, so I got John on board, but now we need to get someone else.", said Adam. "I think Jess and Karen see you as being some sort of mole, so they're out".

"Hmm, why don't we try Kristie?", suggested Lex.

"That's a good idea!" exclaimed Adam "She seems pretty social or at least friendly, so if we tell her how much of a control freak Hannah is about this, then she totally will help us! I'll go talk to her."

(CONF) "I wondered how we were gonna actually pull this off", said Adam. "After all, me, Chong, Lex and John are only four people. But when I remembered what Kristie was like, I figured that we actually could do this!"

Adam eventually found Kristie cleaning one of her dresses, then tapped her on the shoulder. "Kristie, can I talk to you for a sec?", Adam asked her.

"Sure", she said. "What can I do for you?"

"Well", Adam started. "I know that Lex didn't exactly do great at the challenge. But Hannah said some really weird, controlling stuff to me before about who I can talk to and who I can't talk to. It may seem like a silly reason to want someone out, but what if she wants to target us? I mean, you're pretty social, right? What if she wants you out after me?"

Kristie seemed pretty disappointed to find out that someone as nice as Hannah could do something so seemingly unfair. "Wow, that really sucks of her!", Kristie exclaimed. "I don't see how simple conversations mean I'm plotting to take over this place, ya know? Strong as she is, I don't want her breathing down my neck 24/7, so if I decide, she's outta here! Thanks for telling me about this Adam!"

"No problem!", he said as he walked off smiling.

(CONF) "I'm pretty sure the tribe wanted to get rid of Lex tonight since she was flopping on the ground for half of the challenge.", said Kristie. "But when I learned that Hannah's going to have a temper tantrum whenever we talk to someone she doesn't like, that just seemed completely crazy! I'm willing to lose a few more times with someone who doesn't want to write my name down over someone who's making notes every time I say 'Hi' to anyone but her!"

Hannah slipped on her tank top as she prepared to head off to tribal. To her, this was going to be a simple, obvious choice, one that would benefit Ahay.

(CONF) "I really don't see how anyone will vote for anyone but Lex tonight", Hannah said. "We're supposed to be doing our best in challenges and when you're not only doing bad, but CHOOSING to do bad, you can't stay here! To me, if anyone else gets a vote tonight, they must have drank sea water, but what are the chances of THAT?!", she laughed.

Ahay headed off to tribal council once more as they grabbed their torches and walked down the long and winding road. Jeff was waiting for them in his usual spot when they lit their torches and sat down in their seats.

"Welcome back", Jeff said. "Hannah, how did it feel losing a second immunity challenge in a row?"

"It felt terrible!", Hannah yelled out. "I hate losing at all, but twice?! I'm just starting to see red!"

"Jess, what do you think the vote will be based on tonight?" Probst asked her.

"Well", Jess started. "At this point in the game, you really want to vote based on strength and according to a little birdy who just spoke, Lex apparently wasn't doing her part in the challenge!"

"You mean you feel she threw it?" Jeff asked her.

"Exactly!", Jess replied.

"Lex, what do you make of that accusation, that you were TRYING to lose? Does it hold any weight?", he asked her.

Lex shook her head. "Not at all. I'm just not that good at running challenges, ya know?" Lex explained. "I think it's crazy that just because you don't do well at something, means that you apparently were TRYING to lose!", Adam watched her with absolutely delight, which he barely concealed.

"Yeah, I get that!", Hannah yelled out. "But it's obvious you were trying to lose! Don't tell me that you're that bad at running! NO ONE'S that bad at running!"

"John, any thoughts on this? I know last tribal council you had some pretty opinionated things to say about the tribe's decision to get rid of Glenn. What do you think of this little argument?", Jeff asked him.

"To me, I think Hannah's in NO position to be lecturing Lex!", John stated plainly. "Based on the things, or should I say LACK of things she was doing yesterday she should be the one who's being lectured to, not Lex!"

"Hold up, what are you implying?" Hannah asked with disbelief.

"What I'm STATING is that you weren't being very helpful around camp yesterday!", John replied. "Instead of helping tend to the fire, getting food or anything important, you were off playing your asinine baseball game!"

"I did that to help create UNITY!", yelled Hannah.

"Unity would be making sure we're up to speed with the other tribe in terms of work ethic!", John replied again.

"Kristie, from what you can see, it seems like John and Hannah aren't really exemplifying unity right now. What do you think about this?"

"Well Jeff", Kristie started "I won't mention any names, but somebody told me that somebody else who's name I won't mention was telling us who to talk to, who to have conversations with, or else get it from them. And to me, that's just not something any of us should put up with around here!"

"Adam, you've been pretty quiet. Any thoughts?", Jeff asked him.

"I just think that we need to get along with each other", he said. "We can't yell, scream, shout or tell each other where to be every minute. Otherwise, we're just going to be here every round, right Chong?"

"I agree with Adam fully", Chong replied. "It produces negative energy for all of us if someone is ruining the fun and we aren't seeing eye to eye. I don't want to see that around here."

"Hannah, you've been pretty vocal. Anything more to add?", Probst asked her.

"Well Jeff", Hannah started. "Whoever is making life hard for the tribe, we'll get them voted out of here, I can promise that!"

"I definitely like what I'm hearing tonight. It is time to vote. Hannah, you can go first.", Probst told her.

Hannah walked up to the voting stall and wrote "LEX" in big, bold letters. "Sorry Lex, but I'm not going to let any challenge throwers stay on this beach." Lex then walked up and wrote down "Hannah". "I've never let anyone control my social life and you're not going to start doing it for me, sister!", Lex remarked as she stuck out her tongue. Jess, Karen, Kristie, John, Adam and finally Chong voted respectively. Chong's vote was not visible, but he could be heard saying: "I'm just making this decision for the tribe. I really like you and hope to see you after the show." Chong then sat down as Jeff proceeded to the urn.

"I'll go tally the votes", he said as he grabbed the urn, then placed it on the podium. "If anybody has the hidden immunity idol and you want to play it, now would be the time to do so." As no one did so, Jeff continued. "Once the votes are read the decision is final. Person voted out will be asked to leave the tribal council area immediately. I'll read the votes."

"First vote, Lex." Hannah smiled upon seeing her name, slouching back confidently.

"Second vote, Lex, that's two votes Lex."

"Third vote, Lex. That's three votes Lex."

"Fourth vote.....Hannah, that's one vote Hannah." Upon hearing her name, Hannah was shocked. Her eyes grew wide, wondering what was going on.

"Fifth vote....Hannah, that's two Hannah, three votes Lex."

"Sixth vote.....Hannah, that's three votes Hannah, three votes Lex." Adam, Chong and Lex looked at each other happily, as Jeff continued to read the votes.

"Seventh vote....Hannah, that's four votes Hannah, three votes Lex, one vote left.", Probst said. Hannah and Lex both looked incredibly nervous, with sweat rolling down Hannah's face.

"Third person voted out of Survivor: Madagscar is.....Hannah, you need to being me your torch." Hannah was completely shocked, as she went to get her torch. Unable to believe what happened, she exclaimed "Wow!". Karen and Jess were similarly surprised, sharing nervous glances with each other. Hannah then placed her torch down. "Hannah, the tribe has spoken", Jeff said as he snuffed her torch. "It's time for you to go." Hannah walked out, completely speechless, except for another. "Wow!", which the others heard.

"Well, tonight's vote showed the dangers of not being on the same page with one another, as some of you clearly didn't expect that! Grab your torches, head back to camp, good night!" Ahay then took their torches and left tribal council as the night was still young.

Hannah's Final Words: "I was NOT expecting what happened tonight! The fact that I was voted out over Lex, it just doesn't make any sense to me! I really think that Lex had some secret plan that I'm never going to find out about, so I hope that whoever's left finds out about her alliance."

Episode 4: "Always Look on the Bright Side of Strife"
''Last time on Survivor...Hannah and John went at it after they disagreed over the decision to vote out Glenn. On Drakaka, Louis was growing tired of Paul and Otto's antics. Adam, who was distraught over losing his friend Glenn, joined up with Paul and Otto and found new companions. Otto found the idol with Paul, who hatched the devious idea of creating a fake idol to give to Louis, who completely bought it as real. Over at Ahay, Hannah grew concerned over Adam's prolonged absence, causing Adam to fear Hannah was targeting him. Rounding up Lex and Chong, they threw the challenge, giving Drakaka their second immunity win. Hannah was suspicious over Lex's performance in the challenge and told Karen and Jess that she wanted her gone. Adam brought John and Kristie on board, convinving them that Hannah was both irresponsible and controlling. Despite arguing that Lex was a liability to the tribe, Hannah ended up being completely blindsided. 15 are left, who will be voted out tonight?''

Jess placed her torch down on the tree she dubbed the "Tribal Tree", then sighed, turning to Karen. "What happened tonight? That was so weird!", she said to Karen.

"I know!", Karen replied "At the same time, Hannah might not have been lying when she said Lex was up to something. Whole thing didn't seem totally organic."

(CONF) "I have to say I don't get surprised very easily", said Karen. "I have pretty sharp intuition and I've been able to spot most events in my life far before they occurred. But this...I just need to piece together what just occurred!"

To determine her theory, Karen approached Lex. "Lex, what exactly were you doing last night? Because if you were pulling any tricks, you can't keep doing this forever!"

Lex was startled by Karen's presence, then stammered a bit.

"Look, it's hard to explain! But if you were there, you'd get it! Hannah said some stuff, ask someone else!", Lex exclaimed.

(CONF) "Karen ran over to me after we got back from tribal council and she was like 'What were you doing?! You can't pull tricks like this for long!'" said Lex "I would explain it to her, but I'm just tongue tied right now, it was such a stressful night! Besides, with the motion I made to the camera with my tongue, it's to be understood!"

Karen turned back to Jess. "Lex wouldn't tell me anything. She claimed I wouldn't understand or something like that.", said Karen.

"That's unbelievable!", yelled Jess. "Does she really think I'm going to just accept that?!"

(CONF) "Tribal Council tonight certainly surprised me!", Jess exclaimed. "After Lex completely fumbled and bumbled in the immunity challenge yesterday, it seemed obvious that the tribe would vote her out. At the same time, obvious can be a very insidious word. I know that Chong is Lex's best friend here, so maybe he knows what's up."

Chong was about to meditat near the ocean when he noticed Jess approach him. "Oh, hi Jess.", he greeted her. "What's up?"

Jess was not in the mood for friendly conversation, so she replied curtly. "Look Chong, I want to know what happened at Tribal Council! Don't tell me that you don't know, you spend almost all your time with Lex!"

(CONF) "Jess had a bullshit meter that was beeping madly, sorta like a UFO!", Chong exclaimed. "Not only will she never believe me if I tell her I had no idea what went down last night, but I just will feel really ugly keeping this secret."

"Look, I need to be honest with you.", Chong said to her. "Lex, Adam and I threw the challenge yesterday. I didn't want to, in fact, I was shocked when Lex told me about the idea, but Adam told me that Hannah said something really cryptic and weird about her being uncomfortable with him being gone for so long. He said that she thought he was talking to people on the other tribe and she saw that as him being a traitor. So basically, she was after his head and I couldn't let that happen. Understand?"

Jess listened to Chong as he explained the entire situation, nodding after he made each point. "I see", she replied. "But what about me and Karen? We're the only ones who didn't vote for Hannah, so how can I know that you're not going to vote for us next?"

Chong heard her concerns and admittedly could understand where she was coming from. Usually on Survivor, voting outside of the majority meant that whoever was on the opposite end and survived that vote would be out next. But he knew in his heart that wasn't the case and he was going to make that clear to her.

"I don't want you out next", Chong reassured her. "You only voted in the minority because you happened not to see why we voted for Hannah. If anything, I really wouldn't mind getting out John next. I think he's strong for sure and has good intentions, but he picks fights with everyone when they aren't doing things exactly as he says and that's causing problems, you know?"

Jess nodded again. "So does that mean me and Karen are on your side, you'll vote with us and we're not going to be out next if we lose the next challenge?", she inquired.

Chong moved his head up and down to affirm his promise. "Yep, you're with us.", he said. "But I must warn you! Lex is a nice girl and all, but her taste in the Beatles is questionable! She prefers Yellow Submarine over For the Benefit of Mr. Kite", he said jokingly, chuckling.

Jess responded with laughter of her own. "Sounds like a crazy character! But thanks again!", she said as she walked off.

Adam heard the commotion and walked over to Chong. "Hey, what just happened here?", he asked him.

"Oh, I had to spill the beans to Jess", he sighed. "But hear me out. Jess and Karen were onto me like the Feds. If I lied to them, they probably would have been mad at me, maybe even looked for an idol and tried to go after me or you. Once I told them the truth, they said they were willing to work with us, so we have some new partners-in-crime, so to speak."

Adam was initially shocked, but once he heard Chong's explanation, he calmed down. "I see, I see. Well, it is good that they want to vote with us. But who would we target next? I know John is annoying me a little bit. I swear, it's possible to fight with him over nothing!"

"You just read my mind, my friend.", Chong replied to Adam. "I was thinking the exact same thing. All of us are getting a little bugged by him, so if we lose next, I think he'll be a suitable target. He makes everything go negative and that's just not good for us!"

"Very good points Chong, very good points!", Adam noted.

(CONF) "Telling Jess and Karen that we threw the challenge seemed like the most INSANE decision in the world at first", said Adam. "But Chong phrased it so that it made total sense. Besides, he's right that John's kinda been a thorn in everyone's side and that'll give me the perfect excuse to get ahead in this game! Less competition in the merge too!"

The next morning, all seemed to be well on Drakaka. Otto and Paul were discussing the principles of game theory in relation to Team Fortress 2, Chris was exploring the marsh behind camp and Ernest was preparing to go for a daily fishing trip. "Time to catch some big ones.", he said to himself.

(CONF) "Life's been pretty good over on our turf", said Ernest. "Ah've been safe cause we won dem' challenges back to back. Ah still wonder about Louis, but ah I feel at this rate, there ain't as much to worry about!"

As Ernest headed into the water, he noticed Chris approaching him. "Wait up for me!", he yelled as he ran after him with a spear.

(CONF) "Being on the tribe that wins more often...it's been great!", said Chris. "Me and Ernest have been fishing buddies and now with all the spices and peppers and stuff we got, I think we're going to be eating like royalty for a while!"

"I think if we swim a little bit further out, we should be able to get some bigger ones", Chris suggested to Ernest.

"Alright, ah could do that", Ernest replied. The two swam somewhat farther out from camp, then dove underwater. Chris could see a large green fish swimming underneath him and alerted Ernest. "Hey, we need to get that this big one!", he cried out. Ernest, once being alerted, dove underwater and stabbed at the fish in question. It felt rather heavy, as he had to tug it out slowly. "Wow, this one's mighty fine!", Ernest yelled out. "We're gonna be eatin' for days and days!"

(CONF) "That fish we got, Ah haven't seen anything like it before!", Ernest emphasized. "In West Virginia, ah fish all the time and ah ain't seen nothin' THAT big! Heck, largest Ah see are dem' catfish just floating around! Ah hope the tribe's happy with this!"

As the two walked back to camp triumphantly, Emma and Layla gasped at the size of the fish. "Wow, that's huge!", said Layla. She could hardly believe her eyes, feeling as if she had to touch the fish to determine if it was real or not.

(CONF) "While we were at camp, Ernest and Chris came back with this HUMONGOUS fish!", said Layla. "I haven't fished before in my life, so maybe I don't know, but this is just record breaking! I can't wait to try it!"

Layla and Emma began chowing down on the fish as Louis watched in the shadows. There was a clear look of disgruntlement on his face as he sneered at Ernest's gesture.

(CONF) "Ernest came back from his little fishing trip today, acting like he's the savior of the world!", said Louis. "I don't care if he fishes out the entire Pacific Ocean, I've sensed that he's disliked me from the start and I need to stop that."

As Ernest placed his fishing gear down, Louis turned to him. "You and have to talk!", he demanded. Ernest clearly was not as compliant as he hoped, however.

"Why should Ah talk to you?!" Ernest yelled out. "You voted out Amy! You know how much ah liked her?!" Louis knew this was going to be difficult, but he was prepared.

"Look, I understand how upset you were, but I want to make a peace offering, so to speak.", he said. "I'll keep you around as long as you don't vote for me." Ernest paused for a moment, unsure what to think.

"Ah suppose if ya ain't gonna stab mah back, ah could do what ya say.", Ernest told him. "But ya promise not to play any of dem' tricks?"

Louis nodded. "Promise." Ernest seemed satisfied with this answer, walking off like a child in a candy store.

(CONF) "Ah don't really see eye to eye with Louis", said Ernest. "But he said he ain't gonna write mah name down, so that must be good! Ah guess ah can trust him!"

Once he was out of sight, Louis snickered to himself.

(CONF) "I never, EVER will actually align with Ernest", said Louis. "Not only do I find him annoying, but I only told him I wouldn't vote for him so he wouldn't play any tricks. While I do have an idol, I don't want him to round up the others and force me to use it, so this is just a bullshit tactic to shut him up!"

As Ernest walked off, Paul and Otto noticed Louis had been nearby him. With that, the two collectively groaned.

"What do you think it was this time?" Paul asked Otto.

"With Louis, it could be anything, being frank.", Otto replied "I think that 3/4ths of all arguments with him involve talking to someone other than him, so it's probably that."

(CONF) "Otto and I both agree that Louis has been SERIOUSLY irritating lately!", said Paul. "Not that he never is, it's sorta like saying that Vegeta is being irritable lately, but I just wonder what he's going to pick a fight over next!"

"Hey, didn't Adam say we could stop by his camp any time?" Paul asked to Otto.

"Actually, yeah he did!", Otto replied. "Also, that's where the Chong guy lives! Maybe we could introduce ourselves!" The two headed off to Ahay's camp, happy to break free of Louis once again.

(CONF) "Adam told us a few days ago that he wanted to keep seeing us", said Otto. "And honestly, I'd much rather spend time with him than with Louis! He's a little bit flaky and cocky, but at least he knows how to have fun! Besides, his friend Chong or what's his name sounds like he's a little bit fun himself! I would complain about Louis' behavior, but I've learned from my mother that one must always look on the bright side of strife!"

Adam was lounging in his shelter while he noticed two shadowy figures approaching. Chong gazed ahead as well, until Adam soon yelped out in excitement, upon realizing who the figures were. "Alright! Paul, Otto!" Adam yelled out happily. He ran over to his new friends and the two greeted him with open arms. "Who're they?" Chong asked.

(CONF) "The day had been pretty boring so far", said Adam. "So when I saw Otto and Paul following up on my invitation to come back, I was DEFINITELY on cloud nine! When they meet Chong, that's just gonna be the icing on the cake!"

Adam guided the two to Chong, who smiled as he waved. "Hi, I'm Chong! He's a movie hippie for you young kids!", he said jokingly.

"I'm Paul!", Paul greeted Chong. "He's a name from the 15th century in England for YOU young kids!" Chong chuckled at his joke, with Otto then responding. "And I'm Otto and he is just...Otto." The four of them laughed as they walked down the beach, ready to have a blast.

(CONF) "I was really, really stoked to meet Paul and Otto!", Chong recounted. "Apparently these are the people from the other tribe Adam was talking to before the whole Hannah fiasco went down and frankly, I think that it was worth it to meet them! So much energy, so much zest, oh I know I'm gonna like these guys!"

The four laid side by side on the side, gazing at the sky as they swapped stories related to drug use. Chong, given his age and obvious youth in the sixties, went first.

"So, before the Nixon administration, it was REALLY easy to get pot!". Chong began. "You literally just had to go up to a guy and he'd tell you about this guy who knew a guy who knew a guy who knew a guy! In a day, you had a truck of the stuff! Me and my friends, I think it was around 1968 or 69', I can't remember the year, we drove all the way to Oregon in his camper van and we just decided to camp out in the woods! We were smoking, huffing and totally inhaling the stuff! By nightime, we were three quarters done with it! Then when we were trying to sleep, we saw these GIANT saucers, I mean HUUUUGE ones! I was pissing my pants in fear, ya know, not used to seeing those things! Me and my buddies, we ran back into our van and stayed in it all night! I've told my friends, I've told my family, my wife and my daughters and they all think I'm crazy! But I'm telling you, it happened! The government may claim that you're nuts or that you're an enemy, but aliens exist, trust me!" Paul, Otto and Adam felt it was legally and scientifically impossible not to laugh. Otto was howling so hard with laughter that he needed Adam and Paul to slap him simultaneously to stop. "I'm sorry, I'm sorry, but damn, I wish I had a story like that to tell!", Otto exclaimed. "My high stories are pretty much just me in college in my dorm with some friends, nothing special."

(CONF) "It's really strange that a 34 year old statistics professor from Sweden, a 22 year old entrepreneur, a 27 year old boat mechanic from Maine and a 66 year old ex-hippie and health food store owner are friends!", said Otto. "I know the purpose of this show is that you meet people from different walks of life, but this was EPIC! Chong has a story for every occasion and I don't think I could EVER get tired of hearing them! If you ask me, I'd like to live here instead please!"

As the four continued to tell tales to one another, Lex passed by, noticing they were laying down next to one another.

"Hey Chong, what's going on here? Who are the new people?", Lex asked curiously.

Chong enthusiastically introduced her to the Drakaka drop-ins. "Oh, glad you asked!", Chong exclaimed "These are Otto and Paul! Adam apparently met them a few days ago."

"Hey", the two of them said together. "Great place you got here, way better than ours!"

"I didn't think much of our camp, really!", Lex said. "Thanks!"

Chong seemed confused. "Lex, don't you know the etiquette for guests?", he said, smirking at her.

"Oh yeah, that!", she exclaimed. "Luckily for you guys, I happen to be a world class air guitarist! Since you're guests, I'm going to play a request. What do you wanna hear?"

Paul seemed amused by Lex's antics and decided to play along with her.

"Do you have any songs about people who think they know something, but really have no self-awareness whatsoever?", he asked with a smirk.

"You bet I do!", Lex exclaimed. Clearing her throat, she began the 'show'. "Ladies in gentlemen, I present to you, 'In Bloom'!" Lex whipped out her state-of-the-art air guitar and began strumming along wildly. "Sell the kids for food! Nature changes moods! Spring is here again! Reproductive glands!". As she arrived at the chorus, her playing grew more frenetic. Otto and Paul began to jam out themselves as they listened.

"AHHHH, HE'S THE ONE WHO LIKES ALL OUR PRETTY SONGS AND HE LIKES TO SING ALONG AND HE LIKES TO SHOOT HIS GUN, BUT HE DON'T KNOW WHAT IT MEANS, DON'T KNOW WHAT IT MEANS WHEN I SAY YEAH! YEAH! YEAH!". Obliterating the instrument into pieces, Lex bowed for her audience. "Thank you, thank you! What an active crowd!" Otto and Paul were thoroughly pleased.

(CONF) "I had no idea Adam had friends from the other tribe!" Lex yelped out with joy. "But of course I'm THRILLED about that! They seem like a really great bunch and maybe they'll be willing to work with us in the future for votes. Who knows?"

Before the two could request more sings that "honored" their "beloved" boss, the devil had spoken as Louis called out for Otto and Paul. "Otto, Paul, we need to talk! Come back here and stop fooling around!", he yelled out.

Otto sighed before he turned to Adam, Lex and Chong. "That's our 'boss'", he said using air quotes to emphasize. "We'll be back another time, though", he promised.

"So long!", the three waved goobye. Louis looked rather impatient as Otto and Paul grinned to him like morons.

"Again, I'm not going to ask what the smiles are about, becase there's no time for that", Louis started. "We need to talk business and I mean long term business."

"Business about what?" Paul asked curiously.

"Well, we need to discuss the pecking order.", Louis started. "I've been watching Ernest lately and I don't think he can stay much longer."

"Why is that?" Otto asked. "Doesn't Layla seem a little bit weaker than him?"

"Yes, but the problem is that Earnest has more awareness of what we're up to, he's catching on, if you know what I mean. That's just not okay." Louis explained.

(CONF) "Louis pulled us aside just now to tell us about what he considered important things", said Paul. "Apparently him and Ernest don't get along and he thinks that if he gets any further, he's going to be dangerous. Me personally, I think Layla would be better to take out right now, but trying to persuade Louis is like trying to drive your car with your teeth."

"Alright, so what should we do if we lose the next challenge?", Otto asked Louis.

"Simple, he's going to go. If we leave him here for a second more, he's going to ruin everything", said Louis. Just as the three prepared to head off in different directions, Ernest crept down into the bush he was spying from, completely aghast.

(CONF) "When ah was out collecting firewood, ah heard Louis chattin' to Paul and Otto and ah wondered if maybe they were in some type of alliance.", said Ernest. "And when ah kept listening, Louis said 'Let's get Ernest next!' and ah couldn't believe it! Does Louis think ah'm a fool?! If he does, ah ain't gonna just lie down taking this!"

Louis noticed Ernest charging toward him and turned around to face him. He had a feeling that he inadvertently overheard and was ready to take him head on. "Oh, hi Ernest!", Louis addressed Ernest. "How can I help?" He was hoping he was wrong and this was just another spiel of Ernest's about catching fish or something like that.

"WHAT THE F*CK DO YOU THINK THIS IS?!", screamed Ernest. "AH THOUGHT WE HAD A DEAL! WHAT DO YA CALL THAT HORSESHIT WITH PAUL AND OTTO?!" Paul and Otto feared the direction this was going in, so they scooted away as quietly as possible.

Louis was forced to be put on the defensive and he tried to deny the entire situation.

"Ernest, what exactly are you talking about?", Louis said nervously. "...Paul and Otto are your new allies, I was just telling them you're in...ya know?"

(CONF) "Ernest charged at me like a bull just now and I was NOT expecting it!", said Louis. "It seems like he caught onto the fact that he's not actually in my alliance and he thinks there's going to be hell to pay! But if I'm the God of this camp, then he's an apostle and we know what happened to apostles!"

"AH KNOW THOSE GAMES!", Ernest continued. "AND I AIN'T GONNA BELIEVE NONE OF YOUR LIES! DON'T TELL ME AH'M IN THE ALLIANCE WHEN I AIN'T!"

Figuring he had enough of the tribe wrapped around his finger anyway, Louis confirmed his suspicions.

"You know what? You're NOT in my alliance!", Louis confirmed to him. "I told you that just to keep you quiet, but seeing as your only friend here is Chris, it's not like you were ever going to find out!" Ernest's face turned to a look a disgust as he eyed daggers at Louis, walking off.

(CONF) "Louis told me what ah thought he was thinkin'!" exclaimed Ernest. "Ah knew he ain't ever was gonna let me in and he just confirmed it for sure! Ah don't care what the tribe thinks of me anymore, ah don't care about the money or any of that. If ah have it mah my, Ah'm gonna show em' the kinda liar and traitor he is!"

Once Ernest left the scene, Louis felt like he was forced to alter his plans.

(CONF) "I felt that I had to tell Ernest about him not being part of the pact, so that I could get him off my back.", said Louis. "If he doesn't have the numbers, what's the harm in it? All I need to do now is discuss a counter-attack with Paul, Otto, Emma and Christine, though. After what Ernest did, letting him stay here a day more would destroy my game!"

Louis found Otto and Paul chilling near the ocean. "You two, we need to speak again", Louis ordered them.

"What is it?", Otto asked.

"Tell Emma and Christine to come here. We need to discuss alliance business more.", Louis told him.

"Alright", Paul said as the two headed off to get them.

(CONF) "Louis called for us again just now and he said we had to talk more about the alliance", said Otto. "I wonder if this had anything to do with Ernest, because I could hear this loud, bellowing Southern accent just before."

Emma and Christine followed Paul and Otto back to where Louis was standing.

"What's going on?" Christine asked.

"That's what I will explain to you!", said Louis. "Unfortunately, Ernest found out that he's not really in our alliance and he flipped his lid. I'm worried that he could try to tell the others about me and maybe the other tribe too. If we don't want him to form a group against us...I think we should throw today's challenge."

Emma and Christine gave unsure looks regarding the idea.

(CONF) "Louis had called for us regarding an offer to throw the next challenge", said Emma. "I'm not sure that's really prudent, particularly if Ernest has the immunity idol."

"Wait, Louis. How do you know Ernest doesn't have the idol?" Emma asked curiously.

"Very simple answer Emma!", he exclaimed to her. "That's because I have it!" Christine and Emma looked utterly shocked, while Paul and Otto exchanged snickering glances to each other.

"Really?", Christine asked him. "Can you prove it?"

Louis nodded and headed off to his duffel bag. He then returned with a wooden trinket with a beady face attached to a string. "Yup. I got it a few days ago! Does that calm your fears about Ernest having the idol?"

"Yes!", Emma said to him.

(CONF) "Louis revealed that he apparently found the idol a few days ago to prove to us that Ernest didn't have it.", said Christine. "I'm really, really relieved that he did that, because when you're dealing with someone as angry and unhinged as Ernest seems to be now, you can't have much uncertainty around you!"

"With that established, what are your thoughts on throwing now?", Louis asked the four.

"Hmmm...I think you have everything lined up, so I'm willing to be involved", said Emma.

"Yeah, everything seems organized, peas in pod, ducks in row.", Otto agreed.

"Then consider it done! At tomorrow's challenge, that immunity idol will be Ahay's!", Louis exclaimed.

(CONF) "Louis just told me that because Ernest got told he wasn't part of our alliance, we have to throw the challenge tomorrow!", said Paul. "Ahay did something pretty weird themselves last challenge, so does this mean there will be back-to-back immunity challenges thrown?! I don't think that's ever happened before!"

"Do you think we should tell Adam?" Paul asked Otto.

"Hmmm...I guess so.", Otto replied. "He'll be pretty psyched his tribe gets a guaranteed win!"

The two then headed off to Ahay's camp once more, greeting Adam, who was resting in the shelter.

(CONF) "It's really, really crazy we're actually doing this!", exclaimed Otto. "If Lex actually did throw the challenge last round....this is SO statistically improbable! I would make some quip about how it's as unlikely as there being 5 returnee seasons in a row, but I could probably actually expect that by now!"

Adam noticed his friends returning and greeted them excitedly. "Welcome back!", he exclaimed.

"Yo Adam! We have some good news for you!", said Paul.

"What is it? Do I win the lottery? Marry someone famous? Get a cheesesteak?", he asked with snark dripping down his voice.

Paul and Otto were amused by his smart-ass answers.

"Even better!", Otto exclaimed. In the best game show host voice he could muster, he replied. "Your prize is one free challenge wiiiin!", Otto 'announced'.

"Wait, you mean you guys are gonna throw it tomorrow?!", Adam asked in disbelief.

"Yeah, we planned it out with Louis", said Paul. "There's this guy on our tribe named Ernest who doesn't vote with us and who Louis doesn't like. Threat to his power, you know the drill."

"Wow, that's sick!", Adam exclaimed excitedly. "I guess you're doing what me, Chong and Lex did!"

"I thought you were the one to do that!", Otto told him.

"Well you'd be right!", Adam replied.

(CONF) "I'm really, really happy that Otto and Paul are gonna throw that challenge tomorrow!", exclaimed Adam. "Apparently things are bad over there with Louis and whatever the other guy's name is, but I don't care about that! I just am happy I'm going to get a tribal free night, probably some kick ass reward and a good night's rest! I really owe those guys."

"I'm going to tell Chong and Lex!", he told the two. He approached them as they were in the middle of a meditation session, tapping Lex on the shoulders. "Hey you two, good news!", Adam exclaimed.

"Did I get my weed stash?", Chong joked. Lex then playfully punched him on the shoulder for that,

"Nope!", Adam said. "Paul and Otto are going to be doing a little tit for tat, a little repeat of what happened last challenge if you know what I mean!"

"So, they're gonna throw the challenge?!", Lex asked in disbelief.

"Precisely", Paul confirmed. "We need to get rid of some people against us, fights broke out, you get the idea."

"Well, thanks!", exclaimed Lex.

(CONF) "I wonder if it's some type of virus to be throwing challenges like this I did", said Lex. "First me, Chong and Adam did it, now Paul, Otto and their leader, whatever his name is, they're throwing it too! I definitely didn't expect this, but it makes me like Otto and Paul that much more!"

(CONF) "I don't have any sons, only daughters, so Paul and Otto definitely fill that role in a sense", said Chong. "They both kinda remind me of myself when I was their age, which is really cool! Happy they're doing us a favor like this, I could see them coming back to this beach a lot more often!"

The sun soon began to set in the sky, deep crimson hues annihilating the vibrant blue. Paul and Ottoo took quick notice and turned to Adam, Chong and Lex.

"Well guys, we need to get going", said Otto. "See you tomorrow!"

"Yeah, catch ya later!", said Paul. The three waved goodbye to them as they headed back to camp.

(CONF) "Since I'm technically some type of villain sidekick right now, I probably should think of intricate, complex codenames for missions and shiz", said Paul. "For tomorrow...does Operation D.O.U.B.L.E T.H.R.O.W work?"

The night sky formed once again as the two tribes nodded off to sleep. Night came and went quicker than a cheetah with super-speed, as the cloudy, hazy sky rose. Emma found the tree-mail note in the "challenge tree", then alerted the tribe. "Tree mail!", she exclaimed. The others huddled by her as she read the note.

"Today you will not have your eyes, your vision will be blinded. To get the pieces, you will need someone to get you guided.", Emma read. "Sounds like some sort of blindfolded challenge."

(CONF) "Ah'm really hoping we can win this today!", said Ernest "We've been kicking the other tribe's butts and ah want that to continue! Louis excluded me from his lil' group and ah' ain't gonna do nothing for him anymore, ah ain't gonna work with him, none of that! So let's go in and win!"

The two tribes arrived to the challenge scene. Scattered puzzle pieces could be seen across the field, both green and purple, which denoted Drakaka and Ahay respectively. Probst called for the two tribes to come in.

"Come on in guys! Drakaka, getting your first look at the new Ahay tribe! Hannah voted out at the last tribal council!" Drakaka and Ahay stood on their respective mats as they waited for Jeff to explain the challenge. "Drakaka, I'm going to need immunity back please." Christine handed Probst the idol as he placed it back on the stool. "Once again, immunity is back up for grabs.", said Jeff. "Ready to get to today's challenge?" Everyone nodded. "For today's challenge, one member from each tribe will sit on a perch shouting orders to all other tribe members. They will be blindfolded. The tribe caller will need to guide their tribe members to scattered puzzle pieces all around the field. After all pieces have been recovered, you will take off your blindfolds and assemble the cubical puzzle. First tribe to finish their puzzle wins immunity. In addition, you're playing for reward. Wanna know what you're playing for?", Jeff asked. Once again, everyone nodded, so Probst explained. "The winning tribe will receive pillows, blankets and plushies! So if it rains any time soon out here, you will be protected. Drakaka, you have one extra member, so you'll need to sit someone out. Who's it gonna be?" Christine raised her hand, offering to sit out the challenge. "I'll do it Jeff.", she said. "Alright, get to the bench. Who's going to be the caller for Drakaka?" Louis raised his hand. "Alright and for Ahay?" Karen raised her hand. "Everyone else is going to be blindfolded. I'll give you a moment to strategize."

Louis and Karen climbed up to their respective perches, ready to give orders. "For immunity and rewards. Survivors ready? GO!", Jeff yelled.

Quick to put his scheme into motion, Louis began by giving blatantly incorrect information to Ernest's. "ERNIE! MOVE LEFT, KEEP GOING LEFT!", he yelled. The piece in question was really to Ernest's right, but since Ernest was blindfolded, he couldn't see. Ernest bumped into a tree, visibly wincing. "Ow, damn!", he shouted. "WAIT, MOVE BACK A LITTLE!", Louis yelled. Ernest proceeded to do just that. "NOW MOVE LEFT AGAIN, JUST A LITTLE BIT MORE, YOU'LL FEEL IT!", Louis shouted again. Ernest complied and once again hit the tree, with Louis unable to contain his laughter.

"Ernest is WAY OFF THE MARK for Drakaka!" Probst shouted.

Meanwhile, Karen was giving much more accurate instructions. "KRISTIE, KEEP WALKING STRAIGHT! BE CAREFUL, THERE'S A LOG IN FRONT OF YOU!", Karen warned.. Kristie tried to walk over the log, but tripped and fell into a mud puddle. "GET UP AND KEEP WALKING STRAIGHT!", Karen shouted. Kristie eventually found the piece. "GOOD, NOW TURN AROUND AND WALK BACK SLOWLY!", hollered Karen.

"Ahay is making quick work of this puzzle, Drakaka needs to pick up the pace!", Probst yelled. As this occured, Louis continued to give inaccurate instructions. "PAUL, WALK BACKWARDS, WAY BACK!", Louis shouted. Paul careened into Louis' tower, yelping.

"Paul takes a hard hit for Drakaka, they are a MESS in this challenge!". Karen then directed Jess to a piece near Otto. "JESS, WALK SLOWLY, OTTO'S NEAR YOU! PICK UP THE PIECE HE'S RIGHT NEXT TO!". Jess accidentally touched Otto's hand at first. "Sorry!", she apologized. She then grabbed the piece once realizing her mistake, then headed back.

"Ahay has 3/4ths of their pieces, they're almost ready to build!", shouted Jeff. Drakaka on the other hand, had only recovered a few pieces at that point. Louis didn't want the ruse to be completely obvious, so he gave Otto accurate instructions. "OTTO, CLAMP ONTO THE PIECE TO YOUR RIGHT!", Louis yelled. Otto went in that direction then found the piece in question, walking back to the matt.

"Drakaka is WAY behind Ahay, Ahay is bringing back its final pieces!", yelled Jeff.

"CHONG, BEHIND YOU! TURN AROUND CHONG!", Karen yelled. Chong listened to Karen and grabbed the piece in question, then returning to the matt.

"Ahay has all their pieces, they can take off their blindfolds and get working! Drakaka has BARELY made progress!", yelled Jeff.

Karen jumped down from her perch and the other members of Ahay took off their blindfolds. Her and Jess began directing the others to put the pieces into place, slowly making progress. Finally, Paul returned with Drakaka's final piece.

"Drakaka FINALLY gets their pieces, they can get working, take off your blindfolds!", yelled Jeff. Louis hopped down from the perch and tried to kick one of the pieces away, so that it'd be impossible to finish the puzzle. He took a piece and put it in the intentionally wrong place as Ernest gave him a glare. Karen had been making substantial progress with Ahay, with them halfway done with the puzzle.

"Ahay is KILLING it in this challenge, KILLING it!", Jeff yelled. "Drakaka will need a miracle if they want any chance of winning!". As he said those very words, Ahay placed their final piece in. "Jeff, I'm pretty sure about this, but are we right?", Karen asked him.

Jeff took one quick glance at the cube puzzle and smiled. "You're right! AHAY WINS IMMUNITY AND REWARD!". All of Ahay ran over to Jeff excitedly to claim their immunity and blankets. "Woohoo!", Adam shouted.

"Ahay, nice job at winning immunity. Your blankets are back at camp, enjoy the night off.", said Jeff. "Drakaka, I've got nothing for you. You have a date with me at tribal council tonight, so grab your stuff and head back to camp."

(CONF) "Ah don't think Louis was really trying at that challenge today!", said Ernest. "Him and his group probably think this is some type of joke and they can just do what they want, but if I go down, I ain't doing it without a fight!"

Back at Ahay, spirits were high after the tribe finally won immunity once more. "This is lit!", Adam shouted as he laid down the tribe's blankets and pillows.

(CONF) "Part of me was wondering if Otto and Paul were joking", said Adam. "It didn't seem to make sense that BOTH tribes would throw challenges in a row. But they came through and that only proves that I can trust them! Paul and Otto will not only be attending me, Chong and Lex's beach concerts, but they'll also be voting with us, that's for sure!"

At Drakaka, the tribe was scrambling among the beach, preparing for tribal council.

(CONF) "The plan went perfectly today!", exclaimed Louis. "Not only did I completely humiliate Ernest like he was Elmer Fudd and I was Bugs Bunny, but now he doesn't have his precious immunity, so I'm sending his coal mining butt back to West Virginia! If anyone has proof I'm not a god by now, I REALLY want to see it!"

Ernest went to wash up in the ocean when he saw Chris. "We need to talk", Ernest approached him.

"What's up?", Chris asked.

"We gotta get Layla and we need to fight like hell at tribal council and tell everyone to vote out Louis!", exclaimed Ernest. "Ah don't think he was really trying at the challenge today and ah think it's cause he wants our heads on a stick!"

(CONF) "Ernest told me that apparently Louis threw the challenge today", said Chris. "I sorta can buy that, since he has an alliance with most of the Drakaka members. I know I voted with him at the first tribal council, but his behavior's been sorta upsetting me, so I'm not sure I'm so keen on voting with him this round!"

"I see, I see", said Chris. "If you want me to be honest, I did vote with Louis initially, but I just can't STAND him anymore! He acts like he's a King and we're peasants, if you get what I mean."

"Yeah, ah feel ya,", Ernest replied. "He ain't the kinda guy I deal with back at home."

(CONF) "Ah did appreciate Chris being honest with me", said Ernest. "Ah've seen him as a friend and him being upfront with me, it makes me trust him even more!"

The two then approached Layla, who was walking along the shore. "Listen", said Ernest. "I want ya to promise me you'll vouch for me with Chris tonight! Louis can't stay here!"

Layla took in what he said and replied. "I'm sick of Louis too! He's a huge jerk and thinks he's better than all of us, so I'll do that!"

"Thanks", said Earnest.

(CONF) "I know that Ernest had some type of fight with Louis yesterday, so it makes sense they're not getting along", said Layla. "And I don't really like him or want him here, so I'm fine with fighting against him."

Paul and Otto were walking down the coast as they discussed the plan for the night.

"Alright, so we're taking out Ernest", said Otto. "I don't really think much of him, so that's fine with me."

"Yeah", replied Paul. "I don't really think about him ever."

(CONF) "We threw the challenge today to get out Ernest", said Otto. "Louis thinks he's more aware than Layla so he's who should go tonight."

"I just hope that tribal's not too intense", said Otto.

"I agree", Paul said back. "But I have an inkling it's going to be more than a bit bumpy."

(CONF) "It's been over a week since we were last at tribal, so we've kinda gotten used to not having to vote anyone out", said Paul. "Ernest and Louis had a pretty huge fight, so I wonder if they're going to try pulling anything on each other".

Drakaka grabbed their torches as they headed off to tribal council, the sky turning dark. After they lit their torches in the flames, they placed them in the slots behind them and sat down, with Jeff in front of them.

"Welcome back", Jeff greeted them. "Paul, how does it feel to be back at tribal council after having over a week of immunity?"

"Well, it does take some time to get used to", said Paul. "You're in this state of eternal bliss and you think you're just going to coast to the end without a care in the world and then BAM, you're sitting back here, answering your questions", Paul said as the rest of the tribe laughed. Ernest gave him a clear look of disapproval, which caught Jeff's attention.

"Ernest, you don't seem to agree with what Paul's saying. What's on your mind?"

"The thing is Jeff", Ernest started. "Ah ain't mad about losing! Ah mean, ah hate to lose, but what Ah'm made about is the fact that we didn't lose fair and square!".

"I asked this question to Ahay last tribal council and I'll ask it to you now. Are you implying that the tribe threw the challenge?"

Ernest nodded. "Damn right we did! Louis can lie out of his butt all he wants, but he KNEW what he was doing! Throwing those pieces, knocking me into that tree, there's no way, he did any of that stuff not on purpose!" Louis shot a glare at him in return.

"Louis, what do you have to say to Ernest's claim?", Probst started. "Did you throw it?"

Louis nodded himself. "I actually did Jeff. See, Ernest can claim he's an innocent hero all night, but he KNOWS that he's had his eyes on me ever since Amy got voted out! So don't tell me this was for no reason!", Louis shouted to Ernest.

"Ah targeted you because you're a lying, thieving snake!", Ernest retorted. "You lied to me, you're probably lying to Otto, Paul, Christine and Emma and you'll just keep lying to this whole island!"

"So, you feel Louis is duplicitous?", Jeff asked Ernest.

"Of course!", Ernest replied. "Ah know he's full of it and I ain't gonna keep quiet about it! Chris, Layla, remember what we promised?" Jeff then turned to Chris. "What did Ernest promise to you, Chris?"

"Well, Ernest approached me before tribal council and told me all about what Louis was doing", Chris explained. "I did vote with him during the first tribal council, but I've regretted it immensely, you know?"

"What have you regretted exactly?", Jeff asked him.

"He's just so demanding, so authoritarian, always watching us, always telling us what to do!", exclaimed Chris.

"Layla, do you agree?", Jeff asked her.

"Yes, I agree", said Layla. "Louis only wants his way and I don't want to stand for that! If you guys do, fine, but me, Ernest and Chris are not going to vote with him!"

"Otto, what will you base your vote on tonight?", Jeff asked.

"I want to vote out the person who I think is causing problems for us, who's causing the conflicts!", Otto explained.

"Well, I'll find out who that is in a moment. It is time to vote, Ernest you're up." Ernest then headed over to the voting booth and quickly scribbled Louis' name. "You're a dirty cheater", Ernest told the camera. "Your time is gonna come and there's nothing you can do about that." Louis then walked up to the booth and wrote down Ernest's name. "You challenged my reign and I'm not going to let you topple it. So seyanora." Paul, Emma, Otto, Christine, Chris and Layla then voted in order.

"I'll go tally the votes", Jeff said. He then returned with the votes in the urn, turning to Drakaka. "If anybody has the hidden immunity idol and you want to play it, now is the time to do so." No one stood up, so Jeff continued. "Once the votes are read the decision is final. Person voted out will be asked to leave the tribal council area immediately. I'll read the votes."

"First vote....Ernest."

"Second vote...Louis. That's one vote Ernest, one vote Louis."

"Third vote....Louis. That's two votes Louis, one vote Ernest."

"Fourth vote.....Louis. That's three votes Louis, one vote Earnest". Earnest was hoping this would signal a bindside.

"Fifth vote....Earnest. That's two votes Earnest."

"Sixth vote....Earnest. That's three votes Earnest". Earnest then began to sigh, as he figured the inevitable was coming.

"Seven vote...Earnest. That's four votes Earnest, three votes Louis, one vote left." Louis and Earnest awaited the final vote, hoping their intentions would come true.

"Fourth person voted out of Survivor: Madagascar is...Ernest, you need to bring me our torch." Earnest sighed in defeat as he patted Chris on the back. "Go get him!", he then grabbed his torch and placed it down for Jeff to snuff. "Earnest, the tribe has spoken", he said as he snuffed Earnest's torch. "It's time for you to go." Earnest then walked out, but not before telling Louis. "Remember, your time is gonna come!". Louis was satisfied to get rid of his nemesis, smiling to Otto and Paul.

"Hopefully tonight's vote addressed some problems in the tribe.", said Jeff. "Grab your torches, head back to camp, goodnight." With that, Drakaka headed out of tribal council as the moon shone brightly.

Earnest's Final Words: "Ah of course wanted to go much father, but Ah'm not gonna complain. Ah didn't give into Louis, Ah didn't do anything he told me to. Ah have a lot of faith in Chris and Layla and Ah wish them the best. Louis can only be in charge for so much longer."

Episode 5: "It's Like He Wants to Lose This Game!"
''Last time on Survivor...Jess and Karen were left on the bottom after Hannah was blindsided. But after Adam and Chong explained the situation for them, they were integrated into the pack. At Drakaka, Ernest continued to provide, in the hope that the tribe would appreciate his efforts. Louis told Ernest that he would keep him around, but this was only a ruse. Rounding up Paul, Otto, Emma and Christine, he explained that Ernest was actually to go next and that he was fooling him, leading to a heated confrontation between Ernest and Louis. Louis decided that in order to ensure Ernest would be gone next, Drakaka would throw the challenge. Otto and Paul told Adam of the plan, earning his trust. At the immunity challenge, Drakaka was led into disaster by Louis, while Karen rallied Ahay to a decisive victory. Earnest was not willing to go down without a fight and rounded up Chris and Layla to fight against Louis at Tribal Council. Despite their best efforts, the majority sided with Louis and Earnest was voted out. 14 are left, who will be voted out tonight?''

Drakaka laid their torches onto the tree beside them as they walked off in different directions. Chris was especially disappointed to see his only close friend be voted out.

(CONF) "I was really, really bummed to see Ernest go.", said Chris. "He was sorta like my brother out here. We fished together, avoided the person in charge together, we FOUGHT against the person in charge together. And now with him gone and Louis still here, I'm kinda alone and an easy target."

Chris turned to Layla, who also voted against Louis. "I wish I knew what to do", he told her.

"Yeah, me too", Layla replied. "I just feel like if we lose, we're as done as dinner."

(CONF) "Tribal Council didn't go our way...again", Layla sighed. "Louis clearly is on top and Otto, Paul, Emma and Christine are his little followers. I want to fight the power and break the alliance like Ernest tried to, but how much can we really do?"

Meanwhile, Louis, Chris, Otto, Christine and Emma were satisfied over their victory.

"He wasn't that bad of a guy, but if he was working against us, that's no good for unity", Emma said.

"Of course and that's why he had to go without question", said Louis.

(CONF) "Everything went my way at tribal council", said Louis. "Ernest tried to put up some type of 'moral crusade' against me, but only Chris and Layla were dumb enough to play along with him. Layla and Chris better hope we never lose another challenge, because the minute Ahay gets the immunity idol again, they're going to be off this beach."

"I think it's pathetic if they even try to do anything against us at this point", said Louis.

"Yeah, you're right". Otto replied.

(CONF) "Louis was really, really confident that there'd be no challenges after this point!", said Otto. "I'm not entirely sure about that, usually since most seasons have some type of twist to alter tribe dynamic at some point. Four people have been voted out, so how much longer could it really be until something happens, if it does?"

The next day at Ahay, the sun rose once more as Adam hopped out of the shelter, completely ecstatic.

(CONF) "The sleep I had last night was perfect!", Adam exclaimed. "Sure, the challenge wasn't really won fairly, but at this point, I don't really care! If yesterday was a teaser of what's to come, then I say game on!"

Jess groaned at Adam's enthusiasm, given how fast asleep she was. "To Adam's credit, he never said being allied with him would be easy.", she quipped to Karen. Karen chuckled at her friend's remark. "It's like we're Tommy Vercetti and he's Ken Rosenberg...but with better hair." Jess chuckled in return. "You sure you don't want me to tell your husband you said that?", she smirked. "Don't you dare!", Karen retorted playfully.

(CONF) "Adam was really, really energetic this morning!", remarked Jess. "I'm happy that he agreed to let us vote with him, since we're not on the bottom anymore, but damn, does this guy EVER get tired?! He makes Tony look catatonic practically!"

Adam's behavior caught the attention of John, who was once again looking for firewood.

"Why don't you help instead of goofing off all the time?", John asked Adam. "You know in the army, we'd make you wash the latrines."

(CONF) "I really don't get Adam sometimes", said John. "He's definitely a strong kid and I want him for challenges, but half his time he's off talking to somebody or just acting like a fool! Sometimes I wish I could have new people on the tribe, ones who worked!"

While Ahay continued to idle around for the most part, Kristie approached Karen with a note. "Karen, it says that someone from the tribe needs to read this.", she said as she handed it to her.

"Thanks Kristie", she said as she took the note. "Hmm...I wonder what this could mean".

(CONF) "Kristie approached with me some type of sealed note just now", said Karen. "We've voted out a few people at this point, so I'm curious if it's a twist. Usually after four people have been voted out is the latest they'll do anything major like this."

Karen slowly pried the envelope open, pulling out the note. She slowly read it aloud for her tribe to hear.

"The task for you today is to, send warriors to battle..some might help you while others possibly will simply prattle.", she followed. "Hmmm..warriors?"

(CONF) "I was a little bit suspicious about the wording", said Karen. "I know that in Africa, the swap wasn't obvious and something similar happened where three members from each tribe thought they were competing in a challenge."

Karen then turned to Jess to discuss the dilemma.

"I'm really unsure about this note", Karen told Jess. "I have a gut feeling this could be a swap and I'm not sure what to do."

Jess nodded. "May I see the note please?", she asked. Karen obliged, handing it to her. Squinting, she noticed a small statement below the message. "It says to send two women and one man. If this IS a swap, should me, you and Adam go? At least then we'll have some numbers."

(CONF) "Karen showed me the note and it seemed pretty cryptic", said Jess. "On most recent seasons the swaps are obvious, but it seems like they want to throw us for a loop. That said, we're going to do what think is most sensible and have me, Adam and Karen go over to Drakaka, if it's a swap."

"Fair points", said Karen. "I think we should tell Adam." The two turned to Adam, showing him the note. Adam slowly read it, then turned to them.

"So, you think that we're switching tribes?", Adam asked the two girls. Both of them nodded. "Yeah, this seems really Africa-esque", Karen said. "I'm not sure if you saw that season, but there was a swap on it and they gave both tribes a similarly worded message."

Adam followed along slowly. "No, I didn't see Africa", he said. "But since you did, I guess I'll listen to you and come with you two", he said as they prepared to pack up their belongings.

(CONF) "I have little to no knowledge of Survivor before Redemption Island", said Adam. "That's the season that got me hooked and if you didn't mention any of those seasons Karen and Jess know about, I would think they were made up! But it seems like they both know what they're doing, so I'll tag along. Besides, we'll still have three votes then."

Adam, Karen and Jess then walked off down the beach, waving bye to their tribemates. "If we're not back, tell Lex to stop singing Nirvana!", Jess joked as John, Lex, Chong and Kristie laughed.

Meanwhile at Drakaka, Louis had just received the note and was eyeing it carefully.

"Hmm, I feel like this is a challenge of some sort.", said Louis.

(CONF) "We got this strangely enveloped note in our tree today", said Louis. "Some might think that it's a swap or some other big twist, but the last time they ever did a swap without being so explicit was in Africa! That was 34 seasons ago! Why would they re-use something from 34 seasons ago?"

"I don't know, it could be more important than that", said Paul.

(CONF) "Louis was really, really insistent that the note we got was regarding a challenge or something like that.", said Paul. "I really think that it could be a swap, especially since they did do one like this once before. If I let him have his way, my pact with him, Otto, Christine and Emma could be up the creek and I DON'T want that to happen!"

"I think that swap or not, me, you and Otto should go", said Paul. "We'd have a better chance of winning the challenge." But any intent of the three heading to the event was squandered when Otto read an additional note at the bottom.

"Guys, it says we can only send two guys and one girl, so that means the three of us can't go. Who should?", Otto asked.

"What if it's me, Paul and Christine?", Louis suggested.

"I'm willing to do that", Christine said. "You guys ready to head off?" she asked Paul and Louis.

"Yeah", the two of them said as they left camp. "If we are switching tribes, later guys!", Paul said to Otto, Emma, Chris and Layla.

(CONF) "Louis, Paul and Christine volunteered to leave camp in compliance with this note we received", said Otto. "Louis is certain it's just a challenge, but me and Paul wonder if it's a swap. I hope Adam comes here if there is a swap, because I don't want to suddenly be on the outside looking in!"

At the midway point on the beach between Ahay and Drakaka's "camps", Jeff was standing. "Come on in guys!". He then watched as Karen, Jess and Adam stood on the Ahay mat while Louis, Paul and Christine stood on the Drakaka mat. "Want to know what I called you guys here for?" Jeff asked the six. They all nodded, awaiting his response. "Three simple words. Drop your buffs, because we're switching tribes." Louis seemed somewhat surprised by the announcement and sighed a little bit, before removing his Drakaka buff and putting a purple Ahay buff on.

(CONF) "Paul and Otto did warn me that there would possibly be a swap today", said Louis. "I really thought that this would only be a challenge, since it didn't seem likely they'd re-use a mechanism from a season 17 years ago, but apparently I've lost my superfan badge and those two just got renewed membership!"

Adam seemed happy as he slid off his purple Ahay buff and slid on his new green Drakaka buff. "Adam, you seem HAPPY to switch tribes. Why is that?", Jeff asked.

"Well Jeff", Adam started. "Let's just say I have friends on the other side!". Paul smiled at him as Adam returned the expression. "In that case, you shouldn't have any issue with this! Paul, Louis and Christine, head left, Karen, Jess and Adam, head right.", said Jeff. The six proceeded to do just that as they made it to their new homes.

(CONF) "Just as I thought, there was a swap today", said Jess. "But thankfully me and Karen decided to bring along Adam and I know that he has at last one friend on Drakaka, so we should be good."

Over at Ahay, John, Kristie, Chong and Lex began to grow antsy.

"I wonder where the three are", said Chong.

"Yeah, so do I", said Lex.

(CONF) "I know that Karen and Jess were stressing like crazy over what that envelope meant.", said Lex. "A lot of us thought maybe it could have been some unique kind of challenge, but Karen, being this mega fan of the show, thinks we might have switched some members."

Suddenly, Chong could see Paul, Louis and Christine walking toward him, then began waving his hand frantically in excitement. "Alright, Paul's here!", he called out. John shook his head amusedly at Chong's excitement.

(CONF) "We were all wondering what the heck was going on!", exclaimed John. "Some people here thought we were switching members, but it didn't seem to make sense to me! But then I saw three people from the other tribe walking to here in our tribe colors, so it turns out they were right! I'm not big on surprises and stuff like this, but maybe these'll be the hard workers I've been looking for!"

Paul, Christine and Louis greeted their new tribe mates as Chong high-fived his friend. "Welcome home!", Chong greeted him.

Paul laughed at his enthusiasm. "Thanks!"

(CONF) "Once we knew it was a swap, I just wanted to figure out who would be joining us!", said Chong. "With Adam gone, I was a little bit worried, but now that Paul's here, I think thing's are going to be pretty swell!"

As the the two friends were getting used to living together, John interrupted the good cheer to address Paul, Christine and Louis. "Alright, now that we introduced ourselves, I gotta get you up to speed on how things work around here.", said John. "Now, a lot of people here haven't been doing their part, but I think that you guys can really pitch in and make this camp great! In the morning, it's the best time to collect wood, while in the afternoon I usually try to go fishing..."

(CONF) "The minute I set foot on Ahay's beach, I'm immediately getting orders barked at me from John!", exclaimed Louis. "I guess it makes sense since the guy looks like the drill sergeant from Full Metal Jacket, but seriously, has he seen a single episode of Survivor? It's like he wants to lose this game! I also remember what he did on the first night when he made me sleep on the sand, so he better watch his back!"

After John walked off, Chong approached Paul. "Don't worry about him, he's like that to everyone."

"Oh, well at least I know he doesn't have those beady eyes fixed on me", Paul chuckled. "By the way, I need to tell you about something important."

"What is it?" Chong asked.

"Louis is a little bit...abrasive", Paul said. "He can be hard to deal with me, but me, Otto, Christine and Emma have a pact with him right now. I'd break it off, but I'll be out faster than John can bark orders at me. So even if Louis annoys you, irritates you, disparages your hippie culture, can you promise to work with him for our sake?"

Chong took everything in word by word and nodded. "Sure, I'll stick it out.", he said in response to Paul. While he didn't like controlling people very much, he also didn't want to be taken out too early from the game either.

(CONF) "Paul sat me down and told me that even if Louis is an apparently huge pain in the ass, that I need to work with him for the alliance's sake.", said Chong. "I'm really not happy to have to kiss Louis' butt, I really don't like kissing anyone's butt for that matter, but I don't want to let down the guys, so I'm in this one!"

Over at Drakaka, Adam, Karen and Jess were quick to make their presence known.

"WILMAAAAAA, I'M HOOOOOMMEEE!", Adam shouted in reference to the spectacle he made on the first day. Immediately, Otto ran over to him happily and greeted him with literal open arms.

(CONF) "Being on the same tribe as Adam is going to be perfect!", said Otto. "Not only does this give me another number, but now I can teach him all about edgic like I'm intending to! I admit it can be a hard sell at first and his first experience with it wasn't particularly great, but I've seen crazier things!"

It seemed as if Adam had VIPs to introduce to Otto, as he beckoned for Karen and Jess, noticing that they were hearding toward the ocean. "Hey, you two, I need you to talk to Otto with me!" The two girls ran over to Adam while panting. "What's up?" Jess asked.

Adam wasted no time in explaining what this was about. "Girls, Otto. Otto, girls. We met a few days ago and we've been paling around since. But more importantly, he's another person who's willing to work with us, if you catch my drift."

Karen turned to Otto. "So, what Adam's saying is you'll work with me, Jess and him?" Karen asked.

Otto nodded cartoonishly fast. "You bet I am!", Otto responded. "And just to confirm it, I can spit shake on it. No one ever breaks a spit shake!" he said as he jokingly moved his hand to his mouth.

Jess and Karen grimaced before he could go through with the deed. "Uh, we're good, thank you.", Jess said nervously. Otto laughed. "It gets them every time!" Adam laughed at his joke.

(CONF) "This is definitely another step in the right direction", said Karen. "Otto seems friendly and since it seems like him and Adam are close, he'll definitely help us out. I'm really happy with that, not only because we have another number, but because he also seems like he'll be fun to be around."

"I'll give you a more normal shake to compensate for him.", said Adam. "He can be a little crazy sometimes, talking about something called edgic, with codes and numbers, you'll EVENTUALLY get used to him!", he joked as he shook hands with Karen and Jess to "compensate" for Otto.

(CONF) "I knew that I had to get Otto in on this once me, Karen and Jess were sent over to this camp", Adam said. "With us three guys and us two girls, we could have something pretty solid going!"

"I think I should tell Emma", said Otto. Otto then called for Emma, as she waddled out to camp. "What's going on?", she asked.

"Emma, these three are Adam, Karen and Jess", said Otto. "They're going to be working with us now." Adam, Karen and Jess waved back politely, as she smiled.

"Oh, nice to meet you!", she kindly responded. "I'm sure we're going to get along just fine!"

(CONF) "When I say members from the rival tribe at our camp, anyone could have told this was a swap!", exclaimed Emma. "But Otto seemed to be making friends from the Ahay camp, as apparently Adam, Karen and Jess are willing to work with us. I'm not going to complain, as a few extra numbers could provide some necessary security."

At Ahay, John was working feverishly. He began tearing down weeds and hurling them away from camp, then went over to the beach to remove rocks that people could accidentally slip on. Louis was lounging on the sand as he walked by.

"Can't you make yourself useful?", John asked him bluntly.

"I'm just conserving my energy for next challenge!" Louis sassed at him. John walked off in a huff.

(CONF) "One of the things I wanted out of this switcheroo hoo-ha were people who would actually help out around camp!", shouted John. "Everyone's either off chit-chatting about who knows what or sitting around like they were just slain on the battlefield! If there's one thing I don't like it's someone who doesn't help out and Louis surely is doing a good job of not helping out!"

Meanwhile, Christine decided to join in on Lex, Chong and Paul's fun.

"So you're a PROFESSIONAL air guitarist?!", Christine asked in joking disbelief.

"Been playing since I was 3!", Lex boasted. "Since you're new, I'll take a request!"

"Just don't ask her for a Nirvana song", said Chong. "She goes craaazy over them!", he chuckled.

"Can you play the Dragon Ball theme?" Paul asked, his hands in a begging puppy dog position.

"Weelllll..", Lex replied. "I don't know the lyrics, but I can supply air guitar. But if you would ever so kindly like to fill in as the singer..."

"Would I?! I've wanted to sing an air guitar rendition of Makafushigi Adventure my entire life!", Paul exclaimed. "And besides, it'd be a fitting song right now, as I'm FULL of unbridled ecstasy!"

"Perfect, I'm sure we'll make a great duo then! Maybe we can go on tour once this is done!", Lex replied. With that, she began strumming along as Paul belted out the lyrics with bravado and vigor.

"FIND THE DRAGON BALLS! LOOK OUT FOR THEM ALL! YOU CAN SEARCH AROUND THE WORLD WITH ME!", he sang passionately. "GOTTA HEED THE CALL, OF MAGIC DRAGON BALLS! WHAT A GREAT ADVENTURE THIS WILL BE! YOU CAN CLIMB ON BOARD CAUSE THE NIMBUS DOESN'T WAIT! A FANTASTIC JOURNEY FOR YOUR DREAMS - A THRILLING MYSTERY!" Lex proceeded to obliterate her air guitar into pieces as Paul's triumphant ballad ended. "Come again tomorrow and every day until we're voted out!", she exclaimed. Christine was unable to contain her laughter.

(CONF) "Lex has not stopped making me laugh ever since we got here!", said Christine. "I don't know anyone else who openly professes to being a professional air guitarist of all things! She also seems likable and friendly enough, so me personally? I'm willing to vote with her."

As the sun began to set in the sky, Ahay decided to head in for the night. "What a long day", said Chong. "Yeah, totally", Paul said in response.

(CONF) "I'm definitely enjoying the energy at this new camp!", said Paul. "John's a bit bossy and I'm not so keen on the working myself til' death idea, but the others? They seem pretty agreeable and I definitely like Lex enough to take her under my wing! I have no idea what'll come tomorrow, but I can sense it'll be good!"

After the tribe headed in to sleep, the moon slowly moved across the sky. Eventually, as if it was magic, it vanished as the firey sun took its place.

The next morning, Paul grabbed a note out of the three. "It seems like we've got treee maail!", he announced. He then took the note out and read it out loud.

"Today with your new tribes you will, go swimming, will be dashing! But the thing it'll be the most is absolutely smashing!" he finished. "I think it's going to be that tile breaking challenge where you jump off the ledge", said Paul.

(CONF) "I definitely would like to win today", said Louis. "But if not, I'm hardly concerned. Paul seemed like he was making some new friends at camp, so I could yank them in no problem! Besides, I already have an idea of who I'd want to vote out of here anyway."

The two tribes then headed to the challenge site, as Jeff was there to greet them. "Come on in guys!" The new Drakaka and Ahay tribes placed their tribe flags into the ground, as they awaited instructions. "Ahay, I'm going to be needing that back", Jeff said as he took the immunity idol from Chong. "Ready to get to today's challenge as new tribes?" Jeff asked the group. Everyone nodded, so he proceeded with the instructions.

"For today's challenge, 6 of you are going to race out across a bridge on the water, then climb up a ladder. Once you reach the top, you are going to take a mallet and jump off the ledge. While airborne, you must smash a tile above you, then swim back with a bag attached to the tile. Once all six bags have been recovered, the remaining tribe member from each tribe will use the balls to smash 5 tiles. First tribe to smash all 5 tiles, wins immunity! Who's going to be smashing for Drakaka and Ahay?" Karen and Kristie raised their arms. "Alright, works for me." said Probst. "I'll give you a moment to strategize".

Paul and Adam stood on the beach, ready to race into the ocean. "Survivors ready? GO!", exclaimed Jeff. Paul and Adam immediately darted out into the ocean, racing across the bridges quickly. They were fairly evenly matched, but Adam was slightly ahead.

"Adam charges off without breaking a sweat for Drakaka!" Probst exclaimed. The two reached the ladders, climbing up as they grabbed their mallets. Adam jumped first, destroying the tile into pieces. Paul then followed as his bag of balls plummeted into the ocean below, just before he plummeted in himself. Once Adam and Paul grabbed their bags, they began swimming back to shore.

"Paul and Adam are neck and neck!", Jeff yelled. Reaching shore, the two dropped their bags as Adam tagged Jess in, while Paul tagged Lex. Jess zipped over the rocks easily, though Lex took a bit of a fall into the water as she was running.

"Lex takes a HARD fall for Ahay!", Jeff yelled. Eventually, she regained her foot and began running down the bridge, but Jess had a fairly sizable lead. Once Lex reached the ladder, Jess was already at the time, ready to destroy her tile. Her hammer held tight, Jess leapt into the air and obliterated her tile into pieces. As she grabbed her bag and began swimming back, Lex smashed her tile, though she took a moment to swim down and get her bag, before she could swim back.

"Lex is costing Ahay some MAJOR time! They're gonna need to pick up the pace!". Jess then tagged Chris while Lex waddled behind and soon tagged Chong. "Chris and Chong now going to smash!", Jeff yelled. Chris ran across the ladder as Chong began to gain on him. While Chris was climbing up the ladder, Chong surpassed him.

"Chong, a 66 year old is ahead of Chris, an athletic guy in his twenties!", Jeff exclaimed. "Can Ahay make up time?" Chong smashed his tile as he fell into the water, then grabbed his bag as he began swimming back to shore. Chris was behind, as he grabbed his bag soon after. Next to go were Louis for Ahay and Otto for Drakaka. While Chris cost some time for Drakaka, Otto made up any difference as Louis trudged behind him.

"Drakaka is back in this! This challenge is CLOSE!", shouted Jeff. Otto did take a small fall on the ladder, but otherwise was ahead of Louis the entire time. Grabbing his hammer, he broke his tile into pieces as he grabbed his bag once hitting the water. Louis soon followed suit, as Christine and Emma were tagged in. Emma had no issue crossing the bridge, while Chris slipped and slid along the course.

"Christine falls HARD for Ahay, that has GOT to hurt!", Jeff yelled out. The fall gave Emma quite a bit of time, as she smashed her tile and grabbed her bag before swimming back. Christine tried her best to catch up, but it was no use. Emma soon tagged in Layla, while John waited impatiently for Christine. While Layla headed off across the course, Christine finally returned, allowing John to run.

"Christine FINALLY makes it back to shore. John can now run, but he has to make up time for Ahay!" John darted across the bridge without breaking a sweat, hell-bent on catching up with Layla. While she was tiring as he began gaining on her, she still managed to stay ahead, sashing her tile as she fell into the water and grabbed her bag of balls. John followed as he fell in, then grabbed his. "John and Layla are heading back, once they're back, Kristie and Karen can began smashing tiles!". Eventually, the two made it back to shore exhausted, placing the last bag down as Kristie and Karen soon got to work.

Karen was nervous as she had failed at the previous smashing challenge and was determined to make up for last time. Hurling a ball into the air, it landed on one of the tiles and smashed it into pieces. "Karen connects for Drakaka, the score is1-0!" When Kristie hurled her ball, it ended up narrowly missing, rolling back down to her. "Kristie takes a shot and misses for Ahay!", Jeff exclaimed. Karen fired again, but ended up missing this time. Adam looked on nervously. "Karen fires for Drakaka and comes up short, this could open the door for Ahay!". As Kristie shot, she smashed a tile to bits. "Ahay now ties the score 1-1! Drakaka needs to move it!". Anxiety growing, Karen fired again. This time, she was more successful, smashing a tile to pieces. "Karen scores again, Drakaka leads 2-1!". Kristie didn't want Karen to win, so she fired the best she could. Unfortunately, she missed. Karen took the opportunity to fire again and was successful, hitting another tile. "Drakaka leads 3-1!" While Kristie was able to hit the next tile, making the score 3-2, Karen hit another tile, making the score 4-2. "If Karen gets this, it'll be all over for Ahay!", Jeff exclaimed. At that moment, Karen fired the next ball, instantly destroying the tile. With that, the challenge was over.

"KAREN CONNECTS MEANING DRAKAKA WINS IMMUNITY!". Everyone on Drakaka ran over to Jeff happily. "Drakaka, immunity is yours. You're safe tonight, so enjoy the rest of the night off. Ahay, I've got nothing for you but a date with me at tribal council. Take the afternoon to figure out who you're gonna vote out." With that, the two tribes returned to their respective camps.

As Ahay returned to camp, spirits were low as the inevitable question loomed. Who was going to be voted out? John seemed especially disgruntled by the defeat, eyeing Louis in frustration.

(CONF) "We ended up getting our butts whooped today at the challenge!", John griped. "I thought this was gonna be a blowout, but those new Drakaka people, they stunk in the challenge! Louis might look strong, but he hasn't been doing anything around camp and I definitely am holding that against him at the vote tonight!"

Paul walked along the beach with Louis, who was grilling him for information regarding his bonds on Ahay.

"So you're friends with the hippie and the rocker, right?" Louis asked in an impatient tone.

"Yes, Chong and Lex are on board with me and I told them to join along with you.", said Paul in return.

"Perfect", Louis remarked.

(CONF) "I didn't pay much attention to that Chong head or whatever he calls himself or Lex", said Louis. "But since Paul apparently has been paling around with them at their camp, they want to vote with him. Would they be my first choice of allies? Not even close! But the more sycophants I have working with me, the better for tonight!"

As the two continued walking, they changed the subject to targets.

"I know that Chong isn't too wild about John and Lex agrees with most things he says, so it seems like they're gonna vote for him.", said Paul. "Personally, I'm fine with that, but I want to know what you're thinking."

Louis laughed a little bit. "I'm more than happy to vote for John!", Louis exclaimed to Paul. "All he does is jump down my throat if I'm not looking for wood all day like an idiot and besides, he made me sleep outside in the sand on the first night."

"Wow, that's crazy!", Paul responded.

"You bet it was. Wanna know something crazier?" Louis asked Paul.

"Uh..sure, I guess." Paul responded."

"Since he's nowhere near us, I don't need to be quiet.", Louis shouted. "Remember the first day when we had to jump off the boat and take all the supplies with us?"

Paul nodded. "Oh yeah, that. What about it?"

"Well", Louis started "Before Ahay could anything, I dumped all of their supplies in the ocean! I didn't want them to have a leg up on us! Can you believe no one has found out yet?!"

Much to Louis' misfortune, John was collecting firewood in the distance when he overheard the conversation. When John heard a mention of the boat incident on the first day, the image replayed in his head like a move. Anger overtaking him, daggers formed in his eyes as he charged toward Louis.

(CONF) "Louis told me about him throwing Ahay's supplies overboard on the first day!", Paul exclaimed. "I promised myself I wouldn't bring it up, which I was able to do. Only he had the BRILLIANT idea of telling me this story LOUDLY while John was in earshot! I hope that John's chryon says "Retired" drill sergeant, because I'm honestly a little scared now!"

As Paul headed off quickly, John pressed his face close to Louis as his rage reached terrifying levels. Barely able to restrain himself from grabbing Louis, John began screaming loud enough for the Drakaka camp to hear.

"YOU! YOU LITTLE SON OF A B*TCH!", John wailed. "I SAID I WOULD FIND OUT WHO THREW AWAY OUR STUFF ON THE FIRST DAY AND YOU JUST HELPED ME OUT!" For the first time all season, Louis gulped as John seemed to be seconds away from punching him.

(CONF) "Ever since we got here on Day 1, I promised I would find the motherf*cker who had the nerve to throw away our rations!", John exclaimed "I should have known a good-for-nothing, two-timing ***h*le like Louis would have done it! If he thinks that I'm going to buy any of his excuses, he'll be lucky if all I do is throw him through the f*cking tribal council wall!"

Louis continued panting as John's rage would no subside. "Look, I mean you can't really PROVE this happened, right?!", Louis laughed nervously.

"PROOF?! I DON'T NEED ANY F*CKING PROOF!", John screamed. "EVERYONE ON THIS ISLAND KNOWS YOU'RE NO GOOD ALREADY, I CAN JUST TELL! WHEN WE GO TO TRIBAL COUNCIL TONIGHT, THEY'RE ALL GONNA KNOW!" John vowed as he walked off furious. Louis wiped sweat from his brow as he called for Paul again.

"Paul, come back! I'm still alive!", Louis quipped as he awaited Paul's return. "Any DOUBT of whether he was going or not tonight is gone! Tell Chong, tell Lex, tell Christine, just tell tell tell everyone to vote vote vote his ** off!".

"Okay okay okay, I'll tell tell tell them", Paul retorted while smirking. Louis took another moment to catch his breath.

Paul found Chong and Lex chilling by the ocean, then tapped on Chong to get his attention. "Are you guys cool with getting out John tonight?", Paul asked them. "He went a little nuts just now."

Chong and Lex nodded. "Works for us!". Paul then walked back to Louis. "They're in", he said.

"Good", said Louis. "Just as we planned."

(CONF) "I had no idea that John was that close!", remarked Louis. "The dude had been pissing me off since we started and besides, now that he knows what I'm behind, I have to take him out before he can spread the word to others. Also not getting my neck snapped by him is a nice bonus incentive."

Ahay headed off to tribal council, their torches high in the sky. Dipping them into the flames, they placed them behind them as they sat down. Jeff greeted them. "Welcome back. John, how did it feel losing the challenge today? You lost three of your tribemates, got three new ones who you don't know if they'll work against you or not and now you're sitting here waiting to vote someone out."

"Losing the challenge was surely bad", John started. "But that is simply the CHERRY on top of the sh*t cake that I was served today!"

"What exactly do you mean by that?" Jeff asked curiously.

"What I MEAN by that is that I found out Louis over here was the one behind our tribe's stuff going missing on day 1!" Kristie, Chong and Lex seemed shocked, while Louis was ready to defend himself.

"Louis, this is a pretty huge accusation from John. What do you say to this, this idea that you sabotaged Ahay by throwing out their stuff?"

"To be entirely honest Jeff, I did throw out their stuff!", Louis explained audaciously. "I wanted Drakaka to have the advantage so that we could decisively beat them in challenges with them weakened."

"Kristie, what do you make of this, that Louis tried to make camp life harder for the Ahays?"

"I mean, I don't think that's okay at all", Kristie exclaimed. "We're supposed to be playing this fairly and even if people scheme, lie and cheat in this game, you're not supposed to go all out and weaken us like that!"

"Paul, how do you feel learning one of your tribemates from Day 1 was behind something like this?"

"I definitely didn't expect it", said Paul. "For one, you don't really have any time on the boat to grab the other tribe's stuff and second, they usually can spot you."

"John, aside from this accusation, would you say there is any other reason you are mad at Louis and perhaps want to vote him out?"

"You sure can bet!", John said. "Half the day when he got there, he was off talking to the folks from his tribe and the other half of the day, he was lounging on the beach while I was busting my butt!"

"Chong, do you see tonight's vote being based on tribal lines, or do you think the sabotaging will have any sway?", Jeff asked.

"I think that it wasn't good at Louis did that for sure", said Chong. "But what's done is done and I think we should focus on uniting the tribe, on making sure we're feeling positive and not negative."

"Well, let's see if the vote tonight affects those vibes you speak of. It is time to vote, John, you're up.", said Jeff. John walked up to the voting both and wrote down Louis. "Your actions and lack of work ethic disgust me.", he said as he then proceeded to sit down. Louis then wrote down "John". "You know way too much and took a power move too personally." he said as he sat back down. Lex, Paul, Christine, Kristie and Chong then voted in that respective order. Chong's vote was not visible as his back was turned to the camera. He could be heard saying. "I'm sorry, but we can't have fighting around camp. Good luck." He then sat back down.

"I'll go tally the votes", Jeff said as he went to get the urn. He then returned with it. "If anybody has the hidden immunity idol and you want to play it, now would be the time to do so." Nobody stood. "Alright, once the votes are read the decision is final. Person voted out will be asked to leave the tribal council area immediately. I'll read the votes." Jeff then took the lid off the urn as he began reading.

"First vote...John", he said as John looked angrily at the vote.

"Second vote...Louis. That's one vote John, one vote Louis."

"Third vote...John, that's two votes John."

"Fourth vote....Louis. That's two John, two Louis."

"Fifth vote....John. That's three votes John, two Louis."

"Sixth vote...John. That's four John, two Louis, one left."

"Fifth person voted out of Survivor: Madagascar...John, you need to bring me your torch." John was thoroughly disappointed as he grabbed his torch, then placed it down in front of Jeff. "John, the tribe has spoken", Jeff said as he snuffed John's torch. "It's time for you to go". John walked off into the night as Jeff turned to address the remaining Ahays. "Well, there seemed to be some tension tonight. Maybe this will help you figure it out, maybe it won't. Grab your torches, head back to camp, good night." With that, the remaining Ahays headed back off to camp as the moon was still up in the sky.

John's Final Words: "I don't regret a single opinion or decision of mine out here! I've stressed work my entire life and I won't stop stressing work! Those other Drakakas, I hope that they figure out Louis is trouble and they take him out. I know I'd never work with someone that dishonorable and a part of me is positive enough to feel they won't."

Episode 6: "Anyone Who Finds An Idol Without Telling Me is On My Shizlist!"
''Last time on Survivor....Chris and Layla felt vulnerable after Ernest was voted out, while Louis confident that nothing could stop his reign of terror. The next day at Ahay, the tribe discovered a mysterious note asking them to send away 3 of their members. At Drakaka, Otto suspected a potential swap, while Louis believed the chances were unlikely. Ultimately, Karen, Adam, Jess went for Ahay, while Louis, Christine and Paul went for Drakaka. Otto's suspicions turned out to be right, when they switched tribes. At Drakaka, Adam and Otto were reunited, while Adam pulled Karen and Jess into their alliance. At Ahay, John's work ethic grated on Louis, while Louis' laziness grated on John. Though the immunity challenge was close, the new Drakaka tribe pulled off a win, sending Ahay to tribal council. Paul solidified his bonds with Chong and Jess, pulling them into his pact withLouis, while Louis told Paul a dirty secret. John overheard Louis' confession of throwing away Ahay's supplies on Day 1 and erupted. Thoroughly spooked and determined not to let him spread the word, Louis rounded up his group, sending a furious John home. 13 are left, who will be voted out tonight?''

Ahay had just returned from Tribal Council, placing their torches on the tree once more. Kristie was especially upset, given that she was the only person other than John to vote for Louis.

(CONF) "I was REALLY unhappy with the results tonight!", exclaimed Kristie. "John could be a little bit annoying at times and I definitely didn't value work as much as him, but he was part of Ahay! Louis just waltzed into camp with his goons, turned a few heads and BAM, I'm on the bottom! I gotta do something about this!"

Meanwhile, Louis was resting by the shelter, still a bit shaken by last night. While Amy and Ernest had challenged him before going out, no one get as literally in his face as John did.

(CONF) "I can definitely sleep much more easily now that John is gone!", said Louis. "With how angry he was getting at me, I think preventing my bones from being broken took precedence over the fact that he had seen too much."

Just before Paul could head off to sleep for the night, Louis stopped him. "We ned to talk", Louis said.

"What's going on?", Paul asked.

"Just wanna confirm, Kristie next, right?", Louis asked.

"Yeah, that makes sense.", said Paul.

(CONF) "I really don't see the point in Louis confirming the hit-list with me.", said Paul. "At this point, he accepts it as a given that I'm his right hand man who jumps when he says jump, walks when he says walk and self-destructs when he says self-destruct. To me, it's like being part of the Grove Street Families and being asked by Sweet every second 'Hey, we're gonna kill the Ballas, right? You SURE you're gonna kill the Ballas with me?'"

The next morning at Drakaka, Adam was enjoying one of the peppers from the spice garden they won when he was on Ahay. "I could eat then of these in one sitting!", Adam said as he gulped down a whole jalapeno.

(CONF) "I'm definitely enjoying being on Drakaka now", said Adam. "I do hope there's another food reward, because if you ask me, NOTHING beats these peppers, absolutely nothing! I do wonder how things are going on Ahay right now for Paul, particularly after that last vote, though."

Otto found the newest note in the tree, then read it out loud to the tribe.

"''The challenge that occurs today will surely hog your time. But if you win, you will pig out and feast on pie of lime." , ''Otto read. "Hmm, sounds like we're going to be getting pie for dessert!"

(CONF) "Right now, it seems like this new tribe is fairly strong", said Otto. "On one hand, that's great for me, Adam, Emma and his two lady friends Karen and Jess, but I do wonder if winning all the time is going to affect Paul, Christine and less importantly Louis."

The two tribes headed to the challenge arena. Once arriving, Jeff greeted them both. "Come on in guys!", Jeff said as Drakaka, then Ahay arrived at the challenge scene. "Drakaka, getting your first look at the new Ahay tribe. John voted out at the last tribal council." Otto was relieved that Paul was still there, while Chris seemed to be somewhat shocked. Otherwise, nobody else had much of a reaction. "Ready to get to today's challenge?", Jeff asked. As everyone nodded, Jeff proceeded to explain. "For today's challenge, both tribes will need to race out into the field and wrangle a total of six pigs per tribe! The pigs are color coded, green for Drakaka and purple for Ahay. The pigs are going to be stubborn, so be ready to be patient. After you've wrangled them, lead them into the muddy pen that is behind you." The contestants then looked at the pen, with Kristie shuddering a little bit. "The first tribe to wrangle their 6 pigs into the pen, wins reward. Wanna know what you're playing for?", Jeff asked. He then proceeded to remove a cover from the table holding the reward. "The winning tribe gets key lime pie and beer delivered directly to their camp! Drakaka, because you have one extra member, you're gonna need to sit someone out. Who's it gonna be?" Emma raised her hand. "I'll sit this one out, Jeff". Emma then proceeded over to the bench. "Alright, I'm gonna give you guys a moment to strategize.", said Jeff.

Paul was ready to run for Ahay, while Adam was set for Drakaka. "For reward, Survivors ready? GO!" Immediately, Adam charged out to one of the green colored pigs, trying to grab it from behind. He thought he had a solid grip on it, but the pig began to run away, leading to Adam chasing after it, falling over a small hill

"Adam takes a hard hit, he has to catch that pig!". Paul was able to grab his a little bit more easily, then it kicked its legs as it oinked while being dragged to the pen. "Paul makes quick work of his pig!", said Jeff. Eventually, Paul was able to get the pig safely inside the mud pen. "Paul scores, Ahay leads 1-0!" Louis then ran out for Ahay, as Adam finally led his pig into the pen, but not before it kicked some mud onto him. After Adam wrangled his pig in, Otto then ran out.

"Otto now headed to the field as he trails Louis!" Louis found a pig with a purple mark, then ran after it. The pig was stubborn however and began running in circles, forcing Louis to follow him, leading to dizziness on Louis' part. Otto quickly grabbed onto a green colored pig as he held tight, bringing it back safely to the pen. "Otto makes quick work of the pig, while Louis is giving himself nothing but a headache!" Chris then ran out to the field, passing by Louis, who finally dragged his pig into the pen. Chong then ran out. "Louis is finally back, Chong now out on the field!", said Probst. Chris gently grabbed onto the back of the pig, slowly picking it up, while Chong's pig ran away in an instant. "Chong needs to get that pig!", Probst exclaimed.

Chris brought his back slowly, placing it in the pen. "Chris gets his pig in, Drakaka is at 3 while Ahay is at 2. Chong trudged back with his pig, the score now 3 to 3. Jess ran out for Drakaka, while Kristie ran out for Ahay. Kristie struggled to get her pig wrangled, as it kicked dirt at her, while Jess had slightly more luck, lifting the pig off the ground and carrying it back slowly. "Jess is dragging her pig back while Kristie is STRUGGLING!", Probst emphasize. Jess soon made it back as Kristie continued to struggle. "C'mon Kris!", Christine yelled. But it was no use. Jess tagged Karen in as she ran into the field, while Kristie was STILL struggling to catch her pig. "Kristie doing HISTORICALLY bad at the challenge!" Karen did struggle a little bit, though she was slowly able to get her pig into the pen, albeit with some mud on her shirt. "Karen wrangles her pig! Layla is the last one out for Drakaka!" Kristie finally made it back, though there was an enormous gap in progress as Christine ran out. "Ahay is struggling IMMENSELY in this challenge!", said Probst as Layla ran out to grab her pig. Christine and Layla accidentally collided, leading to the two of them to plop onto the ground like ragdolls. "Christine and Layla take HARD falls!", said Jeff. The two eventually got their bearings, while Layla grabbed her pig. She quickly ran back to the pen and placed her pig in. "Layla gets her pig in, this challenge is over! DRAKAKA WINS REWARD!", exclaimed Jeff as Drakaka cheered at their victory. Christine panted, while she patted Kristine on the shoulder. "You did your best", she reassured to her. "Drakaka, you have some nice key lime pie and beer waiting for you back at camp. Ahay, I've got nothing for you. Head back to camp." Both tribes then headed back off to camp, Ahay dejected and Drakaka elated.

(CONF) "Kristie lost the challenge for us pretty decisively, which definitely annoyed me!", exclaimed Louis. "Unless one of those pigs begins flying, I don't see any reason why she's not going to go home tonight, or any scenario where she's going to prevent herself from being voted out."

At Drakaka, moods were high as the tribe happily greeted their prize of pie and beer. "Ole!", Otto yelled. When Jess and Karen gave him looks, he was quick to defend himself. "I've just always found the notion of a man with a thick Swedish accent saying that hilarious!", Otto said.

(CONF) "It's definitely a joy like I thought it'd be!", exclaimed Karen. "Otto is funny, Otto's good in challenges! God, this is definitely been a wonderful day! Keep at it Otto!"

Jess laughed at his antics as well. "Wow Otto, that's a little bit excited over pie!"

(CONF) "I wasn't so sure Adam's friends would be bearable, given how crazy Adam is normally, but I'm wrong!", said Jess. "Otto has definitely been great to be around and I'm happy to be in an alliance with him!"

Otto was especially excited to eat the pie, eyeing it happily.

(CONF) "When we returned to camp, I wanted to touch the pie to see if it was some sorta holograph, since I couldn't believe it was real!", exclaimed Otto. "The whole thing reminded me of this episode of SpongeBob where Plankton was eating holograph meatloaf for dinner, so you never know!...What, my son watches the show?!...And I do too, so don't judge!"

As the tribe sat down to enjoy the pie, Chris walked off from the group. "I just need to go think about some things", he told them as he headed off.

(CONF) "I was definitely happy to win the challenge", said Chris. "But I know I'm still not in the majority right now and I needed to head off to think about this! Walks alone to me are like what addictive drugs are to someone else! I just NEED to be in the wild!"

As Jess, Karen, Layla and Emma walked off upon finishing their pie, Adam stayed behind to speak to Otto.

"What the hell was he doing?", asked Adam. "It seems strange that someone would just go off like that."

(CONF) "Chris suddenly bolted out of our little feast", said Adam. "I know that he apparently has a tendency to walk off like this because he's bored, but given how little he's talked to us, or how he's not in my pact with the guys and girls, I wonder if he's trying to find an idol to save his ass next."

"I'm used to that, he does it all the time.", said Otto. "Besides, there's one reason you shouldn't fear him.",

"Why not?", asked Adam.

Otto whispered to him. "Keep quiet for now, but I have the hidden immunity idol.". Adam's face was akin to a child who had just been told they won a year's supply of candy. "Shut up", he mouthed to Otto.

(CONF) "Because Adam was worried about Chris' weird behavior, I had to explain to him that I had the idol", said Otto. "Due to all the things I've done for him at this point, I think it was a reasonable choice."

"So when do we tell the girls?", Adam asked.

"Well", Otto said. "If we lose today's challenge, one of us can inform them. If not, then whenever we need to vote him out. That work for you?"

"Yeah, that seems reasonable.", said Adam.

(CONF) "So it turns out that Otto has the idol!", Adam exclaimed. "Wow, that's really good for our game! I know that Chris is just kinda weird and that can just mean..he's kinda weird, but I didn't want to take this at face value, so I'm glad Otto told me that!"

At Ahay, spirits were quite low over their second loss in a row.

"I really would have liked that pie!", Louis exclaimed. Paul shook his head in disbelief over Louis' frustration over pie, then walked off.

(CONF) "Louis was really, really annoyed over losing reward today.", said Paul. "I have a feeling that any respect for Kristie that he might have potentially had is now crushed into bite sized pieces. I don't really like to make puns too often, but it's only fitting that after today's challenge I say her name is mud!!"

Louis called for Paul as Paul followed Louis to the shelter.

"Look, I am annoyed about not getting that reward, don't get me wrong.", said Louis. "But it's more the strength than anything. If she did that badly at the reward challenge, who's to say how she's going to do in immunity?"

(CONF) "Kristie just proved her incompetence and proved her challenge uselessness today while wrangling the pigs.", said Louis. "To take that long in the field while the other tribe was already over three quarters done is proof as to why she shouldn't stay here!"

While the two were off talking, Kristie was observing them from afar in the shelter. She seemed frozen in place, almost like she was a statue or hawk. Sighing, she regained her composure and continued watching.

(CONF) "Losing the challenge has really gotten me on the tribe's shit list, I assume", Kristie said. "That's why more than ever, I need to patrol the beach, checking for teeny-weeny little cracks to form, cracks so that I can strike. I've been standing here for an hour and if you ask me, I could stand here until Tribal Council if it's what it takes not to get my torch snuffed later!"

Christine was walking down the beach when she caught of a glimpse of Kristie, then turned back as she continued walking, a litttle bit faster now.

(CONF) "Kristie has been looking at everyone for at least an hour now", said Christine. "I don't know if it's because she's gone crazy, gone unhinged, whatever, but it makes me wonder how far she'll go to stay in the game."

Chong alerted the tribe to the tree, pointing to a note placed inside of it. "I saw it just now", he said. "It looks like a tree mail note."

(CONF) "Chong apparently found a tree mail-esque note in the tree today", said Paul. "Normally there's a larger gap between challenges, so something tells me this isn't going to be a normal immunity one tonight."

Chong then took out the note and read it out loud to the tribe.

"''Today you won't fight for your tribe, you're fighting for just you. Your performance will be logged, so keep your feet on like glue." ''he read out.

"Hmm..that sounds like the log rolling challenge", said Paul.

(CONF) "The small gap in challenge time suggests this might be an individual challenge and we're both going to tribal tonight", explained Louis. "If that's the case, then Kristie definitely is going to be off the beach tonight, because she's definitely not going to win immunity."

The two tribes headed to the challenge scene, where Jeff stood by the podium. "Come on in guys!", he said as Drakaka and Ahay headed in. "Adam, I'm going to need that back", he said to Adam as he took back the immunity idol. "Once again, immunity is back up for grabs!", he told the two tribes. "Only today, you're not playing for Tribal Immunity, but rather individual.", he said as he revealed two immunity necklaces that resembles Malagasy talismen. "Both tribes are going to be going to tribal council and voting someone out as well!". Layla gasped, seeming shocked by the twist. "Ready to get to today's challenge?", Jeff asked the group. Everyone nodded yes, so he proceeded to explain. "For today's challenge, the tribes are going to face off in a log rolling contestant!", he started. "The goal is to roll around on the log as much as you can, without falling off. If you fall off before your opponent, you're out of the challenge. Outlast them and you move on to another round. The last person standing wins individual immunity. Let's draw for spots and get ready."

Adam and Louis were the first matchup. "Adam and Louis up first for Ahay and Drakaka! Survivors ready? Go!", Jeff exclaimed. Louis rolled around slowly, trying not to slip. Adam was feeling devious however and leapt in the air, then slammed down hard on the log, causing Louis to fall in. "Louis in the water first! Adam moving on!"

"For this next round, two women are going at it! Lex for Ahay and Jess for Drakaka. Survivors ready? Go!". Jess was determined to make Lex fall in, but she was equally as determined to make Jess fall in. The two moved their legs rapidly, intending to knock the other off. The two then fell in, though Jess fell a split second first, so she was out. "Jess is in first, so Lex moves onto the next round!"

For the next round, Adam was to face off against Lex. "Adam takes on Lex!", Jeff exclaimed. Lex knew it was going to be a difficult battle to against Adam, who was practically the Hulk compared to her. Adam began by jumping like he did with Louis, but Lex was surprisingly resilient. She began to sping her feet in the opposite direction, but it was still no use, as she slipped then fell in.

"This time, two people from the same tribe will be facing off!", said Jeff. "Chong is taking on Paul! Survivors ready? GO!" Paul assumed that this would be an easy match, but Chong was determined. "I did this at summer camp!", Chong exclaimed. "So be ready!". Paul laughed at the idea of this, but was in for a surprise when he soon fell in. "Paul is in the water, Chong moves on!"

Chong seemed happy with his victory as he waited on the bench. "Next up are Christine from Ahay and Emma from Drakaka! Survivors ready? GO!" Emma did her best to keep her balance, while Christine seemed to shake a little bit. Both women held their own fairly well, but Christine eventually slipped off before Emma. "Christine's in the water first, Emma moves on!", said Jeff.

Adam and Chong were next up. "Two champions taking on each other!", exclaimed Jeff. The match was off to a wild start, as Adam's jumping tactic had little effect on Chong. "Damn!", Adam exclaimed as he kept at it. While Chong put up a good fight, Adam ultimately was able to overcome him. "Chong's in the water, so Adam moves on again!"

Layla and Kristie were the next to face off. "Layla and Kristie are up next. Survivors ready? GO!" Both girls were determined to win, but Kristie's determination clearly out-rivaled Layla's. Layla had better footwork however and Kristie soon fell into the water. "Kristie's in the water, Layla moves onto the final round!"

"For this final round, Adam, Karen and Layla will be facing off against each other. Survivors ready? GO!" Adam was doing well at the challenge, but he didn't expect to face off against two competitors. Hopping on the log, he was able to eliminate Karen, but now had to get rid of Layla. Layla wasn't willing to let him take her down though, she she spun around on the log wildly. Adam was able to get the advantage on her though and Layla fell in. "Karen and Layla are in the water, so Adam wins immunity!", Jeff exclaimed. Adam came over to Jeff to receive the immunity necklace. "Adam, immunity is yours, you're not going home tonight. Before we leave, I need you to assign immunity to someone on Ahay." Adam wasted no time in making his choice, eyeing Paul.

"I'm selecting Paul!", Adam exclaimed. Paul excitedly ran over to Jeff to claim his immunity necklace. "First individual immunity win as a contestant, shyeah!" Paul exclaimed. Jeff put the second necklace around Paul's neck. "Paul is safe and will not be going home tonight! Here's how it's going to work. Ahay, you will go to tribal council first and vote someone out. Drakaka, you will then follow Ahay and vote somebody out! Both of you, head back to camp!"

(CONF) "I didn't really need immunity tonight, but I sure am happy Adam came through for me!", said Paul. "If we were the Avengers, I think it'd be safe to say I'm Stark and he's Hulk. The way he defeated Louis in the first round? That was Hulk beating Loki!"

At Ahay, the mood was tense. Paul was happy to have received immunity, while Louis patted him on the back. "Not bad Anderson, not bad.", he remarked to him. Kristie begrudgingly offered her congratulations as well.

"Yeah, good job", she said in the most neutral voice she could muster up.

(CONF) "I had my ass kicked in the challenge today!", said Kristie. "It seemed like I legitimately had a chance, but man I was wrong! I wish I grew up in a town where log rolling was the norm!"

As Kristie walked off to the water, Christine approached her. "Hey, may I speak to you for a second?", Christine asked Kristie.

"Uh, I guess", Kristie replied. "What is it?"

(CONF) "I really don't have many people who I feel like I can speak to intimately", said Christine. "The guys aren't really willing to hear about my feelings and while I do like Lex, she's a little bit too out there to understand. I know me and Kristie have only been tribemates for a little bit, but I think she'll be willing to listen most."

"I know we haven't known each other for very long", Christine started. "But I don't feel very comfortable around Louis anymore."

Kristie didn't understand why Christine would approach her of all people, but given the precarious position she was in, she decided to suck it up and listen.

"Why is that?", Kristie asked.

"Well", started Christine. "I was a little upset that he dumped out the food on the first day and while this wasn't exactly his fault, I felt really scared at Tribal Council when John was going off on him. I know we're allies and all, but if he's going to keep doing things like this, I'm not sure how much I'm going to want to be around him.."

"Uh-huh", Kristie said as she nodded along.

(CONF) "What was Christine thinking?!", Kristie exclaimed. "If you're not feeling comfortable with your ally, you don't tell someone from the OPPOSITE tribe how you're feeling! Even more, you don't tell someone from the opposite tribe about this when there's a tribal council coming up! That said, this DOES give me a crack, I was talking about!"

Kristie walked over to Paul, who was sitting in the shelter. "Hey, I need to talk to you. This is important.", said Kristie. Paul turned to her. "What's up?", he asked.

"You're allied with Christine, right? You know, the one who talks about Louis?", Kristie asked.

"Yeah", said Paul. "Why do you ask?"

"Well", Kristie started. "Christine just came up to me just now and said she doesn't feel comfortable with Louis after the John fiasco. In fact, it sounded like she wasn't so sure about the alliance anymore."

(CONF) "Kristie told me that apparently Christine was having some second-thoughts about the alliance!", said Paul. "While I think it's a little bit early for things to fracture, I honestly wouldn't have an issue with Christine going! I get the sense that she's willing to do whatever he says, since she only joined after she voted in the minority at the first tribal council."

Paul walked over to Louis, who was lounging on the beach. "Lou, there's a problem we need to discuss.", said Paul.

"What is it?", Louis asked. "Is Lex singing one of her rock songs again on her air guitar?"

Paul barely stifled his laughter as he regained his composure. "No, not that! It's about Christine."

Louis' ears perked up. "What about her?"

"Kristie ran up to me and told me that Christine approached her before", said Paul. "She claims that Christine told her she was not sure about the alliance after you fought with John over the supplies."

Immediately, Louis grew furious. "She said what?!", he yelled out. "I swear, I feel like half the people on this island have some sort of death wish!"

(CONF) "Why do my minions have to be so stereotypically incompetent or shifty?!" Louis yelled. "This is why the Joker works better without a Harley Quinn! Every time you get help, they screw it up somehow! Kristie may be in the minority, but at least she wasn't in a pact with me, only to have 'second thoughts'! If it's the last thing I do, I'm going to make Christine pay for this!"

"So what should we do?", Paul asked him.

"What do you think?!", Louis snapped. "We can't let anyone against us stay here! Like last time, round up Chong and Lex because as God as my witness, we are getting Christine OUT tonight!"

"Alright!", Paul told him as he ran off to find Chong and Lex.

(CONF) "Part of me is a little surprised that Louis ate that story up", said Paul. "Yet another part of me believes this. I get some Joseph Stalin vibes from Louis. Even if there isn't the faintest possibility of the story being true, if Louis has even the SLIGHTEST suspicion someone is turning on him, he will get back at them! While I think it's a little bit crazy, I don't want to be sent to the Gulag by Uncle Lou, so I'm going to have to do my best Gorbachev impression and follow his whims for now!"

Paul found Chong and Lex walking by one of the cliffs, then stopped them. "Guys, there's been a slight change in plans", said Paul. "We need to vote out Christine."

"What? Why is that?", said Lex. "Seems kinda random to me."

(CONF) "I'm probably not in the best position to talk, being an admittedly impulsive, crazy kinda gal, but I was a little surprised when Paul told me the target was going to change tonight", said Lex. "Don't get me wrong, he can still jam out with me when we're here, but I just don't get it."

"Yeah, I'm okay with doing it, but I want to know why", Chong said.

"What happened was that Kristie told me that Christine spoke to her and said Louis made her feel uncomfortable over the incident with John", said Paul. "I told Louis about this and he freaked out, thinking that Christine wants out of the alliance. I personally think it might be rash, but questioning Louis clearly has some bad consequences, so we should probably just grant his wish and take out Christine.

"Oh, that does make sense", said Chong. "I'm on board."

"Good", said Paul.

(CONF) "I'm willing to go with the flow", said Chong. "And now that I heard Louis wants to get rid of Christine instead of Kristie because of something Christine said, I'll vote her out. Christine seems like a nice person and all, but if all her and Louis will do is fight, I'm gonna take her out for her own sake."

Paul then walked back to Louis. "They're in".

"Perfect", Louis said. "You think we should take Kristie into the fold for now? I know she's on the opposite tribe, but she did rat on Christine and I'm happy about that."

"Yeah, that makes sense", said Paul. "I could tell her about this."

(CONF) "I think I was a little generous when I called Louis arrogant and cocky.", said Paul. "After the stunt he just pulled, he's a complete moron! But like many morons, he has a big ego, so as long as I tell him how great he is and do everything he wants, he'll be placated", said Paul.

Noticing her walking toward the jungle, Paul approached Kristie. "Good news", he said. "Louis flipped his shit and wants Christine out and even said he's willing to take you in as an ally".

"Really?", Kristie responded. "Well that is great! But it sucks I have to work with louis to say alive now!"

"Believe me, I think the same thing!", said Paul. "But you saw what happened to Christine when she had second thoughts. Besides, all you have to do is snark about him behind his back at least once a day and you'll get used to it."

"Beats getting voted out tonight, I guess", said Kristie.

(CONF) "It just goes to show what this game's about", said Kristie. "This morning, I was fighting for my life and assuming I'd be next, but thanks to Christine spilling her guts, I'm now working with Louis and posse. Sure, Louis probably will be really irritating, but if Paul can manage, I suppose I'll be fine!"

Christine approached Louis, ready to confirm the target for the night. "So, Kristie, right?", she asked.

Louis did not answer, instead turning away as he prepared for Tribal Council.

(CONF) "Louis was a little weird with me just now", said Christine. "At the same time, it's been a long day and he just seems tired. Besides, we've been working together for a bit now, so what reason would he have to throw it all away now?"

Ahay grabbed their torches as they headed for tribal council, walking down the path as the sky turned black. Everyone dipped their torches in the flames, as they then set them up behind them. Sitting down, everyone turned to Jeff. "Welcome to tribal council guys. Paul, when you found out that tonight was going to be a double elimination, were there any thoughts racing through your mind?", Jeff asked.

Paul nodded. "Yeah, I mean everyone's going to have SOMETHING to say when something like this happens! Am I worried I'm going to be voted out? Obviously not!", he said pointing to his immunity necklace "But I still am wondering who's going to go home and all."

"Louis, what are you basing your vote off tonight? Are you thinking about a possible merge, challenge strength, loyalty?", Jeff asked.

"Tonight I'm certainly thinking about loyalty, like I do every vote", said Louis. "Even if you have strong tribemates, ones you think can win you immunity, what good will they be if they're plotting against you?"

"Christine, what do you think of what Louis said?", Probst asked. Louis and Paul gave each other looks of approval, unbeknownst to Christine. "

"I definitely agree with Louis!", Christine exclaimed. "If we're not loyal to each other, how will we even be a tribe? I've worked in business for a while now and while many people will claim that you need to look out only for yourself in the field, if you don't have strong bonds, everything falls apart! To me, Survivor is like a business in that sense."

"Chong, you seem like a pretty conflict avoidant guy. What do you make of what Christine said?", Jeff asked him.

"I really don't see why anyone would disagree, ESPECIALLY me!", Chong exclaimed. "I've based my life around keeping in positive energy and removing negative. My parents divorced when I was 10 and while it was definitely hard on me, my Mom always told me it was to keep the good thoughts alive and the bad thoughts dead. And this is not at all different."

"What about you Lex? What are you thinking hen you're choosing someone to vote out?", Jeff asked her.

"To me, I'm really a go with the flow type", Lex started. "But I guess I don't want too much drama. I mean, I AM crazy, don't get me wrong on that, but I'm not THAT type of crazy!"

"Kristie, you've been quiet all tribal. Being an Ahay, do you worry at all about what could go down tonight?"

Kristie nodded, keeping her best poker face. "Of course I worry!", Kristie explained. "When you're on the bottom and you have to go to Tribal Council, there's always this question of 'Will they do the predictable thing, or will everything just change?' Anything can happen in Survivor, so even when you're 99 percent CERTAIN that you'll be out next, sometimes you're thrown a bone."

"Christine, what do you make of Kristie's statement, that even if it seems CRYSTAL-CLEAR that you know who will be voted out, sometimes something changes?" asked Jeff.

"I mean, Kristie does have a point", said Christine. "Not every vote goes the way you planned. That said, I have the utmost faith in my allies that things will go as we intended. We've been together for this long, so why would things just change now?"

"Well, now you'll have a chance to test your alliance bonds. I'm assuming Paul's keeping immunity?", said Jeff.

"Yup, I'm not Reichenbaching this one!", Paul exclaimed.

"Wise choice, it is time to vote. Louis, you're up.", said Jeff. Louis walked up to the voting booth and wrote down Christine's name. "Christine, you should know that a court jester can NEVER challenge the King. As the monarch of this Kingdom, I say off with your head!". Christine then walked up, slowly writing Kristie on the parchment. "Kristie, I'm happy I got to know you out here. I'm sorry we couldn't get to spend more time with each other." Paul, Lex, Chong and Kristie then walked up to vote. Kristie held up her vote as she spoke to the camera. "Christine, I'd take a Survivor 101 class the next time you consider coming out here." With that, everyone sat down.

"I'll go tally the votes.", Jeff said as he went to get the urn. "If anybody has the hidden immunity idol and you want to play it, now would be the time to do so." Nobody stood up, so Jeff continued. "Okay, once the votes are read the decision is final. Person voted out will be asked to leave the tribal council area immediately. I'll read the votes".

"First vote...Kristie". Kristie knew that Christine thought she was still the target, so she didn't become alarmed.

"Second vote...Christine. That's one vote Kristie, one vote Christine." Christine seemed confused, especially since Kristie seemed to get along with her. Still it was only one vote, so she didn't freak out.

"Third vote...Christine. That's two votes Christine, one vote Kristie.", said Jeff. Christine was visibly shocked, as she held her mouth out.

"Fourth vote...Christine. That's three votes Christine, one vote Kristie, one vote left." Jeff said. Now sweating profusely, Christine prepared for the inevitable.

"Sixth person voted out of Survivor Madagascar: Christine, you need to bring me your torch", said Jeff. Christine was completely taken by surprise as she went to get her torch. Kristie high-fived Paul, as the two watched her head out. "I did NOT see that coming!", she exclaimed as she placed her torch in front of Jeff.

"Christine, the tribe has spoken", Jeff said as he snuffed her torch. "It is time for you to go.". Christine then walked off into the night, too shocked to speak." Jeff then turned to face Ahay. "Well, judging by Christine's reaction tonight, this vote was a surprise. Whether this signals some major changes coming in your tribe or if this was just a fluke, that's up to you. Grab your torches, head back to camp, good night."

Ahay then took off, grabbing their torches as they descended down the stairs. It was now Drakaka's turn for triball..

Christine's Final Words: "Wow, what a shocker! I thought that my alliance was with me all the way to the end, but it seems like Louis may have had some other plans! Still, this was a heck of an adventure and I still wouldn't mind meeting up with Kristie after this season!"

EARLIER THAT DAY AT DRAKAKA..

Adam was elated as he returned to the Drakaka camp. Not only did he manage to get Paul individual immunity, but he also won it himself in an impressive showing at the log roll. "Yeah buddy!", he yelled out.

(CONF) "Whew, it's hard to breath when you're having a day this great!", exclaimed Adam. "First we win pie and beer, then Paul gets immunity and now I have the necklace! What's next, a free trip to Hooters?"

Emma approached Otto and Adam to discuss the impending vote. "So, who would you rather it be?", she asked. "Part of me wants to get rid of Layla because she's not that strong compared to Chris, but the other part of me thinks a merge might be soon", she told them. "I don't want to lose challenges, since that wouldn't be very sensible, but if we don't have many left, it's not like we'll have many people to potentially lose"

The two nodded. "Yeah, I get your point", Otto said. "Besides, we have me and Adam so even if a merge isn't that close, we have muscle."

"Very true", Emma agreed.

(CONF) "This vote theoretically should be fairly easy", said Emma. "Common sense would dictate that Layla should go next since she's neither in the alliance nor very good at challenges, at least compare to Chris, but at the same time, it's been about 16 or so days, so it's not like the merge could be that far off."

"I think we should talk to Karen and Jess", said Adam.

"Good idea", Otto replied as the three walked off. Left to their own devices, Chris and Layla discussed the situation for the night.

"I'm pretty sure we're next", said Layla. "Neither of us are in the alliance after all".

"Yeah, we're not. So we're gonna need to think of something.", said Chris.

"I hope we can soon", Layla said.

(CONF) "Me and Chris aren't in the best position right now", said Layla. "Adam, Otto, Emma, Karen and Jess clearly have the power and I feel like no matter what we try, there's no point."

"Here, come with me", Chris told her as he led her up the pathway to the cliff.

"Where are we going?", Layla asked him.

"You know that cliff I always hang out at? I wanted you to see it." Chris told her.

(CONF) "Ever since Day 1, there's this cliff I hang out at that me and a few other people have been calling Chris' Crib", Chris chuckled "I go there not only because I really like to look at the view of the ocean ,but also because to me, it's a place where I find calmness, clarity, just the ability to see things a bit more clearly."

Layla followed Chris up the slope, with the two eventually reaching the ledge. They could see the beach below them, along with the waves. "Wow, this is gorgeous!", said Layla. "I've never seem anything like this back at home!"

"This basically is my life!", Chis explained. "I live in Alaska, in this small coastal town, so you just see mountains and mountains for miles! It can be a little daunting at first, but you get used to it quick!"

"Well, this is awesome!", Layla exclaimed, feeling a nice gust of wind.

(CONF) "I felt like a HUGE weight dropped off my shoulders when Chris took me up to the really big cliff!", Layla explained. "Sure, we still have to go to Tribal Council, but this has definitely calmed me!"

"So, I was thinking Karen", said Layla. "She isn't the best at the challenges."

"I can agree with that", said Chris. "I guess that's a possibility."

Back on the beach below, Adam, Otto, Emma, Karen and Jess discussed the plan.

"So, I already talked to Otto and Adam about this", Emma began. "But I'm kinda torn between Chris and Layla. I know he's stronger, but I really don't know how much time we have left before the merge comes, if you know what I mean."

Jess nodded. "That makes sense. Me personally, if we're going to go by that logic, I'm fine with taking out Chris.", Jess said. "Besides. He's always alone and I just don't know what to make of that, if he could find an idol and cause problems."

Karen then chimed in. "Yeah, you don't know how many idols are hidden on this beach and even if the merge isn't until 9 like it was in Gabon, we still have Otto and Adam for strength."

"True that", Adam replied in agreement.

(CONF) "The decision making process required a slight bit of thought", explained Karen. "But when me, Jess, Adam, Otto and Emma discussed this, we realized that there's not so much time left before a merge where it matters if Chris is gone. Besides, like Jess said, he's always alone and while I don't think Chris is really the type to care much about idols, you can never know in this game what someone's really like."

"Alright, so Chris it is?", Otto clarified. "Chris it is", the others replied back in unison.

"Say, why don't we make an alliance name or something like that, since we're together and all", said Adam.

Karen loved the idea, smirking as she proposed some names. "Since we're all a little bit different from one another and there are five of us, lets call ourselves eccentric 8-3!"

"What's alliteration?", Adam asked.

"It's when you repeat a sound successively.", explained Jess. "So if I said I'm a good girl, then it'd be alliteration since I repeared the "g' sound!".

"Oh, that makes sense!", said Adam. With that, the newly dubbed alliance put their hand together, then lited them up. "Eccentric 8-3!"

(CONF) "I'm definitely comfortable with the decision, now that we discussed it thoroughly", said Jess. "If this was at least four or so rounds before the merge, I'd be willing to keep Chris over Layla for strength, but it's clear we're getting pretty close, so we don't have to worry about that as much! Besides, anyone who potentially finds an idol without telling me automatically is on my shit-list!

Chris and Layla sped up to the group as they prepared to grab their torches. Heading down the winding path, Drakaka eventually reached tribal council. Dipping their torches into the fire, they placed them behind them as they sat down in their seats. Jeff greeted Drakaka, then proceeded to business. "Adam, I asked this question to Ahay when they came by just before and I'll ask it to you now. When you found out that tonight would be a double elimination, what was going through your mind?" said Jeff.

"I definitely was a little bit surprised", Adam said. "I don't know how to explain it, but this just didn't feel like the right time for it, if you know what I mean."

"Emma, what do you think of what Adam said, that there are certain times where something like a double elimination feels right?" asked Jeff.

"I definitely don't think there's a right or wrong on Survivor for those kinds of things", said Emma. "The game never plays out the exact same way from season to season, so who determines what's "right"?"

"Karen, do you ever think about what Emma said, the idea that Survivor is ever changing and you can't expect the same thing each time?" said Jeff

"Absolutely", said Karen. "I've been seeing this show since day one and I knew that the format would be changed up after I watched Australia and it had 42 days instead of 39. It's the little things that often mean something bigger."

"Jess, does this ever play into the votes, the idea that this season may not do things typically, that when you expect the usual merge, you get another round with tribes?", Jeff asked.

"Sure it does", Jess replied. "In fact, one of the things that me and a few others were discussing tonight is that we feel like we're close to the merge soon. We were questioning whether to vote based on strength or threat quotient and Karen mentioned the fact that maybe we could have a Gabon situation where the tribes had another swap instead of merging at 10 So yeah, we think about it."

"Otto, given what Jess and Karen have mentioned, would you personally believe strength or threat status is more crucial to the vote?" asked Jeff.

"I really think that there's a point to be made about voting based on how threatening someone is", said Otto. "Like the girls said, it is pretty close to the merge, so it's not like we're choosing to take out a challenge beast in episode 1, if we were to."

"Emma, from what I've gathered, you seem to be rather cautious, conservative person. Do you think that there's any merit in speculating situations that are purely hypothetical, or do you thin the tribe should stick with what it knows?" said Jeff.

"You're right that I like to play things safely", said Emma. "That said, because I had those exact concerns, you know, practicality and all, I discussed this in length with my alliance and we figured out that logistically, it'd be fairly safe to vote out someone who contributes physically, since, like the others have said, we likely don't have much time left before the merge."

"Chris, Layla, you two have been pretty quiet tonight. Any concerns of going home?", Jeff asked.

"I'm definitely worried", said Layla. "I know we're not part of the alliance and it just makes sense for one of us to go."

"Chris, if you were one of your other tribemates, what would you say is a valid reason they'd want you out?", Jeff asked.

"I admit I'm a little bit of a loner", Chris said. "I don't hate people, but sometimes I get overwhelmed and I just need to take some time off to just think and be with nature!"

"Do you think people might think you have an idol, due to how much time you spend alone?" Jeff asked.

"Not really", said Chris. "I try not to worry too much about things like that. In fact, I usually don't really decide who to vote for until I'm in that booth and have to write someone's name down!"

"Very interesting", said Jeff. "Adam, I assume you want to keep your immunity?"

"Definitely,", said Adam.

"Well Chris, given what you just told me, you'll be able to have an idea in a minute or two, as it's time to vote. Adam, you're up.", said Jeff.

Adam walked up to the voting booth and slowly wrote down Chris' name. He then held up his vote to the camera. "Sorry mountain man, but my alliterative alliance has absolutely no choice but to take you out." Adam then placed his vote in the urn, as Chris walked up, writing down Karen. "Sorry Karen, I think you're a cool girl, but if I'm here tomorrow, I want to be on a tribe that's as strong as possible." Otto, Layla, Karen, Jess and Emma then voted in order. Once Emma voted, she sat down.

"I'll go tally the votes", said Jeff as he went to collect the urn. Layla tapped her fingers while awaiting the response. Jeff then returned with the urn. "If anybody has the hidden immunity idol and you want to play it, now would be the time to do so." Nobody stood up, so Jeff continued. "Alright, once the votes are read, the decision is final. Person voted out will be asked to leave the tribal council area immediately. I'll read the votes." Jeff took the lid off the urn to read the votes.

"First vote...Chris". said Jeff. Chris watched along, waiting a bit anxiously.

"Second vote...Karen", that's one vote Chris, one vote Karen. Karen also watched along, assuming this was either Chris or layla's vote.

"Third vote...Chris, that's two for Chris.", Jeff said. Chris sighed a little bit.

"Fourth vote...Karen, that's two for Chris, two for Karen."

"Fifth vote...Chris, that's three for Chris. One left",

"Seventh person voted out of Survivor: Madagascar...Chris, you need to bring your torch.". Chris seemed disappointed, but he didn't hold it against his tribe-mates. "Good luck guys", he said as he placed his torch in front of Jeff. "Chris, the tribe has spoken", Jeff snuffed Chris's torch, then sent him off. "It's time for you to go." Chris waved goodbye one last time, then disappeared into the night. "Well, the vote seemed unified tonight. Whether that will last or not is up to you guys. Grab your torches, head back to camp, good night.". With that, Drakaka did just that as they headed out of tribal council, the night sky still illuminated by the moon.

Chris's Final Words: "I'm really happy I got to do this. I like to take on challenges as they come, sometimes I come out on top, sometimes not. But I don't care, because I had a great time and I met some cool people. I don't have any hard feelings, so I wish these guys lots of luck!"

Episode 7: "We Have to Snuff the Rooster"
''Last time on Survivor...Kristie was feeling isolated after John was voted out, becoming determined to exploit weaknesses in the main alliance of Louis, Paul, Christine, Lex and Chong. At the reward challenge, Kristie's inability to guide her pig back to the pen led to a victory for Drakaka. Chris isolated himself from the tribe, while Otto assauged Adam's fears of an idol by revealing his own. At the immunity challenge, both tribes were shocked to find that they would be competing for individual immunity and that each tribe would be voting someone out. Adam managed to outlast everyone at the log roll, while he gave immunity to Paul. Over at Ahay, Christine voiced discomfort to Kristie, who completely took advantage of the situation. She told Paul what Christine said, then Paul told Louis, who was not pleased. Louis ordered Christine be voted out next instead of Kristie, while Kristie was brought into Louis' alliance for ratting out Christine. In the end, Louis got his wish as Christine was blindsided by her tribe. At Drakaka, Chris and Layla reflected on their potential elimination, while Chris helped Layla calm down. Initially, the alliance of Adam, Otto, Karen, Jess and Emma was unsure whether to value strength or threat potential in the merge, but the newly dubbed Eccentric 8-3 ultimately came to a decision. Ultimately, the fear over Chris' strength in the merge and his possible finding of an idol led to him being voted out. 11 are left, who will be voted out tonight?''

As Drakaka returned to camp, Adam laid down on the ground, sighing heavily in exhaustion. "I need to hit the sack.", he said.

(CONF) "It wasn't that hard voting out Chris", said Adam. "And it probably won't be very hard getting out layla either. But when everyone in our alliance started mentioning the merge, it did get me thinking about how eager I am for it to start. I feel drained still being in the tribe vs. tribe state. Besides, I'll finally get to be on the same tribe with Paul and I'll be reunited with Chong! I hope he has some more hippie storyies ready, because I wouldn't mind a few right now!"

Layla also let out a sigh, albeit this one was more out of disappointment over an inevitable outcome. "I gotta go take a walk."

(CONF) "I wasn't surprised Chris went", Layla said. "It would have taken a heck of a miracle for the alliance to keep us and last time I checked, I was no miracle worker!"

Otto turned to Jess, lamenting the decision. "I didn't really have any strong thoughts about Chris, but he had to go.", said Otto.

"Yeah, he was part of the enemy squad and you can't let them get away", said Jess.

(CONF) "The vote was pretty easy tonight", said Jess. "Initially we had some reservations about taking out Chris, but once we determined that we probably won't be in the tribal phase for much longer, it only made sense. Layla should also be an easy decision, though I feel like there might be some tension, since she's been a little odd since we got back to camp."

"I feel like Layla's acting a little weird, though", said Jess.

"In what way?", Otto asked.

"It's hard to explain", said Jess. "But I feel like Chris was more of a loner than her. Do you think maybe he rubbed off on her at all?"

"Hmm..", thought Otto. "I would say it's safe to say probably, but come on Jess, she doesn't have a beard the size of that bush yet!" Jess laughed at his remark as the two walked off.

(CONF) "Jess theorized that Layla went a little bit haywire after Chris got voted out", said Otto. "I suppose it makes a little bit of sense, but I hope she's not dancing around the tribe in her underwear like Phillip, yelling 'Aroo-ha'! Besides, her voice never could match his in terms of tonal power!"

The next day, the mood was rather unclear at Ahay. Paul was still resting in the shelter next to Kristie when Louis approached them.

"I just want to say once more, thanks for revealing Christine was a dirty traitor to me", said Louis. "If that wasn't the case, who knows what she could have done?!"

(CONF) "I'm not an easily scared person", said Paul. "I've seen really graphic car crashes like something out of an NC-17 version of Michael Bay movie, I've seen Uncle have a stroke, hell I've seen my sister have her first make out session with this really, REALLY ugly guy she used to date. But Louis' behavior this morning was really, REALLY freaking me out! If Christine could get blindsided by him simply for being a little bit nervous over a confrontation he had with a 6'4 200 pound drill sergeant, then I'm terrified as to what type of sadistic vengeance he has planned for when I accidentally sneeze on him and get microscopic sized droplets on him! Well, maybe it won't be that, since I have a pretty strong immune system, but you get the idea!"

"My legs are restless. I think I'm going for a walk", said Paul.

"Wait, let me come!", exclaimed Kristie as she followed behind.

(CONF) "While I am happy that Louis was paranoid enough to turn on Christine last night thanks to my story, I definitely think it wouldn't be unfair to say he's been acting strange as hell.", said Kristie. "He keeps going on and on and on and on about how he made Christine suffer for trying to leave the alliance and if I'm around him for a MINUTE more, I'll need to be committed to an insane asylum."

Louis called out from the shelter, loud enough so the two could hear.

"MAKE SURE YOU'RE BACK SOON!", he yelled. "WE NEED TO DISCUSS OUR NEXT PLAN OF ATTACK!"

"You tell em' dad!", Lex quipped as she stuck her tongue at at Louis. Louis ignored her remark, rolling his eyes.

(CONF) "It was a shame that I had to take out Christine last night", said Louis. "I have no idea why she wouldn't want to side with the group anymore, given that I saved her butt after we voted out Amy, but Kristie seems desperate enough that she'll make a good replacement! After all, why would she want to turn on me after what I did for her last night?"

As Otto and Adam kicked around a rock out of boredom, they noticed Paul and Kristie approaching them. They both perked up, waving to their friend.

"Hey, Paul!....And Kristie?" Adam remarked confused. "What's she doing here?", he asked Otto. Otto shrugged his shoulders. "Maybe Paul made her his girlfriend", Otto quipped as he laughed.

(CONF) "It was great seeing Paul again!", said Adam. "Even though we live on the same beach and can see each other any time we want, the tribes have kinda been separating themselves. I guess the swap changed our minds, I dunno."

Otto then took his turn to greet Paul. "Hey man, what brings you here? And Kristie, I haven't talked to you much, what's going on with you two?, he asked confused.

"We need to talk to guys", said Paul. "Game-talk". Otto and Adam seemed a little bit nervous as they nodded.

"Alright, what's going on?", Adam asked. "Let's go off in the bushes so no one hears us."

Otto, Paul and Kristie followed Adam as they headed off into the bush covered area, concealed from the others.

"Well", Paul started. "Christine got voted out last night. Louis' orders." Otto and Adam could not believe what they were hearing and dropped their jaws.

"Really?", Otto asked in disbelief. "Why?"

(CONF) "When Paul told me that Louis decided Christine was going, I was confused", said Otto. "None of this was making sense to me, but I figured there was some type of explanation, so I let him continue."

"I actually brought along Kristie to explain this", said Paul. "Kristie, may you do the honors?"

"Not a problem!", Kristie said. "What happened was that before our tribal council, Christine approached me out of nowhere and started telling me all of these things. Louis got into this really big fight with John before he got voted out and it got close to getting physical. She said that that made her uncomfortable, so that made me suspect that she wanted to defect from the alliance. When Louis found out, he deemed her a traitor and as he wished, we took her out. Does that make sense?"

Adam slowly nodded, still a little bit phased from the story. "Yeah, that's just...wow. I didn't think Louis would read that much into it."

(CONF) "After I heard Kristie's story, I didn't know what to think!", exclaimed Adam. "Hell, I COULDN'T think! I know Paul and Otto have told me how demanding Louis can be, how bossy and combative he is, but this just is a new level of suspicion, a new level of paranoia. In fact, that kinda weirds me out in a heebie bajeebies way!"

"So what do we do?", asked Otto.

Paul sighed, knowing he'd have to tell Otto. "Well," Paul started. "Given how much he flipped out over someone being scared of him and assumes anything other than complete and unconditional approval is a sign of plotting against him, I think that he should be...voted out as soon as one of us gets the chance."

"Are you sure this is a good idea?", asked Adam. "What if he catches on?"

"Simple", said Kristie. "He's really self-obsessed, so as long as he doesn't hear his name being thrown out, then he shouldn't see it coming."

"Hmm..that sounds devious", said Otto. "Perfect!", he said as he smirked.

"Alright, so whenever he can be eliminated next, we'll do it.", said Paul. "Got it?"

"Got it", the three responded.

"Good", replied Paul. "We gotta get back to camp or otherwise he's going to wonder why we've been gone for so long. See you two later!" Paul said as he ran back to camp with Kristie.

"Later Paul! Later Kristie!", Adam waved bye as him and Otto returned to Drakaka.

(CONF) "So, it comes to this", said Otto. "We're going to be taking out Louis before we take out him. The whole situation reminds me of the movie Scarface. Louis would be Tony, because they both are paranoid and think everyone is out to get them. I guess in his case, him voting out Christine would sorta be akin to Tony killing his wife, the Michelle Pfeiffer character. I'd say that Paul is Alejandro Soussa, but frankly, my hair is better than Paul's, so I'm Soussa! But more to the point, this will be a new start, as like they said in the movie, the world is ours!"

As Louis waited around impatiently in the shelter, he then caught Paul and Kristie walking back toward him. "Finally!", he said. "Since he was with a girl, I guess I can understand why he was gone so long!", he snarked.

Lex was not going to relent today, as she made another snarky remark at Louis' expense. "Yeah, isn't that great? Now, you just have to decide whether he gets a time out or is grounded from seeing Otto on Drakaka. After all, you are his dad!". Louis face-palmed, then sighed a slight bit.

(CONF) "Paul was with Kristie for quite a bit", Louis said. "A lot of people would probably claim that's some type of plotting on his part, but there are two reasons I know that's not true! One, I just pulled Kristie in, so no sane person would think of turning on someone who just rescued you! That's like strangling a paramedic for saving you from choking! Second, I have a teenage son. I know that doctors have confirmed that boys don't actually think of girls every seven seconds. In fact, Eric is proof that they think about them for 7 HOURS at a time! I'm sure if Paul competed as a father, he'd think the same thing!"

Louis took the opportunity to greet the two. "Welcome back!", he exclaimed. "What were you guys doing anyway?"

"Oh..uh..seashell collecting", said Paul sheepishly.

"Yeah, we got some pretty big ones, but we..lost them all", said Kristie.

"Well, that's very good.", said Louis. "Kristie, may I speak with Paul alone for a minute?"

Kristie nervously nodded. "Uh..sure, I guess", she stammered. "Go have fun.."

"Perfect! We should only be a little bit!". Louis said.

Kristie watched as the two headed off, aghast at Louis' social faux paus. "What an idiot", she muttered to herself.

(CONF) "I'm glad Paul suggested nabbing Louis when we get the chance", said Kristie. "Not only is he extremely paranoid, but MAN is he stupid! Now, I do trust Paul, given he's the reason I'm still here, but Louis needs to at least smell the coffee before we make him drink it!"

Meanwhile, Louis guided Paul away from camp, whispering to him. "So, I was thinking about what we should do when the merge comes.", said Louis. "Now, I intend to use Kristie for a little bit, since she's desperate enough todo what we say. I want to start by taking out some of the other Ahays, maybe Jess, Karen, Adam and then her. Then I see Chong and Lex going, then we finally get rid of her and you, me and Otto will be the F3. How does that sound?"

Paul was mentally laughing so hard he was shocked he didn't get an aneurysm, but to keep up appearances, he nodded compliantly at his "boss."

"Sounds like a perfect plan Louis!", Paul exclaimed. "I can't wait to carry it out."

Louis smiled. "Excellent. I think this is going to be a very fun merge, don't you?"

Paul nodded. "You bet!". Once Louis walked away, he then smirked. "Oh, you bet it will be!"

(CONF) "Are the producers SURE Louis took an IQ test before he was allowed on the island?" Paul quipped. "Seriously, first he doesn't bat an eye when I'm gone with Kristie for hours, then he assumes I haven't been talking to a SINGLE member of Ahay since we got on this beach?! But going by the old proverb that even a stopped clock is right at least twice a day, Louis IS right that this merge will be fun! Fun for ME that is! To be completely fair to him, he never said WHO it would be fun for!"

After Louis left the scene, Kristie approached Paul. "What did he say?", Kristie asked.

"He thinks that all the Ahays are going to go at the merge, but we know what the truth is", he said. "I advise you not to take anything he says seriously anymore", said. "I'd value a monkey's input more than his by now!", he laughed. Kristie chuckled as well "We're so terrible!", she laughed.

(CONF) "I think that there used to be a comedy club or something like that on this beach", said Kristie. "Because to me, the fact that Louis actually believes he's going to pull off his plans is the best joke ever!"

Meanwhile at Drakaka, Adam had not told Jess, Karen or Emma about the plan. Trying to take his mind off of it, he lounged in the shelter, until he noticed Layla walking back to camp in only her bikini. She had her arms raised in the air and appeared to be making some chanting noise.

"Arooooooooooooooo!", Layla shouted.

"What the hell is she doing?!", Adam exclaimed

(CONF) "I haven't said a word to the girls about the plan yet", said Adam. "I've been trying to relax and take it easy. But when I saw Layla marching into camp shouting like she was drunk or high or whatever, I started to wonder what was going on!"

"Layla, what are you doing?", Adam asked with confusion. Layla simply raised her arms again, shouting "Aroooooo!", once more.

"Oh, hey Adam!", Layla giggled. "I'm just trying to get in touch with nature! Chris taught me about it, so I wanted to embrace my inner animal!"

"Okaaaaay", Adam said with confusion.

(CONF) "Watching Chris get voted out was tough", said Layla. "But when he brought me up to that cliff before tribal council, I just felt like he showed me something, something I never really understood before! I know I'm probably gonna go home next time we lose, so I'm just gonna have as much fun as possible before that moment comes! Harooooooo!"

"Otto! Jess! Karen! Emma! You NEED to see what's going on here!" Adam yelled as he called for them. The four walked out to where Adam was standing, gazing at Layla who was in her bikini while reaching her arms out. Otto and Karen were chuckling while Jess and Emma were more confused than antthing.

"Oh, hey Layla.", Emma said unsure of the situation. "What exactly is this all about?", she asked.

"Hey Emma!", Layla called back. "Oh, this?", she asked in reference to her stretched arms. "I'm embracing my inner animal so I can be in tune with nature! Chris taught me that before I got voted out!"

Emma nodded, nervously laughing. "Well, that's very nice!", Emma replied. "I'm glad you're having a good time in spite of that." Turning around, Emma was thoroughly unsure what to make of it.

(CONF) "This is something I've never really seen on Survivor!", said Emma. "Most of the time when people are on the bottom, they're scrambling and struggling tirelessly to not get voted out. But Layla? She almost seemed to embrace it! I do have to admit, this whole "inner animal" nonsense is slightly funny!"

"Layla, what exactly does this inner animal stuff involve?", Karen asked, slightly curious. Jess eyed her suspiciously, then Karen turned back to her. "You should have known I was weird when I told you I'm a 39 year old woman who likes video games!". Jess sighed, then conceded her point. "Fair enough. But yeah, what exactly is this about Layla? Maybe we could join in!"

Otto seemed excited by the prospect. "Yeah! I want to learn about my inner animal! Rawr!", he said as he made clawing motions.

"No problem everyone!", Layla replied excitedly. "First, all you need to do is move your arms up like this!", she said, demonstrating as she motioned her arms upwards.

"Like this?" Emma asked, feeling as if she had to go all out if she was to even get involved in this.

"Perfect!", said Layla. "Now everyone, stretch to the side!". Adam, Otto, Emma, Jess and Karen did as she said, twisting and contorting their muscles.

"Does my insurance cover this?", Otto said as he felt a cramp in his side.

"You'll get used to it, don't worry!", Layla said as she moved to the other side. Eventually, everyone seemed to be getting the hang of it. "Wow, you guys are fast learners!", she exclaimed. "Now stand up straight, lift your arms up to the sky and shout: 'AROOOOOOOOOOO!', as loud as you can!"

They all nodded, standing up straight and yelling "AROOOO!"

"You're doing fantastic!", Layla exclaimed. A few hours later, the sun started to set and everyone on Drakaka became tired.

"Wow Layla, that was actually kinda interesting!", said Jess.

"Yeah, I never have done something like that since I was 5!", said Karen.

"Well, don't listen to people who tell you that this stuff is nonsense or childish!", exclaimed Layla. "What matters is you getting what it means!"

"Wise words Lay, wise words", Otto complimented her.

"Yeah, really wise!", Jess said as the tribe soon headed off to sleep.

(CONF) "It seems like Layla's checked out of the game!", exclaimed Jess. "Not that I'm complaining, as this makes things easier for us, but I've never seen anyone do something like this before! It's like playing Battlefront and letting the other team just mow you down repeatedly because you know you're not gonna win!"

As the sun rose in the sky, the members of Drakaka rose from their slumber. Otto found what appeared to be the latest treemail note, then announced the news to the tribe. "TREEE MAIL!", Otto exclaimed. He then proceeded to read the note.

''Today your challenge will feed you, your belly will be full. But you might surely meat your match which makes victory null!''". He then slid the note away as he turned to the tribe. "I think this is the one where you need to eat the meat on a stick all at once", said Otto. "Oh, I remember that one!", said Karen. "That was from Amazon! They all had their hands tied up and had to eat the meat at once!".

"Sounds appetizing", Adam said nauseously.

(CONF) "This day's going to be pretty simple hopefully.", said Adam. "If we lose, then Layla goes out without putting up a fuss while I get to discuss Paul's plans with the girls. I haven't really thought about what will happen if we win yet, but I think this is one of the few times where I'd rather lose something than win it!"

"Hey Layla", sais Jess. "To give Drakaka some good luck before the challenge, why not do your aroo thing?"

Layla beamed. "No problem!", she said as she stretched her arms up. "Arooooo!".

"Aroooo!", shouted the rest of the tribe as they headed off to the challenge.

Drakaka and Ahay both headed off to the challenge site, ready to take on whatever was thrown at them. As they arrived, Jeff greeted them. "Come on in guys! Drakaka, getting your first look at the new Ahay tribe, Christine voted out at the last Tribal Council." Karen, Jess and Emma look shocked, while Adam turned to them. "I'll explain it later"., he said. "Drakaka, I'm going to need that back!", Jeff said as he took the immunity idol back from Adam. "Once again, immunity is back up for grabs! For today's challenge, both tribes are going to have their hands tied behind their backs as they must tear off meat from a very large slab of it. Once you've torn off meat, you need to drop it in the scale that corresponds to your tribe. Purple for Ahay and green for Drakaka. You have 5 minutes to tear off as much meat as you can. Whichever tribe has more pounds of meat at the end, wins immunity. In addition, you're playing for reward. Wanna know what you're playing for?" Everyone nodded. "Since we're on the island of Madagascar, I find it's only fitting that the winning tribe gets to watch a marathon of the Madagascar movies at their own private theater. There will be soda, candy, popcorn, any junk food you can name, it'll be there! Additionally, the winning tribe will be staying overnight at a hotel on the premises of the theater!". Both tribes seemed excited at the reward, especially Louis, of all people. "Drakaka, you have one extra member, so you need to sit someone out. Who will it be?"

"I'll do this!", Layla called out. "Alright, Layla will be sitting out", Jeff said as Layla headed over to the bench. "I'll give you guys a moment to strategize."

Both Ahay and Drakaka had their hands tied behind their backs as they awaited the "GO". "For immunity and reward, Survivors ready? GO!", Jeff called out. Ahay began making quick work of their meat, as Chong tore off a huge section with his teeth, than ran over to the scale to drop it off. Adam also tore off a chunk of his own, but his was slightly smaller.

"Ahay is currently at .6 pounds, Draka with .3!" Jeff exclaimed. Karen tore off a chunk of meat as she ran over to the scale, while Paul tore off one from Ahay's slab. They both dropped them onto the scale and ran back.

"This challenge is TIGHT!". Probst exclaimed. "Paul's piece has pushed Ahay up to 1.0 pounds, while Karen has pushed Drakaka in the lead with 1.3 total!" Louis was determined not to let Drakaka's victory be long-lived, as he tore off a large chunk of meat, dropping it onto the scale. "Louis' piece has pushed Drakaka up to 1.7!". Jess then tore off a piece and dropped it in. "Ahay now has 1.9, this challenge is DEAD EVEN!". Lex sunk her teeth into the meat and tore off a massive chunk, slowly dropping it into the bucket. "Ahay drops their slab in!". Emma then ran out to tear off a slab of her own, dropping it in the scale. "Drakaka is at 2.5! Will Ahay be able to catch up?!", Jeff called out. With only 20 seconds remaining, Kristie quickly tore off a slab of meat, then darted over to the scale and dropped it in. "5, 4, 3, 2, 1. Alright, time's up.", said Jeff. "Let's see how Ahay did compared to Drakaka." Jeff then walked over to the scale as both Kristie and Louis looked nervously. "Alright, so Drakaka has 2.5", said Jeff "But Ahay has 2.6. By a margin of .1 pounds, AHAY WINS IMMUNITY AND REWARD!" Paul, Lex, Chong, Kristie and Louis ran excitedly over to the idol, cheering wildly. "Woohoo!", Lex shouted as she played air guitar. "Ahay, you are safe from tribal tonight and you're not going anywhere. Head out to a car that will pick you guys up and take you to your movie date. Drakaka, I have nothing for you. Head back to camp and figure out who you'll be voting out tonight." As Ahay headed away to their movie excitedly, Drakaka was left dejected as they headed away to camp.

(CONF) "Adam told me that he'd explain why Christine was voted out when we got back to camp", said Karen. "I wonder if there was an idol play or someone in the alliance turned on her, because I didn't expect this!"

As Ahay's car parked in front of the movie theater, Paul, Lex, Chong, Louis and Kristie ran out excitedly. "This is gonna be great!", Lex exclaimed.

(CONF) "This has been an epic day!", said Lex. "First we win that challenge by a hair and now we're going to see a movie about Madagascar in Madagascar! And CANDY! I'm gonna eat until I puke!"

The Ahays quickly plopped into the theater, than reclined as they were given popcorn and soda. The first movie in the series, Madagascar, started to play. "This is my favorite part! My FAVORITE part!", exclaimed Lous, watching as Alex called the Penguins psychotic.

(CONF) "I know I've mentioned cartoons a few times since I came out here", said Louis. "Having a son, he would expose me to all types of different shows, movies and comics! I used to think that they were just kids stuff, but a lot of it is actually really funny! So I'm happy that Drakaka is gonna go to tribal council and miss the movies and I'm not!"

As the group continued watching, the movie's iconic "I Like to Move It Move It" scene came on. Paul jumped out of his seat, gyrating wildly. "You said that scene was your favorite part, well this is MINE!", he yelled out. He then began imitating King Julien's dance from the scene, imitating his voice and mannerisms. "I LIKE TO MOVE IT MOVE IT! I LIKETO MOVE IT MOVE IT! I LIKE TO MOVE IT MOVE IT! YA LIKE TO?". Paul waited for the other four to respond and finish the line. "MOVE IT!". Lex began strumming along on her air guitar as he danced the remaining runtime of the movie away. "I give you a 10!", she said in an approving tone.

(CONF) "I was a little bit disappointed that I don't get to vote out Louis this round", said Paul. "But on the bright side, Layla's probably going home on Drakaka, Otto has the idol and will use it on us any time we need and besides, watching Louis, a stodgy, 40 something business man, laugh at cartoons like an idiot is hilarious! That said, I do need to get Chong and Lex in on this plan so that there are no surprises when it happens."

After the group finished the marathon. Louis and Kristie headed off to sleep. "Night!", the two of them said. Paul was left with Chong and Lex to discuss the plan. "Guys, we need to talk strategy", Paul explained. "There's been quite a shift in the last few days."

"What's up? Chong asked.

"Well, it's about Louis.". Paul said.

"What about him?", Lex asked.

"Well, you know how he made us vote out Christine because he suspected she wanted out of the alliance?", Paul asked.

"Yeah, I remember that", said Chong. "You said he was really mad and didn't like traitors."

"Right", said Paul. "Going by that, if he was willing to vote out one of his own alliance members over the words of an outsider, then who's to say what he'll do to us if he interprets something we say the wrong way?"

Chong thought for a moment, then nodded. "I see.", he said. "So what do you want to do? Vote him out?"< he whispered.

Paul smirked with sadism dripping off his teeth. "Precisely. I already have Otto and Adam on board along with Kristie, while I know Adam has other allies on Drakaka. As long as Louis doesn't hear a word, he should not make it past day 21, assuming the merge is coming up."

Chong nodded. "Thanks for telling me Paul! I appreciate it! I'll help you out!"

"Yeah, he sounds nuts!", said Lex. "I don't want to put up with someone like that! I got rid of Hannah for similar reasons and he's no exception!"

"Great you guys! Sounds like we have a plan!", Paul exclaimed.

"You bet we do!", said Chong. "Now let's hit the hey, I'm tired!"

(CONF) "Paul told me that apparently Louis has gone a little bit crazy", said Chong. "I always figured he was a little bit uptight, but he seemed like he had everything together. I don't want him to vote me out just for saying something the wrong way or what not, so I'm willing to take him down!"

Back at Drakaka, the mood was a little bit more...unusual. Layla had pretty much resigned herself to her fate and was having a blast with what she presumed was her remaining time, while her tribemates seemed a little more anxious.

"Arooo! Werewolves of London!", Layla chanted.

"Uh,that's nice", said Adam. He clearly was not in the mood for games, as he walked off to Emma, Jess and Karen.

"See you later!", Layla waved to him.

(CONF) "We lost the immunity challenge today, which I was expecting!", said Layla. "I know I'm not gonna be here for much longer, so I'm having MAXIMUM fun for the next few hours!", Layla said as she patted her chest.

"It's time to talk", said Adam to Karen, Jess and Emma. "First off, we know that Layla's going home, we don't even need to discuss it, even she's okay with it. Second, I need to talk to you guys about when Jeff announced Christine was out at the challenge today", Adam explained.

"Yeah, I'll admit I was a little surprised.", said Karen. "You're really close with Paul, right? Did he say anything about this?"

"That's a good question", Adam responded. "Because if you're not deaf, you would have been after everything Paul told me today!"

(CONF) "When the question came up, I had to start telling Karen every itty bitty detail.", said Adam. "Because with this story, forgetting a single detail would change everything! But taking my time is important, so I'm doing it for this!"

"Oh, what kinda things did he say?"ASKED Karen.

"Well", started Adam. "Apparently Christine was voted out because according to Paul, Christine ended up telling Kristie of all people that she felt uncomfortable over this incident that occured at ahay with Louis and John. I don't know why exactly, but that's not important. So after she tells her exactly how she's feeling, Kristie, who is on the bottom, mind you, goes over to Paul and tells him EVERYTHING! Paul suspects that this means Christine wants out of the alliance, so he tells Louis. Louis blows his top and assumes Christine is plotting against him, so he switches the target to Christine. Because he feels grateful or some crap like that to Kristie, he puts her in the alliance and votes out Christine. Does this make sense?"

Karen nodded slowly, taking everything in. "Woah...that's weird", she said. "So it seems like Kristie's now in our alliance."

"You'd be right", said Adam. "And that's the other thing", he started.

"What other thing?", Karen asked.

"Paul told me that he was kinda unnerved by Louis' paranoia and suspected that if Louis misinterpreted something he did, then he'd see that as fair grounds to take out Paul.", explained Adam. "So what Paul suggested is is that, me, him, Otto, Kristie and you guys help us overthrow Louis. Are you in? He made some pretty good arguments, I have to admit."

Karen paused. "Well, it sounds like there are enough people to pull it out and Louis DOES sound a little unhinged, so what the hell? I'm in!"

"Perfect!", Adam exclaimed. "Make sure you tell Jess and Emma!"

"I will!", Karen told him.

(CONF) "So apparently Louis went insane because he suspected Christine was plotting against him", said Karen. "Adam told me that Paul thinks we should take him out, because he's scared that anything we say will cause Louis to think we're part of some secret plot! To me, this is a good idea two fold! One, we get rid of Louis, who is annoying and two, we get rid of a major threat to win the game. If Louis wants to think I'm lotting against him, then game on!"

Karen found Jess washing out her shirt, tehn tapped her on the shoulder. "Jess, I need to talk to you", Karen said. "Adam told me some important things."

"Like what?", Jess asked. "Is it about the Christine thing?"

Karen nodded. "Yeah, it's about that. Louis apparently went nuts when he thought Christine was plotting against him, all because Christine told Kristie she felt uncomfortable over an argument had. He then had his alliance turn on her. and vote her out, replacing her with Kristie, since he thinks she did him a favor by revealing the information about this. Paul's worried that Louis could turn on any of us with the attitude he showed at the vote, so he's planning a blindside of Louis with Adam and Otto. He asked me to join up and i said yes. What about you?"

Jess listened, taking everything in. "Wow! Is he insane?!" Jess remarked. "God, I'm shocked he's not talking to a volleyball at this point! If he's going to act like that, I do NOT want him here much longer!"

(CONF) "So Karen explained why Christine was voted out and I was shocked!", Jess exclaimed. "Louis got upset over someone simply saying they were uncomfortable withan argument he had and he votes them out for it?! I can see why Paul is plotting against him. I'm not going to let Louis vote me out either, all because I said I don't like something he did. The next chance we get, I will more than GLADLY put an end to Louis' game!"

Drakaka then headed off to tribal council, grabbing their torches. Layla was wearing her shirt as a head-band fully embracing her new persona. Everyone then sat down as Jeff greeted them. "Welcome back guys.", Jeff started. "Layla, I want to know what's up with the shit on your head! Can you fill me in?"

Layla chuckled. "Well Jeff, after Chris got voted out, I had an epiphany! And the epiphany told me that i have to take things easier and be in touch with my inner animal!" Layla said. Jeff seemed visibly confused. "What exactly is your inner animal?"

Layla then explained. "Well, Chris showed me this cliff before he got voted out and I figured it was about being in touch with your more wild, free side! I know I'm going to get voted out, so I'm just taking everything in and enjoying my surroundings!"

"Adam, does the tribe know Layla's been doing this?" Jeff asked.

"You bet we do!", Adam explained. "In fact, Layla showed us what being in touch with one's inner animal meant yesterday!".

"Can you show me? I'm curious.", Jeff said, visibly amused.

"Come on guys, you know what to do!". Adam said. Otto, Jess, Karen, Emma and Layla stood up with him, stretching to the side, the moving upwards as they all yelled out. "Arooooooooo!", they exclaimed, then sitting down.

"So Jess, does this mean the tribe already knows who is going home tonight?", Jef asked.

"Definitely!", said Jess. "Layla knows and she's totally embracing it!"

"So if the target is known tonight, what are some concerns the tribe has tonight?", Jeff asked.

"Well, we're thinking about the merge for sure", said Otto. "I feel like we're not going to be together for much longer as two tribes, so we're thinking about that."

"Emma, would you say the merge has been on your mind?", Jeff asked.

"For sure", said Emma. "As Otto said, we're probably not going to be on Drakaka for much longer, so it's time to start looking ahead."

"Adam, what are some voting factors you'll be considering when the merge does arrive?", Jeff asked.

"Definitely stability", said Adam. "You want to know if you're allies are with you or not and if they're not with you, you take them out."

"Karen, do you have an idea of who you think is stable and isn't?", Jeff asked.

"Absolutely", said Karen. "I've been told certain things and I also have been using my intuition. I know there are unreliable allies out here and we're gonna get rid of them."

"Well for tonight, you still have to vote as a tribe. It's time to vote, Jess, you're up.", said Jeff. Jess proceeded to walk up to the voting booth and wrote down Layla's name. "You're the first person I know to embrace getting voted off on this show! I have to give props to you for that!" Layla then walked up and wrote Karen's name with a smiley face."I really like you Karen!", Layla said. "If it was up to me, I wouldn't have to vote out anyone tonight! Don't forget your inner animal!" Adam, Otto, Emma and Karen then voted. Once Karen voted and sat down, Jeff turned to them. "I'll go tally the votes", he said as he walked over to the urn. "If anybody has the hidden immunity idol and you want to play it, now would be the time to do so." Nobody stood up.

"Once the votes are read the decision is final. Person voted out will be asked to leave the tribal council area immediately. I'll read the votes." Jeff then took off the lid of the urn as he began reading.

"First vote...Layla."

"Second vote...Karen, that's one Layla one Karen."

"Third vote....Layla, that's two for Layla."

"Fourth vote...Layla, that's three Layla, one Karen, one left."

"Eighth person voted out of Survivor: Madagascar....Layla, you need to bring me your torch. ", said Jeff. Layla smiled as she hugged everyone goodbye, then placed her torch down in front of Jeff. "Layla, the tribe has spoken." Jeff snuffed her torch. "It's time for you to go!" Layla then turned to her tribemates and waved goodbye. "I had a heck of a time out here!", she said. "ARROOOOOOO!", she shouted as she ran off into the distance. Adam, Otto, Emma, Jess and Karen were left laughing. "Well, that was one of the most interesting tribal councils this show has ever had!", said Jeff. "I do wonder who these untrustworthy people are, which I suppose I will find out soon. Grab your torches, head back to camp, goodnight." Drakaka then left tribal council, their torches alit as the moon shone in the sky.

Layla's Final Words: "Man, that was quite a time! Chris helped me learn not to take the game so seriously and I'm happy I learned to embrace the inner animal! I didn't make it far, but I don't care, because now I see things totally differently! I can't wait to hang out with you in person Chris! "Aroo!"

Episode 8: "An Empire Will Rise and I Will Have No Brutus!"
''Last time on Survivor...Layla felt distraught after Chris was voted out and isolated herself from the tribe for a while. At Ahay, Louis' gloating over voting out Christine disturbed Paul and Kristie, who worried about the possibility of Louis turning on them. They discussed their fears to Adam and Otto, ultimately deciding to blindside Louis when they got the next chance. Louis discussed his plans for the merge, not knowing Paul's own intentions. At Ahay, Layla went wild, after accepting the fact that she would likely be voted out next. The tribe embraced her attitude, learning some new moves about "going animal". At the immunity challenge, Ahay narrowly pulled off a victory, earning them immunity and a night at the movies. Paul told Chong and Lex of the plan and they agreed. Over at Drakaka, with the question of who to vote out obvious, Adam discussed Christine's blindside, as well as the plan to blindside Louis himself with Karen and Jess. The tribe voted out an ecstatic Layla, who bared no ill will toward her former tribemates. 10 are left, who will be voted out tonight?''

After tribal council, Adam was drained. Layla's unusual elimination was a sight to behold and he was still thinking about the impending plan about Louis.

"I'm drained", Adam said as he walked off to the ocean.

(CONF) "Tribal Council was....interesting to say the least", said Adam. "Layla accepted her elimination lying down without even challenging it! To be honest, I wish things coming up could be this simple."

Karen sat next to Jess as she recalled tribal council. "That was really weird", said Karen.

"Yeah, tell me about it.", said Jess.

(CONF) "No thought whatsoever went into the vote tonight", said Jess. "Layla embraced it while dancing her way out of tribal, while we're left to figure out the whole Louis situation next."

Otto paused deep in thought as he leaned against the tree. "I wonder how Paul is doing.", Otto said.

(CONF) "I definitely wasn't very worried this voting round.", said Otto. "Layla didn't challenge us voting her out, while Paul and apparently Kristie were safe on Drakaka. I do hope the merge is soon, because based on what Paul told me about Louis going nuts, he doesn't seem safe to be around."

"Please be a merge tomorrow when I wake up!", Otto said as he plopped into the shelter, soon snoring.

As the sun rose the next morning, Paul, Chong, Lex, Louis and Kristie returned to camp, after their movie reward was over. Louis seemed the most disappointed over returning. "Goodbye to sleeping in an actual bed for another 20 days!", he lamented.

(CONF) "I'm not going to like sleeping on the beach again", said Louis. "That said, if the merge is indeed next, then my reign of terror will begin. Unlike last time when Christine screwed everything up, anyone who opposes me is going to be dealt with immediately, no slipping into an alliance with me! An empire will rise and I will have no brutus!"

Louis then approached Paul, who was lounging on the beach. "Assuming the merge is next, who do you want to be the target out of the Ahays? Excluding Chong, Lex and Kristie for now, that is."

Paul lifted his head up to meet Louis' gaze. "Whatever you say", he replied nonchatantly.

"That's a reasonable answer!", said Louis.

(CONF) "I have this weird, antsy feeling", said Paul. "I know what's probably going to happen, but I just feel kinda nervous about it. But since it seems almost inevitable at this point, I'll try to make it as fun as possible!"

Kristie found a note in a tree near them, then alerted them loudly. "Treeee maaaail", she yelled.

"I wonder what it could be", said Lex.

Kristie put on her glasses and started reading the note note loud.

"''Congratulations Final 10, you did it, now you're here! From this point on, the tribes have merged, so go and have some beer!" ''Everyone cheered loudly at the message, as Kristie passed out five orange merge buffs to everyone including herself. "Merge for life!", Paul shouted.

(CONF) "Definitely happy that the merge is here!", said Kristie. "Part of me is nervous to pull off this hit on Louis, but the other part of me is thrilled over the prospect of being able to sleep at night without him watching my every move!"

Louis, Paul, Chong, Lex and Kristie headed down the beach, excited at the new phase in the game they entered.

Over at Drakaka, Otto received the same note, reading it to Adam, Jess, Karen and Emma.

""''Congratulations Final 10, you did it, now you're here! From this point on, the tribes have merged, so go and have some beer!", ''he said. Adam cheered wildly, while Jess, Karen and Emma smiled at the news. "Yeah, buddy!", exclaimed Adam. Otto passed around the orange merge buffs as they all started to walk down the beach.

(CONF) "I'm definitely happy to have finally merged!". said Otto. "I'm going to be back with Paul and then we get to pull off our little plan! I don't think it's legal for anything, and I mean ANYTHING to go wrong with this plan!"

Emma also seemed quite happy as she slid her orange buff onto her wrist, her green one being thrown off. "This is going to be nice!", she exclaimed.

(CONF) "It was crucial that there was a merge now.", said Emma. "Not only did it seem likely as there are only ten of us left, but I'm finally going to be with Louis again and I've een missing him. Not as a person of course, but as partners in the game we're unbeatable together!"

Louis, Paul, Chong, Lex, Kristie, Adam, Otto, Emma, Jess and Karen met at the middle of the beach, gazing at their blank orange flag. There was a feast meant for two Kings at least, with copious amounts of the aforementioned beer, vodka, cigars, bread, salami, peppers, fruit and cookies. Everyone cheered happily as they proceeded to dig in.

(CONF) "Wow, what a feast!", exclaimed Lex. "When I saw that there was not only beer, but vodka too, I was SOOOO happy! By the end of this, I will be shocked if I can still stand!"

Lex began downing several shots of vodka with intense ferocity. "I think this would be a PERFECT time for an air guitar solo!", Paul egged on.

Lex nodded in agreement. "PERFECT IDEA!", Lex slurred as she giggled, strumming along as her hands moved along wildly. She then bowed and plopped onto the sand. "Thwank you thwank you", she slurred once more. "Hey, what do you think we should name the merged tribe?", Otto asked.

"As long as it's not Drakahay or Ahkaka, I'm fine with it!", said Jess.

"In that case...how about...PICOGOGETA!", Paul suggested.

"Picogogeta, what does that even mean?", asked Louis.

"Oh", Paul said, putting on his best "I'm-completely-bullshitting-you-and-yet-you're-buying-it" face. "It means 'Peace' in Malagasy and since we all seem to be at peace right now, I think it'd only make sense!"

Louis paused for a moment, thinking. "Hmmm..okay!" Everyone else raised their beer, except for Jess as they toasted. "PICOGOGETA FOR LIFE!". Paul could not stop mentally laughing, as he turned to Otto, whispering.

"You know what that name actually means?", he asked in a low, whispering voice.

"I think I have an idea!", Otto smirked. "Does it have something to do with Dragon Ball?"

Paul nodded. "It's a portmanteau of Piccolo, Goku and Vegeta. Of course, nobody else here watches the anime or has read the manga, so they bought that 'Peace' shit!"

"Brilliant!", Otto whispered to him.

(CONF) "I really don't get how these supposed superfans don't get I'm bullshitting them!", exclaimed Paul. "If they've seen Micro, Redemption Island and Caramoan, then they'd know that Erik, Boston Rob and Malcolm said something similar to what I did. To be a little bit fair to them, I can see why no one would want to watch Redemption Island, though. Maybe in ten years if this occurs on a better season, THEN I can deride them for it!"

Paul then lost his comical demeanor. "In all seriousness, we do need to talk strategy", said Paul.

Otto nodded. "Did Louis say anything else of note when you guys were on Ahay?", Otto asked.

"A lot, actually", explained Paul. "For one, he thinks that this merge is going to pretty much be me, you and him, along with Emma and Kristie enacting Order 66 on the Ahays."

"That's Star Wars, right?". Otto asked confused. "The plan Palpatine had to kill off the Jedi in the prequel?"

Paul nodded. "Well, never mind that. The point is that if Louis has his way, he's going to try to exterminate any Ahay he sees and that includes Adam. I know that Chong and Lex never would stand for it, so we're good in that respect. However, he does have that fake idol, which Emma knows about. I feel like she'll try to insist on turning on one of the Ahays she was with when you were with her on Drakaka."

Otto seemed a little bit nervous at this news.

(CONF) "Paul told me that apparently Louis has this intention to get rid of all and any Ahays.", said Otto. "That doesn't make too much sense to me, particularly since there are only four Drakakas in the merge while there are six Ahays."

Adam saw Otto and Paul talking, so he decided to run over to them. "Wait for me guys!"

(CONF) "Otto and Paul were talking in the bushes and I wanted to join in", explained Adam. "I have some fears about Louis possibly having an idol, so I wanted to talk to them to see if they knew about about this. Him having an idol would destroy EVERYTHING!"

"What's up Adam?", asked Paul. "We're discussing strategy."

"Yeah, about that", said Adam. "You know how we want to get rid of Louis.....what if he has an idol?"

Otto realized that neither him nor Paul had ever told Adam about the fake they made.

"That's not an issue!", exclaimed Otto. "Me and Paul will explain why, but make sure you call an ambulance for us in case we develop hernias from laughing so hard from the story!"

"Will do", said Adam.

"Okay, so remember the day we first met at the cliff?" asked Paul.

"That was after Glenn was voted out and I was sad because I had no one to hang out with around my age. Of course I remember that!", Adam exclaimed.

"Well,", started Otto. "After you left, I found the idol, as you know.", Otto said. "I can understand your fears since it's likely there was or still is another idol hidden on this island, but if there is, it's not like Louis knows or cares. Do you know why?"

"Why?", Adam asked.

Paul couldn't stop smirking. "We created a fake! He believes that it's real and he's convinced that no one can touch him now!", Paul said.

Adam was absolutely speechless and had to take a second to process what he just heard. "So, he has a phony idol? And it doesn't work, yet he thinks it's REAL?!", he exclaimed in shock.

Otto and Paul nodded. "Right, so getting him out shouldn't be a challenge. Unless he finds an actual idol, but knowing Louis, what are the chances of THAT?!", Otto exclaimed.

Adam laughed. "He doesn't sound very smart from what I've been told!"

(CONF) "All the time, Louis has been strung along, thinking he has a real idol, when apparently he has this fake!", shouted Adam. "Unless he finds a real one, which Otto said he doubts will happen, then we should be on easy street for a while!"

Back at the feast, Louis waited for everyone else to leave but Emma. Noticing a small slip of paper hidden in the bread basket, he curiously pulled it out. "I wonder what this is", he said to Emma. Louis began reading the note out loud to her.

"''This note you found hides some secrets, so please do not be idle. Because concealed in your merge camp, there is a hidden idol!." ''Louis was absolutely speechless and overyjoyed, showing the note to Emma. "You know what this means?!", he exclaimed happily.

"You bet!", Emma replied. "We better tell Paul and and Otto!"

(CONF) "After everyone else left the feast, I wanted to wait around because there usually is some type of idol clue.", explained Louis. "Sure enough, I was right! I just read it to Emma and now I just need to tell Paul and Otto. I already have one idol that the two gave me a while back, but with two?! I should just get the check written on my name right now!"

Louis and Emma spotted Otto and Paul, then began walking toward the bushes where they were standing.

"Adam, Louis is coming! You need to get out of here for now!", said Paul.

Adam nodded, then ran off.

"Oh, hey Louis. What's up?", said Paul.

"A better question would be what's down, because NOTHING is! You'll never believe what I found at the feast just before! Guess! Guess!", Louis exclaimed.

"What?", Paul asked.

"A CLUE TO ANOTHER HIDDEN IMMUNITY IDOL! DO YOU KNOW HOW HUGE THIS IS?!", Louis shouted excitedly.

The blood in Paul's face immediately started to drain out. "...Really huge?", Paul whimpered.

"HELL YEAH IT IS!", Louis shouted. "I'm gonna go look for it now! Killing off those Ahays will be easier than I thought!"

Like Adam before, it was now Paul's turn to be speechless.

(CONF) "......FUCK! FUCK! FUCKITY FUCK FUCK!", Paul exclaimed. "God, why does the obligatory plot twist have to come now?! I'm going to have to tell Otto, tell Adam, have them tell Karen and Jess and have THEM tell Chong and Lex. We can't leave Louis' sight. We can't joke, we can't even discuss what FUCKING edgic I'm going to have due to this swearing tirade right now! If it's the last thing I do, I'm NOT LETTING Louis Barnes get that idol!"

Paul darted madly over to Adam. "Adam, where are Jess and Karen?! We need to talk now, NO exceptions! Okay?!", he demanded impatiently.

Adam seemed taken aback by his sudden change in demeanor, but complied. "Alright, I'll be right back with them!", he replied, running off to get them.

(CONF) "I've never seen Paul like that before!", said Adam. "When Paul isn't making a reference to some obscure show from the 80s or referencing edgic or whatever that cap is, you know there's a problem! I wonder if it has anything to do with Louis, because if so, then we've just become the new residents of shit creek, population soon to be us!"

Karen and Jess followed Adam as he returned to Paul.

"What's going on?", Jess asked.

"Yeah, Adam said you sounded really, really impatient and demanding.", Karen said.

"That's because I am right now!", Paul shouted. "Louis, who thinks I'm still his best buddy in the whole world, CONVENIENTLY found an idol clue at the feast! He told me he wants to look for it! Do you know what this'll mean for us?"

"Oh, shit.", said Karen. "That is SERIOUS!".

(CONF) "Paul was really, really antsy just now!", explained Karen. "I wondered what was going on and when he told me that Louis found an idol clue, I realized just how dire this is. If Louis gets a FINGERPRINT on the idol, we're headed for some serious shit!"

"What are we going to do?" Karen asked.

"Simple", Paul explained. "It seems like Emma is still working with Louis, so she's still an enemy. But everyone else, we're going to have to be hot on Louis' tail for the next few hours and find that idol before he does!"

"That sounds like it'll be risky, but we don't have any other option really, so I'm in!", exclaimed Jess.

(CONF) "Nothing's ever simple on Survivor, especially ever since Guatemala when the idol was introduced!", explained Jess. "And it definitely wasn't simply today when Paul told me Louis found an idol clue. Apparently we're going to have to have a stakeout until someone but Louis finds an idol. I'm not wild about doing this, but I'm NOT facing what's basically a legendary Pokemon at tribal council! And if he becomes a legendary, he better defect like a pansy like Mewtwo did!"

Louis walked up the path to the cliff, whistling the song "Tequilla". Unbeknowst to him, Paul had creeped behind him, slowly moving to avoid being detected. As Louis turned his head to wonder what the noise was, Paul jumped into a nearby bush to hide from Louis. seeing nothing, Louis shrugged as he continued looking for the idol.

(CONF) "I heard this weird rustling noise while I was looking for the idol", said Louis. "Maybe one of those Ahays are trying to find it before I do, but I'm pretty sure that's not the case! Besides, who the hell would be dumb enough to watch someone while they try to find the idol? If ANY of them are dumb enough to watch me, an idol WILL be played tonight, no doubt about that!"

While Paul was forced to take refuge in the bush, Karen and Jess approached Kristie, Chong, Lex and Otto about the plan.

"Guys, we're gonna need to talk", said Karen. "There was a clue to a new idol at the merge feast and Louis apparently got it. We're going to need to spy on him until one of us finds it, or else there could be trouble.

All four of them nodded, then went off to look. Otto with Kristie and Chong with Lex.

"This is totally nuts!", said Chong.

(CONF) "It seems like Louis found a clue to a new hidden immunity idol before", said Chong. "And apparently we're going to need to follow him until he finds it. The whole thing reminds me of an FBI sting, which to me is ironic since I'm a hippie! I'm supposed to be their enemy! I better not be speaking like Nixon next and calling my friends "pinkos"!

While Otto and Kristie walked off to the South, Chong and Lex headed North, preparing to find the idol and disarm Louis. "This is crazy!", Lex shouted. "This whole concept, it sounds like a music video!"

"Kinda! Getting that idol from him will be fun!"", said Chong in return.

(CONF) "Soo, it seems like we have to get the idol before Louis does", said Lex. "This is TOTALLY crazy and if you ask me, I also think it's TOTALLY awesome! There's no way he's going to get it with all of us watching his ass!"

As Chong and Lex headed North, Emma, who had been waiting in the shelter for Louis to return, overheard them. Gasping, she ran to Louis.

(CONF) "I saw Chong and Lex walking down the beach and then Chong said that they were going to get the idol from Louis!", Emma explained. "Given that those were the Ahay members left when we merged, I would assume they voted with Louis! Are they turning on him?! If so, I have to tell Louis IMMEDIATELY!"

Darting down the beach, Emma ran up the hill. Louis was still looking for the idol and gasped when she charged at him.

"Emma! What's going on?!",Louis exclaimed.

Emma was practically going to collapse. "Lex and Chong! They're coming up the hill and I heard they're trying to stop you from getting the idol!", Emma said while panting.

Louis' eyes grew daggers as he clenched his teeth. "WHAT?!", he screamed. "SON OF A BITCH!", he exclaimed. "Don't worry Emma, we're going to find that idol. And when we do, Chong is getting his ass voted off!"

(CONF) "I should have known that Chong would do something like this!", exclaimed Louis. "He's always hanging around Lex and she probably told him some bullshit about being 'loyal' or 'honest' or 'sticking to his guns'. It doesn't matter though, because not only will I have the idol Paul and Otto found for me, but I'm going to have TWO idols in my pocket! And people might think, 'Didn't James go home with two idols in his pocket?' He did, but not me! I am GOING to use an idol tonight if I don't win immunity! I'll show him who's boss!"

Louis took the idol out of his pocket and showed it to Emma. "The only issue is that I can't figure out this damn clue! Do you any have any idea?", Louis asked Emma.

Emma took the clue and slowly read it. "While it doesn't say specifically where the idol is, it DOES mention the idol is hidden at camp! Maybe it's under the shelter!".

Louis nodded. "Good thinking! Let's get there before that weasel Chong does!"

Emma replied. "Alright!" as the two scurried off.

(CONF) "Now that I was able to help Louis decode the clue, we should be able to get this idol easily!", exclaimed Emma. "I'm really disappointed that Chong and Lex tried to turn on us by thwarting this, but it won't matter, because with this idol, even if the votes are tied 5-5, Louis will play his idol and Chong's GOING to go home! I'm normally not the type to voice unjustified confidence, but NOTHING will stand in our way tonight!"

As the two ran to the shelter, Paul who was still in the bush, peeked out, watching the two run off. Gasping as he saw Emma following her, he overheard them mention the shelter. "Oh shit!", he yelled. Paul leapt out of the bush and ran the alternative route to the shelter, hoping he could stop them. Sweat was pouring down his face as blood coursed through his body madly. Continuing to see the orange buffs adorned on Louis and Emma, his nerves skyrocketed. Jumping as far as he could, he tried to gain a lead on them, hustling like a cheetah. But just as he was about to gain a lead, a sigh of horror blinded him. Louis slowly grabbed a package out from underneath the shelter, smiling widely. Time slowly regained its normal course of action, as Paul mentally shouted. "NOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO!!!!!!!!!", still in slow-motion. Plopping to the ground in defeat, he was too despondent to get up.

"YES!", Louis yelled in triumph. "I KNEW YOU, I MEAN WE COULD DO IT! We need to tell Paul!" he said as they ran off to find him.

(CONF) "Oh my god!", Louis exclaimed. "This can't be real! It isn't, it shouldn't be! I said at the beginning I was going to bring Richard and Russell to their knees and they should as least be on their hips now! This could be a day to remember! A day where I become the next Russell!"

Paul was still on the ground when Louis and Emma found him. Despite clearly hearing the two, he still refused to get up.

"Paul, stop playing in the mud! We need to talk!", Louis exclaimed.

Paul felt like he was forced to oblige as he lifted his head up to hear the inevitable for the second and still unfortunate time. "What is it?", Paul said dejectedly.

"I found another idol!", Louis said. "Getting that first one was great, but I found this one myself! Well, I technically had some help from Emma, but you get the idea anyway! Do you know what this means?" Louis asked him.

"You'll never get voted out?", Paul quipped.

"Precisely!", said Louis! "I figured things we're going to be easy before, but now it's gong to be IMPOSSIBLE for me to ever leave this beach!"

"That's really nice Louis, but I actually have to pee, so can I go off into the woods for a moment?", asked Paul.

"Alright", said Louis. Paul then darted off into the woods. When he was sure that Louis could not hear him, he screamed loudly, unable to contain his frustration.

"FUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUCK!", Paul screamed.

(CONF) "This day has gone from bad to worse!", exclaimed Paul. "Not only does Louis get an idol clue, now he has the ACTUAL idol! It's like he's Emperor Pilaf, Emma is Mai and I'm Yamcha, while Otto is Oolong and Adam is Goku! And at this point, Emperor Pilaf has the Dragon Ball and we're imprisoned! Last time I checked, Adam can't turn into an Oozaru, so we're going to need a miracle to thwart Pilaf and Mai!"

Paul walked off to tell Adam the news, sighing in defeat once more. Adam was perched up in a tree, still believing Louis hadn't found the idol.

"Adam, get down from the tree! We need to talk!", Paul said.

"But won't Louis see us?" Adam asked.

"This is about Louis! Seriously, get down!", Paul demanded. Adam complied, hopping down from the tree.

"Okay, what about him do you want to talk about?" Adam asked again.

"It's about the idol", Paul said. "Him and Emma found it."

"Oh shit!", Adam exclaimed. "What a rat Emma is!"

"I know", Paul said. "At this point, I'm just hoping Louis doesn't win immunity."

"Me too", said Adam. "I'm going to give it my all!"

"That's the spirit!", Paul said. "Let's hope that movie logic is on our side!"

"Alright!..Whatever that is!", Adam as the two walked off.

(CONF) "Apparently Louis got his hands on the idol and Emma was with him!", said Adam. "I'm really scared right now, because this could ruin everything! I have to win the immunity challenge tomorrow, or I see doom coming!"

The next day, the ten remaining contestants headed to the challenge site, carrying the soon to be discontinued tribal immunity idol. Jeff greeted them as they arrived, sporting their new orange merge buffs.

"Welcome to today's challenge!", Jeff exclaimed. "Before I begin explaining everything, Paul, how does it feel being one tribe now?"

"Well, it's definitely crazy!", said Paul. "You never know what to expect and at this point, anything can happen!"

"Very true! I also want to know what you named the merged tribe", said Jeff.

"We named it Picogogeta", said Otto. "It means 'Peace' in Malagasy!"

"Interesting!", Jeff said. "As you may know, tribal immunity is no more", Jeff said as he took the tribal immunity idol and placed it on the ground. "Instead, you're looking for individual immunity!". Jeff then revealed the individual immunity necklace. "Ready to get to today's challenge?" Everyone nodded. "For today's challenge, you will be standing on a perch high up in the water! The perch is small, so it'll be difficult to balance. To make things harder, every so often I will be tempting you with different treats. Ultimately, the last person to remain on their perch, wins immunity and is guaranteed a 1 in 9 spot of winning the one million! Ready to draw for spots? Everyone nodded as they got on a perch. For individual immunity. Survivors ready? GO!"

Initially, the challenge didn't feel very hard. Everyone stoof firmly in place and as 20 minutes elapsed, everyone remained standing. Suddenly, Karen started to lose her balance and tumbled into the ocean, eliminated from the challenge. "Karen's in the water! Karen is out of the challenge!", Jeff exclaimed. The other 9 continued to keep their balance barely. At that moment, Jeff brought out the first item of temptation. "Here's the first item you can jump off for! Peanut butter and chocolate!" Lex's mouth started drooling, unable to resist. "I'll do it Jeff!". Lex jumped off the platform, swimming over to where her snack was. "Lex trades immunity for peanut-butter and chocolate!" She didn't seem to regret her decision, munching hppily on it.

As the time elapsed progressed to an hour, several people were losing their grips. Paul wobbled a little bit, while Otto lost his footing entirely, plopping into the water below.

"Otto is out of the challenge, seven remain!", said Probst. Jess then fell off shortly. "Jess falls off, six remain!" Paul's nerves were growing as time passed. Jeff then came out with the second temptation item. "This time, I'm offering whoever jumps off two slices of pizza and lemonade.", said Jeff. Figuring she likely wouldn't win the challenge, Kristie leapt off the pole, swimming over to Jeff's boat. As she swam there, Chong then fell off, swimming over. "Kristie and Chong are out of the challenge, four remain." Despite Paul's best efforts, he soon fell off his pole, swimming over to the boat in defeat. "Come on Adam!", he called out to his friend. "Paul is out, only Louis, Emma and Adam remain!" Emma was unable to remain on her pole as she fell off. "Emma is out and it's between Louis and Adam." The two would not move positions, standing still like statues. The other eight watched from inside the boat. Emma was chanting for Louis, while Paul silently cheered on Adam.

Eventually, it had been 3 hours since the challenge had started. Adam's feet were getting cramped, but he would not let go of his grip. Louis on the other hand was having more trouble staying on his perch. Though Emma continued to chant for him, it was to no avail as Louis plopped off his pole in defeat, leaving Adam victorious. "ADAM WINS THE IMMUNITY!", Jeff exclaimed. Adam jumped off his pole in triumph. "Yeah, buddy!", he exclaimed as he swam over to Jeff. Paul and Otto fist-bumped him as he waited for Jeff to put the necklace around his neck. "Adam, you are safe from elimination tonightand will not be going home! The rest of you have a chance of being the first person voted out of the merged tribe! Grab your stuff and head back to camp!"

(CONF) "While I'm a bit let down that Adam won immunity, Louis still has the idol, so I don't see any problems tonight!", said Emma. "And not only that, but he has TWO idols! And they say this is cursed!"

As the ten returned to their new camp, Louis sat down in the shelter and sighed in exhaustion. "That was a hell of a challenge!"

(CONF) "I narrowly lost the immunity challenge to Adam today", said Louis. "I would be bummed about that, but I have the idol, so there's literally nothing for me to fear! Someone would have to pry it out of my hands for me not to play it!"

Louis then approached Paul. "Time for more business talk. We need to vote out Chong. Emma told me that him and Lex were snooping around while I was trying to look for the idol, so I'm convinced he's turning on us!"

Paul nodded. "I see, I see. Makes sense.", he replied.

(CONF) "Apparently when Chong and Lex were following Louis before on our failed idol heist, Emma caught them in the act and now Louis wants to turn on Chong for allegedly turning on him!", said Paul "I better warn him!"

Paul went looking for Chong, only to find him walking along with Lex. "Chong, we have to talk."

"What's up?", he asked.

"Well first off, Louis found the idol, so I need to clear that mess up! Second, Emma apparently saw you when you were spying on Louis and now he thinks you're turning on him, so he wants you out!" said Paul.

"Oh my god!", said Chong. "That's so terrible and a ridiculous thing for him to think!"

"Yeah, I know!", said Paul.

(CONF) "Emma must have seen me before when I was playing secret agent against Louis", said Chong "And now he thinks I'm turning on him like he thought Christine was when he took her out! I hope Paul can figure this out!"

"I'm going to go convince Louis not to use the idol!", said Paul. "Wish me luck!"

"Alright!", said Chong.

Paul ran back as Louis saw him approaching. "Oh, hello again Paul!", Louis exclaimed. "I need to talk to you about somethign else."

"What is it?" Paul asked.

"Now, I have two idols now, right? The one you and Otto found me and the one I got yesterday.", said Louis.

"Right", replied Paul. "What about them?"

"Well", said Louis. "I'm not sure which idol to bring to tribal council tonight. I'm thinking the merge one because I found it and I want it to represent my hard work. What do you think?"

"I actually think you should take the one me and Otto found for you and leave the merge one here.", Paul said with a wry grin "To me, the one we found for you represents the unity that our alliance represents, its power united. You know what I mean?", he asked, hoping Louis would eat it up.

Louis paused for a moment to think about Paul's point. Scratching his head, he finally made a decision. "You know what?", said Louis. "I agree with you! We've worked so hard together to get to this point and it'll be more powerful using this against Chong, to show him what unity does against traitors! Thanks!" Louis said as he buried the idol he found yesterday underground. "I'll put it back in my pocket after tribal council!"

"Good idea!", Paul said. "I need to wash up before tribal so that when we take out Chong, I don't smell as bad as his hippie self does!".

"I like your way of thinking!", said Louis.

Paul walked off, muttering to himself. "And I like your way of not thinking!" He said deviously.

(CONF) "I actually did it!", exclaimed Paul. "I have disarmed King Louis! Yesterday I thought all hope was lost, but with Adam's immunity win, coupled with the bullshit answer I gave about symbolism was just enough to get the idol away from Louis! Erik, James and JT, you don't need to feel ashamed anymore. Louis may have lost his throne in Madagascar, but he will now becoming King of Dumb Moves! An empire will fall and I am the Brutus!"

Paul returned to Chong, this time much happier. "What happened?", asked Chong.

"Let's just say that tonight is a good night to test out the idol tree hypothesis!", said Paul. "I managed to convince Louis not to use his idol and he hid it in the ground like an idiot!". Paul laughed. "This day can't get any better!"

"That's great!", exclaimed Chong. "I guess Louis' days are done here?"

Paul nodded. "You bet and this will be the start of a new era! One with better taste in clothing, that's for sure!", he said as he pointed to Chong's tank top.

"You said it!", he exclaimed as the two walked off to wash up before tribal.

Louis sat in the shelter, caressing his idol, which unbeknownst to him was a fake. Feeling triumphant, he walked off to get his torch, leaving his recently found idol hidden safely under the ground. After tribal, he was going to recover and the"fun" was going to begin. "Perfect", he smirked.

(CONF) "Tonight is going to be the start of a new era!", exclaimed Louis. "Once Chong goes, my days are only going to begin! He might think that he can thwart my reign, but NO ONE defeats King Louis! People have tried and those people always fail! Amy did, Ernest did, John did and Christine did and I sent them to the Survivor grave! Tonight, Chong better get his headstone ready and set next to theirs, because THIS WILL BE A TRIBAL COUNCIL TO REMEMBER!"

The ten members of the newly merged Picogogeta tribe arrived at tribal council, lighting their torches in the fire and setting them down beside them. Jeff greeted them. "Welcome to your first merge tribal council guys", Jeff said. "Emma, now that you're in the indvidual phase of the game, what do you feel is the biggest concern moving forward?"

"Well Jeff, I really think loyalty is the most important of concerns", said Emma. "I have an alliance right now and certain people have proven in the few days that they might not be as loyal as they once claimed the were." Louis nodded his head in agreement with Emma's statement

"Louis, you seem to agree with what Emma is saying. Do you also feel that certain people aren't being loyal, as Emma implied?", Jeff asked.

"As a matter of fact, yes!", Louis responded. "Someone HASN'T been loyal and that person's name is C-H-O-N-G, CHONG!" Chong turned to face Louis, ready to respond.

"What makes you feel Chong hasn't been loyal, Louis?", Jeff asked.

"Very simple", said Louis. "When I was looking for the merged tribe idol after the feast, Emma told me that he had been spying on me like a secret agent! We voted together on Ahay and he seemed to be in the pact, but everything he did recently only proves it was a lie!"

"Chong, what do you have to say about this accusation, that you weren't being loyal?", Jeff asked.

"It's true", Chong stated. Emma's jaw dropped as Louis eyed him ferociously, ready to retaliate. "When Christine got voted out, I honestly wasn't sure if Louis was so stable! I thought maybe he'd want me out next, or Lex out or anyone else out if they said one thing the wrong way! Can you really trust someone like that?"

"Karen, do you have any thoughts on the matter?", Jeff asked.

"I do", Karen responded. "I think Chong's right, because if it were me that was in that position, I would be a little freaked out too if I aw someone get voted out simply for saying something that isn't blatantly a sign of betrayal."

"Louis, it seems like a few people don't agree with you on what constitutes as betrayal. What do you have to say?", Jeff asked him.

"I think that they haven't been in the position I'm in", said Louis. "If they were dealing with people who said they knew of your intentions, knew of what you were behind, you would probably react the same way I did! If you're not blatantly with me, I'm going to assume you're blatantly against me!"

"Paul, do you think it can be dangerous being as paranoid as Louis is?", Jeff asked.

"It can be", Paul said. "Sometimes you really are right to be paranoid, while other times it could be overthinking. Whether Louis is right or not depends on the instance."

"Lex, do you think tonight will be a surprise?", Jeff asked her.

"I don't know", said Lex. "I think every tribal council has a chance of going nutso,! We're just gonna have to wait and see for this one."

"Otto, when you see the dysfunction around you, does it make you fearful at all?", Jeff asked.

"It can make you nervous for sure, but I try to just wait and see what exactly is dysfunctional before getting scared.", said Otto.

"Kristie, do you think sticking together or acting based on hunches of paranoia is the way to go?", Jeff asked her.

"Depends", said Kristie. "If your paranoia's based on valid facts, then yes. But just because someone did anything that was SLIGHTLY different, then no."

"Louis, how confident do you feel about the vote tonight?" Jeff asked.

"I'd say the most confident I've been this entire game.", Louis said. "After the votes are read, there'll be faces of shock!"

"Well, let's see if that's true. Adam, are you keeping immunity?", Jeff asked.

"Definitely", Adam said.

"Alright, Adam is immune and cannot be voted against. Everyone else is fair game. It's time to vote, Louis, you can go first.", said Jeff.

"Gladly", Louis said as he walked up to the voting booth. He slowly wrote Chong's name, then held his vote up to the camera. "All things must pass", he said as he placed his vote in the urn. Paul then went up to vote and wrote down Louis' name. He began reciting a poem to the camera related to the vote. "There once was a King named Louie, his reign went completely kaplooie! When he lost everything, he could only feel sting, as he laid dead and whispered 'Oh phooey'!" Paul then placed his vote in the urn as Adam, Otto, Chong, Emma, Kristie, Karen and Jess voted. Once Jess voted, and sat down, Jeff went to get the urn.

"I'll go tally the votes", he said as he went to get the urn. Louis watched him, smiling as he discretely held out his unkowingly fake idol.

"If anybody has a hidden immunity idol and you want to play it, now would be the time to do so.", Jeff said. Paul looked at Adam and Otto, smiling wickedly. At that moment, Louis stood up in front of the tribe. "Jeff, I certainly would like to use my idol tonight, Louis said as he walked up to Jeff. "I told you that there will be shocked faces at tonight's tribal council. By the end of it, their jaws will need to be re-attached as they will have dropped so low to the ground, since I'm playing it on myself." Louis handed Jeff the fake idol, sitting down with a smug look on his face toward Chong.

"The rules of Survivor state that in the event that a Hidden Immunity Idol is played, the person with the next highest number of votes will be voted out instead." Louis waited for him to say his favorite part of the phrase, only for his look of utter confidence to violently shift to a look of utter horror, shock and rage.

"This is...NOT a Hidden Immunity Idol!", said Jeff. "all votes for Louis will count!". As Jeff threw the fake into the flames, Emma was utterly horrified. "Oh shit!", she exclaimed. Paul, Otto and Adam smiled brightly at each other, waiting eagerly for Jeff to read the votes.

"First vote...Chong", said Jeff.

"Second vote...Chong, that's two votes Chong". Louis looked hopeful, figuring that the target might have changed. The next votes would squash any remaining hope into bite sized pieces.

"Third vote...Louis", said Jeff.

"Fourth vote...Louis, that's two votes Louis, two votes Chong."

"Fifth vote...Louis, that's three Louis, two Chong."

"Sixth vote...Louis. That's four Louis, two Chong. Louis was utterly furious and shocked.

"Seventh vote...Louis, that's five louis, two Chong. One left", Jeff said.

"Ninth person voted out of Survivor: Madagascar...Louis, you need to bring me your torch." Louis furiously eyed Paul, as all he could muster up to him was "You!". Paul exchanged a laugh with Adam and Otto as the three mockingly chanted "LONG LIVE THE KING!". With no other choice, Louis placed his torch down for Jeff to snuff, his game finally over. "Louis, the tribe has spoken", Jeff said as he snuffed his torch. "Time for you to go." Before Louis did as Jeff told him, he turned to the tribe, uttering woulds they would not forget.

"I'll be back on this island in a year..so you better be ready!" Louis promised as he finally walked off into the night, out of Survivor.

"Well, this tribal council just might have changed it all. At the very least, from this point forward, the nine of you will start to comprise the jury. Grab your torches, head back to camp, good night." Paul raised his torch in the air triumphantly as he joined up with the eight others, walking out of tribal council as the moon was high in the sky.

Louis' Final Words: "I'm too furious to speak right now. For the entire game, Paul and Otto lead me on with an idol that wasn't even real and I was talked out of using the one I actually found! I may be out of the game, but I will play Survivor again, I know that. And besides, I know Paul's journey's not going to be easy, even if he's in power for now. My empire fell and trust me, his is going to as well. "

Episode 9: "I Have to Reravel the Unraveled!"
''Last time on Survivor...the two tribes anxiously awaited the merge, getting their wish when they were told to meet at the middle of the beach for a merge feast. Paul put his plan into motion, telling Adam that him and Otto gave Louis a fake idol, making him vulnerable at he first tribal council. When Louis and Emma found a clue to a new hidden immunity idol however, Paul rounded up everyone else to track down the idol before them. While Chong and Lex went off to search, Emma overheard their intentions and alerted Louis, who, with Emma's help, found the idol before them, much to Paul's horror. Paul told Adam the importance of winning the first individual immunity challenge, which ended up doing, narrowly beating out Louis. Back at camp, Louis told Paul of his intentions to vote for Chong and use his idol on himself. Paul warned Chong of the intended plan, then managed to convince Louis not to bring his idol to tribal council and instead bring the one that Paul and Otto found for him,. Louis agreed, not knowing that the idol he had was a fake. At tribal council, a fight broke out between Louis and Chong over allegations of betrayal. In the end, Louis' idol play was for naught when it was revealed that he played a fake. Louis was then blindsided, with Paul now in power. 9 are left, who will be voted out tonight?''

As Picogogeta returned from its first Tribal Council, Emma was utterly miserable. Louis had been betrayed by what she thought was their alliance and he was utterly humiliated with a fake idol.

"That was a nightmare", she sighed to herself.

(CONF) "That Tribal Council was one of the most shocking moments of my life!", said Emma. "Everything I knew about the alliance was a total lie and if I don't think smart, I think I'm going to be out next. In short, I have to reravel the unraveled!"

Adam, Paul and Otto put their torches down, then fist-bumped once more over their victory.

"I love when we said 'Long live the King'!", exclaimed Otto.

"Yeah, humiliating Louis was dope!". said Adam.

"I'd be lying if I claimed I wasn't still laughing mentally!", Paul exclaimed.

(CONF) "Walking back from Tribal Council and not seeing or hearing Louis in any form was something I didn't expect to happen this soon in the game.", said Paul "There was this episode of Breaking Bad sert after when Walt killed Gus and Mike told him that just because you kill Jesse James, doesn't MAKE you Jesse James! Sorry Mike, but at this point, I've TRANSCENDED Jesse James!"

Lex and Chong walked down the beach, recalling the events of the Tribal Council.

"I bet Louis is gonna regret that for life!", Lex laughed.

"Yeah, I can't believe he thought that was an idol!", said Chong. "Dude was a jerk, though, so he had it coming."

(CONF) "Louis went at me when we were at Tribal Council", said Chong. "Yes, I WAS trying to thwart his idol heist, but that's only because he came at people for no reason before in the first place!"

"You're right.", said Lex. "I know we did vote together for a little bit, but he needed to seriously relax!"

"Hey Lex", said Chong. "Can you play the fallen comrade bugle song on your air guitar? I think we need to at least honor Louis with some fitting music!"

"Not a problem!", Lex said as he strummed along. "Duh duh duuuuh!" She then laughed after smashing the air guitar. "I think that was a valid tribute."

(CONF) "With Louis out of my hair, I think this camp is going to be a little bit more fun!", said Lex. "He's not gonna be here to breathe down my neck when I'm not speaking to him every second and I can just CHILL and JAM out!"

Everyone soon went to sleep for the night. The sun then rose in the sky the next day, the sky as clear as ever. Kristie stretched her arms, walking out of the shelter to get some fresh air.

(CONF) "Nutjobs are only good to keep around for so long", said Kristie. "That's why even though Louis did save me, it's better with him not watching me every second."

Kristie walked by the shelter, noticing Karen and Jess drawing lines in the sand. "What are you two doing?", she asked curiously.

Karen seemed a little bit embarrassed as she sheepishly smiled. "It's something from Borneo", she explained.

"They drew lines in sand on the first season?", Kristie asked confused.

"Well, technically yes", Karen started. "But what happened was that this contestant named Sean wanted to have some fun, so he decided to create a 'bowling alley' so to speak. It didn't work, but I'm bored, so I wanted to recreate it!"

"That sounds interesting, I guess", said Kristie.

"It is!", exclaimed Karen. "I'll demonstrate!", she said as she grabbed a coconut and tried to roll it down the alley, only for it to fly backwards. "Oops".

(CONF) "I really wanted to do something a bit different today!", said Karen. "The sun is out, all is calm and I was bored, so I wanted to have fun! If only a more hardcore fan like Paul or Otto was here right now, then they'd get all of this!"

Emma watched as Karen hurled the coconut into the air, narrowly avoiding hitting her head. "What's all this about?", Emma asked.

"It's a Survivor bowling alley.", said Karen. "Wanna try?" Karen handed Emma a coconut.

"This wasn't really big in Britain, but I suppose", said Emma. Emma then pulled her arm back and hurled the coconut toward a pile of sticks that were meant to act as pins. She hit a stray splinter.

"Not bad!", said Karen.

(CONF) "Karen decided to teach me some rather..unusual games today", said Emma. "I like her zest and energy though and I don't think she's big enough where I should vote for her next round."

Paul and Otto noticed the 'bowling alley' and became excited. "That's like the one they made in Borneo!", Paul exclaimed."I want to get a strike!", yelled Otto. But before they could get to enjoy the makeshift game, Adam had an announcement.

"Treemail!", Adam exclaimed. He then took out the note and read it.

"''Today you will be diving in some mud and grabbing flags. And if you are just fast enough, this will be in the bag!" ''He read. "I wonder what this'll be about."

(CONF) "Winning immunity yesterday was great!", exclaimed Adam. "I know that this challenge is only for reward and it won't make me safe if I win it, but I would LOVE to continue kicking ass in these challenges! I could see myself doing it all the way until the end, really!"

Picogogeta headed off to the challenge. Once they arrived, Jeff greeted them. "Come in guys!" Everyone stepped on the orange mat. "Ready to get to today's reward challenge?" Jeff asked them. Everyone then nodded. "For today's challenge, 3 pairs of 3 tribe members at a time are going to race across a muddy field to collect three flags. Whoever collects their flags first will progress onto the final round. The final 3 contestants remaining will then compete in a final round. The first person to get their flags back in the final round, wins reward. Wanna know what you're playing for?", Jeff asked. Everyone nodded. "The winner gets to spend the afternoon at a Survivor pizza parlor! There will be all the pizza you can eat, soda, snacks, you get the idea! In addition, the winner gets to bring along two others with them. Everyone draw for spots."

The first matchup was Adam, Lex and Chong. "Adam, Lex and Chong going at it first! Survivors ready? Go!", Jeff yelled out. Adam charged through the mud like a bull, quickly running over to his first flag and gabbing it. Chong was slightly behind, while Lex trailed them both. "Adam takes off with a HUGE lead, Chong and Lex both behind!", said Probst. Adam then grabbed his second flag, though the mud was beginning to slow him down somewhat. Chong grabbed his a few seconds after, while Lex was practically glued to the mud. "The gap is closing, Adam needs to pick up the pace!", said Jeff. Adam, not wanting to miss out on the reward, darted over to his third flag, then turning back. Chong and Lex, despite their best efforts, were no match for him. "Adam quickly recovers, he he LEAPING over the course!". Eventually, Adam reached the orange mat, placing his flags down, panting. "Adam is back first, Adam moves onto the final round!"

"For our next matchup, Jess is taking on Paul and Kristie. Survivors ready? GO!". Kristie immediately started to struggle, while Paul and Jess were fairly evenly matched on the course. Jess grabbed her flag quickly, while Paul followed soon after. "Jess and Paul off to a quick start, Kristie is struggling!", said Jeff. Jess was quick to grab her second flag, zooming onto the third, while Paul remained steadily in second. "This round is no contest!", said Jeff. Once Jess grabbed her third flag, she sped back. Paul did gain on her somewhat, but ultimately she came out on top, dropping her flags onto the mat. "Jess is back first, Jess moves onto the final round!", said Jeff.

"Next up are Emma, Otto and Karen. Survivors ready? GO!". Otto darted across the field rather quickly, leaving Emma and Karen in the dust. Grabbing his first flag, Otto continued to run while Emma and Karen hadn't even reached their first one yet. "Otto is making QUICK progress in this challenge!", yelled Probst. Indeed, Otto had reached his second flag during the time it took for Jeff to say this, while the girls had only gotten their first one. "Karen and Emma are BEHIND in this challenge!", exclaimed Jeff. Otto then grabbed his third flag and ran back to the mat, placing the flags down. "Otto gets back first and will take on Adam and Jess in the final round!", exclaimed Jeff.

Otto, Jess and Adam stood side by side, waiting for Jeff to give the okay. "In this final round, Otto, Jess and Adam will go. Survivors ready? GO!" Jess could not compete with Otto or Adam, quickly falling behind them, Adam grabbed his first flag rather quickly, while Otto was slightly behind. "This challenge is DEAD even between the guys!", yelled Jeff. Adam panted, not wanting to lose the reward. He practically galloped over to the second flag, creating a slight lead. Otto then panted himself. "Adam is now in the lead, he is KILLING it in this challengre!", said Jeff. Adam soon grabbed the third flag, turning back to reach the matt. While Otto tried to gain on him, it was no use as Adam had reached the matt with his final pair of flags. "Adam is back first, so Adam wins reward!", Jeff exclaimed. "Yeah, buddy!, Adam yelled out, happy over his victory. "Adam, a fun day of pizza and snacks awaits you. As I mentioned before, you'll need to select two people to accompany you on this trip, who will it be?"

Adam eyed Otto and Paul and turned to Jeff. "This one's easy Jeff! I choose Otto and Paul. Paul and Otto ran over to Adam excitedly, happy they were chosen for the reward. "Alright. Adam, Otto and Paul, head on out to your reward. The rest of you, I have nothing for you. Grab your stuff and head back to camp." While Adam, Otto and Paul headed off to their pizza party, the rest of Picogogeta did as Jeff said and headed back to camp.

(CONF) "I definitely was unhappy losing the reward challenge.", said Emma. "Now instead of getting to have real food and drinks, I'm going to be stuck on the beach avoiding flying coconuts while Karen sets up her little bowling alley. First Louis is blindsided, now this! What a day!"

Upon exiting their provided van, Adam, Otto and Paul were overjoyed to see their prize. "We're in the big leagues!", exclaimed Adam.

(CONF) "Winning another challenge in a row was amazing!", said Adam. "I know that I told myself to only focus on immunity, that I didn't really need this, but when you saw how HUUGE that crust was and how gooey the cheese was, you'd want to win too!"

As Paul gobbled up a slice hungrily, he turned to the two. "Do you guys have any idea who we're voting out after Emma?", Paul asked.

Otto and Adam shook their heads. "No, I haven't thought about it yet. It shouldn't matter, as I feel like we have this island doing our bidding!", said Otto.

"True that!", said Paul.

(CONF) "We're not really sure what the next phase is after Emma", said Paul. "Tonight's vote is an obvious choice, but after that, given how we're in a pact with basically everyone, we're going to need to see the checks and minuses of who to keep and to get rid of! Not to be cocky, but this shouldn't be a problem, because from the looks of it, we shouldn't be in any trouble for at least a week more!"

As the other six members of Picogogeta arrived at camp, disappointment was felt all around. "It was a close one", said Jess.

(CONF) "I definitely wish that I won the challenge today", said Jess. "Adam won and brought along Paul and Otto, which does make sense since they're his two best friends here, but I would have killed for some pizza and soda! I do wonder if Karen is still working on her Survivor bowling alley, so I'm going to go check on that to distract myself."

Jess walked over to her friend, who was holding blocks of wood while moving them over the "alley". "Karen, what exactly are you doing?", Jess asked confused.

"Oh, I'm playing Wii Sports Bowling, Survivor edition!", Karen explained. "It might seem a little challenging at first, but as long as you can move your left arm THAAT way and then took a BIIIG swing forward, you should be seeing strikes in your future, girlfriend!", Karen said jokingly.

"Strikes huh?", Jess asked. "Well, let me show you how an EXPERT does it!".

"Gladly", said Karen as she handed Jess the 'remote'. Jess did as Karen said and moved her arm left, then hurled it forward. "Strike!", exclaimed Jess. "I suppose you're onto something after all Professor Oakes!"

"When am I not Ms. Powell?", Karen said as she imitated a mentor speakingto their student.

(CONF) "While I would have liked some pizza for sure, I did realize there were a few fun things I could do back at camp!", said Karen. "Namely work on my 'bowling alley' anymore. One of the best parts about making the alley in 2018 as opposed to 2000 is that Wiis have existed for 12 years, so now I can create my own 'Wii remote to make it even more fun!"

Emma sighed alone once more, until she realized all was not lost. "Hey, I bet it's hidden where me and Louis found it!", she exclaimed before running off.

(CONF) "A lightbulb just went off in my head just now!", said Emma. "Considering that Louis and I found the idol underneath our shelter, I wonder if it was re-hidden exactly where we found it! Maybe if I can find it, then all hope wont be lost for me!"

Emma proceeded to head to the shelter, beginning to look underneath the floor. Unfortunately for her, Kristie was walking by, then noticed Emma in the middle of her search.

"What the hell?!", Kristie said as she noticed Emma.

(CONF) "I saw Emma just digging up beneath the shelter!", said Kristie. "I don't know if an idol is hidden there or not and I'm not going to risk anything, so Emma will need to face me if she wants the idol!"

Kristie charged over to where Emma was. Realizing she had been caught, Emma was forced to flee. She ran out of the area, sweating as fast as she could. Kristie smirked. "And stay out!"

(CONF) "Well, that was a bust!", Emma yelped. Kristie must have seen me while I was in the middle of the deed and didn't want me to grab it, so she just lunged at me! Wow, this day just keeps getting better, doesn't i?"

With Emma out of the way, Kristie scurried underneath the shelter. She didn't want anyone else to get their hands on an idol before she could. Moving her left hand around ever so slightly, Kristie felt a bundled object, then slowly pulled it out to reveal the idol. "Alright!", she exclaimed to herself. "I better put this in my bag before anyone sees it!". She said as she ran off to do so.

(CONF) "After I made sure Emma didn't get her hands on the potential idol, I decided to investigate for myself a little bit", said Kristie. "Low and behold, I found it hidden underneath the floor boards! I'm so excited! With this, I see myself going much farther!"

As the sun began to set in the sky, leading to bright pink replacing sapphire blue, Adam, Otto and Paul returned from their reward, spirits still high.  "WILMAAAAA! I'M HOME!", exclaimed Adam. The others laughed in response to this, as they continued with their little "bowling alley".

"Still at it with this project?", Adam asked Karen.

"You bet!", said Karen. "I added in wii remotes and maybe soon I'll add in bumpers! Lex keeps getting a gutterball!"

"Hey, so did you!", Lex teased.

"Can I go?", Otto asked. "I want to be the bowling pin wizard!"

Karen handed Otto a coconut. "Go for it!"

Otto rolled the coconut down the "alley", causing him to hit several blocks of wood. "A champion in the making!", he exclaimed. Everyone else cheered for him.

(CONF) "I really like this game that Karen made up", said Otto. "I believe she makes computer and video games in her spare time, so I wouldn't mind seeing if she can make this for something I could buy on my Xbox One! I think my son Bjorn would like it too, only I'm going to play it all the time and he's never going to get to!"

While the majority of Picogogeta reveled in their new game, Emma was dejected. Losing her main ally and not being able to find the idol was doing a number on her sanity. Noticing everyone else engaged in the bowling game she scorned earlier, Emma sighed, conceding.

(CONF) "I'm really, really tired and don't know what else to do", said Emma. "I feel like I should just check out this game, because everyone else can't get enough of it and I'm out of ideas to get around anything that's going to happen!"

Emma walked up to the others. "Hey, I was really curious about this game you guys are playing. What exactly is it again?", she asked.

Karen was all too eager to explain. "It's Survivor bowling!", said Karen. "You saw Borneo, right?"

"Yes, I've seen every season.", said Emma. "What about it?"

"Well, if you remember Sean, the crazy doctor with the alphabet voting strategy, he tried to make his own bowling alley.", said Karen. "He divided up lines in the sand and used wood for pins. It didn't work and everything thought he was...well, crazy, but I really liked it and thought it had a lot of potential, hence why I made it. You're British, is bowling big over there?"

Emma shook her head. "Not really", she replied. "Never saw an alley where I grew up. We had games similar to it, but not the American version."

Karen nodded. "Well, now's the perfect time to begin!", she exclaimed. "Just hold the ball, pull back and throw!". Karen handed Emma a coconut, allowing her to go at it.

"Alright, here goes nothing", Emma said. Pulling back the coconut as Karen told her to, Emma hurled it forward, knocking over all but one pin. "Wow!", she exclaimed. "That was easy..and fun! I definitely am going to play it more when I get home!"

"I'm glad you enjoyed it!", said Karen. "Now I think Sean's going to receive the vindication he deserves!"

(CONF) "I'm really happy all of us got to bond with Emma.", said Karen. "Even if she didn't vote in the majority, that doesn't mean we can't be friends. If I'm Gary Oak, given my last name, then she can be my Ash Ketchum, since she's a worthy opponent!"

As the nine continued to play for hours, the moon eventually rose in the sky, total darkness surrounding it.

"Woah, it's late", said Chong. "We probably should get some rest!"

"Yeah, that would make sense.", said Emma. "Gotta all be ready for the challenge tomorrow." Everyone obliged, heading off to the shelter.

(CONF) "Karen's awesome!", said Emma. "I know that she was against me last round and we're probably not going to vote together this upcoming Tribal Council, but she's incredibly fun-loving and inventive. Even being a long-term fan of the show, I forgot all about this alley that Sean made, so revisiting it and playing the game was surprisingly entertaining!"

Everyone soon fell asleep for the night. Eventually, the moon surrendered to the sun as bright cyan permeated the sky. Awaking before all others, Otto found the usual parchment jutting out of the tree, alerting the others. "Treemail!", he called for them. Otto then took out the note and read it to the tribe.

"''Today you will be swimming and you'll be hauling yourself. If you get the gold medals then you will have immune wealth." ''Otto read. "A swimming challenge, huh? Sounds like fun, I guess." Adam seemed more excited.

"Alright, another swimming challenge! Bring.it.on!", Adam exclaimed for emphasis. He grabbed his immunity necklace as he headed off to the challenge site with the others, embracing what was ahead.

(CONF) "When I found out that today's challenge would involve swimming, I was REALLY, REALLY excited!", said Adam. "Growing up in Maine, water has pretty much been my second home. I swam when I was in school, I fished, I boated, hell I OWNED my first boat when I was 20. So to say water is my element is an understatement!"

The nine arrived at the challenge site in a boat, walking onto the dock Jeff was standing on. "Welcome!", he greeted them. "Adam, I'm gonna need to take that back.", Jeff said as he took the immunity necklace from Adam. "I'm gonna get it back", Adam promised. "We'll see about that", said Jeff. "Ready to get to today's immunity challenge?", Jeff asked.

Everyone nodded. "For today's challenge, you are going to be standing on a wooden platform. There are two hangers on opposite ends of the platforms.", said Jeff. "You are going to start off on one end of the hanger, grab a medallion on it, run across the board and put the medallion on the other hanger. After you've transferred the medallion, you are going to jump underwater and pull yourself across the bottom of the platform using a rope. Once you've reached the opposite end, you will resurface, then do the same thing once more. We are doing this in three groups of three, so the winners of each of the first three rounds will face off against each other in the fourth and final round. The first person in the final round to transfer all of their idols before the other two, wins immunity and is safe from the vote. Let's draw for spots."

"This first round will be Paul, Otto and Kristie. Survivors ready? GO!" With that, Kristie, Paul and Otto began their race. Otto quickly grabbed his medallion, then raced to the other end of the platform, placing it on the hanger. Paul was close behind as he then placed his medallion on the hanger, while Kristie lagged behind. The three then jumped into the water to begin pulling themselves across using the rope. "Otto begins with an early lead! Paul and Kristie have to pick it up!", said Jeff. Otto hauled himself along the bottom, then emerging as he grabbed his second medallion. Paul followed, while Kristie struggled to keep up. "Otto continues his lead!", Jeff said as Otto placed the medallion on the second hanger. "Otto moves on to the final round!"

The next matchup was between Adam, Jess and Karen. "Survivors ready? GO!" Jess darted ahead with her first medallion, while Karen followed close behind. However, they were no match for Adam, who had already placed his medallion on the second hanger. "Adam is CHARGING ahead in this challenge!", said Jeff. Diving under the water, Adam quickly yanked himself across with the rope, then jumped out and grabbed the next medallion. Jess and Karen were far behind. "Jess and Karen are being DESTROYED in this challenge!", said Jeff. Adam then raced across the platform as he placed his second medallion on the hanger, jumping underwater once more to drag himself along with the rope. Eventually, he made it to the top again. "Adam completes his medallion run, Adam moves onto the final round!"

Emma, Chong and Lex were the next up. "Survivors ready? Go!", Jeff exclaimed. Chong was off to an early lead as he grabbed his medallion and raced quickly to the other hanger, placing his medallion on it. Emma was on on his tail, while Lex was lagging behind. "Chong is leading, Emma and Lex, you need to pick it up!", said Jeff. Emma did her best to keep up with Chong, but he was too fast for her, as he jumped underwater and began hauling himself to the other side. He then pulled himself out of the water, grabbing his second medallion as he raced to the other side. Lex and Emma were far behind. "Chong now has placed his second medallion on the hanger! He must swim back now!", exclaimed Jeff. Chong did just that, reaching his platform. "Chong is back! He moves onto the final round with Otto and Adam!"

Otto, Adam and Chong stood on their platforms, awaiting the signal. "Survivors ready? GO!", shouted Jeff, as the three were off. Chong lagged behind Otto and Adam, who both had collected their first medallion, then placed it onto the hanger. "Otto and Adam are neck and neck! Chong is behind!", shouted Jeff. Eventually, Adam was able to gain the lead, pulling himself out of the water a few seconds before Otto. Grabbing his medallion, he ran over to the other side, placed it on there, then dove underwater once more. Quickly hauling his body across the bottom, he then reached the top. "Adam makes it up first, ADAM WINS IMMUNITY FOR THE SECOND TIME IN A ROW!", Jeff shouted. Adam was happier than ever over his victory. "Yeah, buddy!", he exclaimed, exuberant over his triumph. Adam swam over to Jeff, then pulled himself up onto the dock. "Adam, once again you are safe from elimination tonight, you have a 1 in 8 shot at winning the million dollars. The rest of you, grab your stuff and head back to camp. You have a date at tribal council where one of you will be voted out.

(CONF) "I KNEW that this would be my kinda challenge!", exclaimed Adam. "At this point, I'm hoping we swim for every one down the road, then in that case I can win my way to the end! With the way things are going, I doubt I'll need that, but if it happens, it'll be SICK!"

Back at camp, everyone applauded Adam for his second straight immunity victory. "Congrats to the second coming of Colby Donaldson, right down to the same merge buff color!", exclaimed Paul.

"I appreciate it!", Adam said. "But again, I don't really know anything about the show from that period!"

"Well with the way things are looking for you, I'm assuming I'll have enough time to teach you it all!", said Paul.

(CONF) "Adam won immunity for the second time today", said Paul. "I'm really, really happy about that, because now we know Emma is going to be out of here without question. The LAST thing I need is another Louis situation."

Adam then approached Paul. "Can you go get Otto? I need to talk to the two of you.", Adam said.

"Alright", said Paul. "Gimme a second", he said as he went to get Otto. Adam waited impatiently as Paul returned with Otto. "You called for me. What's going on?", Otto asked Adam.

"You know how Louis ended up almost bringing the idol to tribal council last time and we had to go through hell to stop him?", Adam asked.

"What about it?", Otto asked.

"What if Emma has the idol secretly?", asked Adam. "I mean, since she found it with Louis, shouldn't she know where it is if his idol got re-hidden?"

"Maybe we could ask some of our tribe-mates", said Otto. "They should know!"

"Good idea!", said Adam. "Let's go find some now!"

(CONF) "Paul told me that Adam was paranoid over Emma having a hidden immunity idol.", said Otto. "To be honest, Adam's not entirely wrong to be worried. Given that Emma just lost her King and she's a dethroned Queen, she's going to do anything she can to stay alive in the game!"

Otto went to look for tribe-members to speak to when he ran into Kristie. "Oh, sorry Kris.", said Otto "Do you happen to know anything about the idol? Adam's worried Emma got it!"

Kristie seemed surprised at the question, but was happy to answer. "No, in fact I have it!, Kristie explained. "Emma tried to get it, but I caught her in the act!"

"Oh, that's good to know!", exclaimed Otto. "In that case, this plan should go perfectly!"

"Sounds like it!", said Kristie, as Otto walked off.

(CONF) "Otto came over to me asking if I knew about the hidden immunity idol.", said Kristie. "Fortunately, I'm the one who happened to find it, so I was able to confirm Emma didn't! And thank god for that! After Louis was blindsided, Emma probably would have done anything to last another round, including selling her soul to the devil!"

Karen walked over to grab her torch, noticing Emma. "Hi again", Karen said to her. "Here's your torch".

"Thank you", said Emma. "Good luck tonight"

Same to you", Karen said as she began walking to tribal council.

(CONF) "Tonight's vote is a necessary evil decision", said Karen. "Do I WANT to vote out Emma? No, not at all, but when you're playing Civilization, it doesn't matter if when you're in multiplayer, you're playing against a friend or not. I defeat my friends all the time in Civilization, but do I still see them as friends? Absolutely. I hope Emma thinks the same."

The members of Picogogeta arrived at tribal council, dipping their torches in the flames, then placing them behind them. Jeff then greeted them. "Welcome back. Adam, how does it feel being immune again, knowing you're not going home?" said Jeff.

"It feels great!", exclaimed Adam. "When you have immunity, life is perfect! No worries, no issues, no surprises!"

"Speaking of surprises, Emma, I know you were shocked by Louis' elimination last night. What's going through your mind right now?", Jeff asked.

"I'm still processing it", said Emma. "Me and Louis were strong allies and to have him taken from me in such a violent turn of events is not something I can just forget."

"Otto, the vote was very clear last time", said Jeff. "Do you think that it'll be like that tonight?"

"I'm confident that the vote is going to be close again", said Otto. "We're almost all united and at this point and I don't see any reason why we'd turn on each other tonight or any time soon."

"Karen, does Otto's statement hold up to you, that most of you are on the same page?", Jeff asked.

"To an extent", said Karen. "I agree that at this point, most of us have the same intentions in mind with the vote, though given it's an individual game, ultimately you worry most about your own position."

"Paul, do you see it as arrogant to feel there will be nothing of note to occur tonight, or do you think sometimes, that's just how it is on Survivor?", Jeff asked him.

"Sometimes nothing happens", said Paul. "That's just how it is. When you have the power, it's not bragging."

"Lex, would you say that your camp is entirely strategy focused, or do you think that you guys talk about other things?", Jeff asked.

"Actually", Lex started "We've been doing some other stuff recently. Karen for instance made up this game from an earlier season that we all liked!"

"What game?", Jeff asked while raising an eyebrow.

Karen seemed a little embarrassed. "It's this bowling alley", said Karen. "Sean tried to make it on Borneo and I really liked the idea, so I built it. It was fun!"

"Chong, do you think Karen genuinely wants to have fun like this, or do you think there's an ulterior motive?", Jeff asked.

"I do think Karen genuinely ws trying to have fun", said Chong. "We don't really have any major issues or voting plansto discuss at the moment, so it's a breather period."

"Emma, do you feel like fighting to stay in is worth it, or have you tried to go with the flow?", Jeff asked.

"I have tried to fight", said Emma. "Except I wasn't able to get the idol, which makes things harder."

"Kristie, Emma said she couldn't find the idol. Does this make you wonder if it will be found soon?", Jeff asked.

"You never know", said Kristie. "Anyone could. It could be me, could be Otto, could be Lex. We'll just have to wait and see."

"Jess, your thoughts on the idol not being found?", Jeff asked.

"I do wonder when it will found be for sure", said Jess. "I think we all are wondering at this point and until it's found, I'm gonna keep my eyes peeled."

"Interesting", said Jeff. "Adam, I assume you intend to keep immunity?"

"Yep!", said Adam. "With that, it is time to vote. Karen, you're up.", said Jeff. Karen walked up to the voting stall, then wrote down Emma's name. "I wish you the best. I had a lot of fun with you." Emma then walked up and wrote down Lex's name. "I'm not sure who to vote for tonight. I'm probably going and I'd rather vote for an Ahay than one of my own.". Adam, Otto, Jess, Lex, Kristie, Paul and Chong then voted in order. Once Chong voted and sat down, Jeff went to get the urn.

"I'll go tally the votes", Jeff said. He then got the urn, then returned with it. "If anybody has a hidden immunity idol and you want to play it, now would be the time to do so." No one stood up.

"Once the votes are red, the decision is final, person voted out will be asked to leave the tribal council area immediately. I'll read the votes."

"First vote...Emma"

"Second vote...Lex"

"Third vote...Emma, that's two votes Emma"

"Fourth vote....Emma, that's three votes Emma"

"Fifth vote...Emma, that's four votes Emma, one vote Lex, one vote left."

"Tenth person voted out of Survivor: Madagascar and the 1st member of our jury...Emma, you need to bring me your torch." Emma did as she said, grabbing her torch. She said "goodbye" to everyone as she placed it down. "Emma, the tribe has spoken", Jeff said. He then snuffed her torch. "It's time for you to go." Emma then headed out of tribal council, into the night. "Well, this vote demonstrated a unity in the tribe. However, whether unity remains or not is yet to be seen. Grab tour torches, head back to camp, good night.", said Jeff. The members of Picogogeta did just that and left tribal council.

Emma's Final Words: "I wasn't surprised in the least by what happened tonight. I was on the bottom after Louis got blindsided and it was only a matter of time until they got me. I am happy I did meet some nice people, though and I wish to continue speaking to them for sure!"

Episode 10: "The Dam Is Gonna Break and Someone's Gonna Drown"
''Last time on Survivor...Emma was left horrified after Louis was blindsided at the previous tribal council. Bored with the mundanity of camp life, Karen created a project based off of one of her favorite past seasons. At the reward challenge, Adam came out on top, bringing along Otto and Paul to celebrate. Back at camp, Emma tried to find the hidden immunity idol, but was shooed away by Kristie, who found the idol for herself. At the immunity challenge, Adam won for the second time in a row. Back at camp, Adam feared Emma finding a hidden immunity idol. Otto asked Kristie about idol possession, revealing she had one. At tribal council, Emma was voted out, becoming the first member of the jury. 8 are left, who will be voted out tonight?''

Adam laid down his torch after returning from tribal council, still elated over another triumphant vote. "Yeah, buddy!", he said to Otto and Paul.

(CONF) "I've never felt so on top of the world!", said Adam. "First Louis, now Emma! I feel so happy, just so unbeatable that nothing can bring me down!"

Jess sighed in annoyance, frustrated by Adam's incessant bragging. "I get it! You won two immunity challenges and we ALL voted out Louis and Emma!"

"Actually, I've won three!", he bragged.

"Ugh!", Jess groaned as she walked off.

(CONF) "Adam was seriously annoying me when we got back from Tribal Council.", said Jess "He acts like just because he won some challenges and ended up voting out the person we all wanted out that he's some sort of celebrity! Frankly, if I hear him yell 'Yeah, buddy!' one more time, I'm sewing my ears shut!"

Jess then walked over to Karen. "I gotta get away from him", she said.

"I know how you feel", said Karen. "Even I think the bragging is a bit much."

(CONF) "Jess told me that she was annoyed by Adam's bragging.", said Karen. "While I don't get annoyed very easily myself, I can understand why she was irritated by it. Adam has been talking about this since we left tribal council and to me, it's excessive."

Adam turned to Paul and Otto. "I think she's overreacting! We did awesome there and besides, I DID win immunity three times!", Adam boasted once more.

"I guess not everyone sees it as justified", said Paul.

(CONF) "Adam and Jesse just had a disagreement over Adam's bragging", said Paul. "I think that he definitely is getting a little too big for his britches, but otherwise, I don't see any issue. After all, we're genuinely in this position of power and I don't see us losing it."

"I suppose not" said Adam. "But it doesn't matter, because we're practically the Kings of this island!"

"True that!', said Otto.

The Picogogeta members all soon fell asleep, snoring loudly. In a few hours, the sun rose in the sky, few clouds to disrupt the picture-esque weather. Otto removed the usual note from the tree, alerting his seven other tribe-mates. "Treemaaaaaaail!", Otto exclaimed. He then removed the note to read it to the tribe.

"Today is another reward, it's time to take a slide. Cause' when you're done, you'll have some fun, as long as you abide.", Otto read. "Hmm, sounds like the challenge with the waterslide!"

"That sounds like it'll be fun!", exclaimed Karen." Everyone began heading off to the challenge.

(CONF) "I do hope that Adam loses reward today", said Karen. "He's won the last two immunities and the last reward and frankly, I wouldn't mind getting to go on one. The only way he'll lose immunity is if it's in trivia or something, but given the challenges Jeff uses nowadays, I don't know how likely that is. I guess I'll have to wait and see."

The eight members of Picogogeta arrived at the challenge sight. "Come on in guys!", Jeff welcomed them. "Are you ready to get to today's reward challenge?" Everyone nodded. "Alright, here's how it's going to work. You will be competing in two pairs of four. One at a time, one person from each group is going to race down the slide. They will dig up a ring, then the next person goes. Once all four rings are dug up, you will throw the rings at four increasingly far away poles. First group to land their rings on all four poles, wins reward. Wanna know what you're playing for?", Jeff asked.

Everyone nodded. "The winning team will be taken to a hotel, where they will stay overnight and be treated to all-you can eat room service, video games, alcohol and karaoke." Otto squealed with excitement at the mention of karaoke. "Losing group gets nothing. Let's draw for spots.", said Jeff.

"Team 1 is Adam, Chong, Otto and Paul, while team 2 is Lex, Kristie, Jess and Karen. Survivors ready? GO!" Adam quickly raced down the slide, running to the first digging site. Lex was a little slower, slipping and tumbling after getting off the slide. "Adam is off to a quick start! Lex is struggling right off the bat!", Jeff exclaimed. Adam then quickly dug up the first ring, which allowed Chong to then slide down. Lex eventually found her ring, allowing Kristie to run. "Chong now sliding for the men! Women have to make up some time!" Chong ran to the second digging site and quickly unearthed his ring, running back, allowing Otto to then slide. Kristie eventually dug up her ring, trudging back, allowing for Jess to run. "Otto slides down with unrivaled speed! Jess is behind!" Otto quickly dug up the next ring, charging back. Jess also was quick to uncover her ring and ran back as well. It was now Paul and Karen's turns. Paul slid down as quickly as he could, while Karen struggled to keep up. "Karen falling behind for the women, Paul in the lead!", said Jeff. Paul ran to the final digging site as he quickly unearthed the final ring. Karen quickly dug up her ring, then trudging behind Paul. "Paul and Karen are back, you guys can start throwing!", Jeff shouted. Adam took the rings and began hurling them at the first pole. Eventually, he landed the first ring. Jess did her best to match Adam, but she clearly could not compete with him as she took much longer to get her first ring on the pole. "Adam quickly connects! The men are in the lead!", said Jeff.

Adam soon threw his second ring, which also landed on the pole. Karen was not having quite as much luck, coming up short a few times. "Karen misses by a lot! The women need to catchup!", said Jeff. Adam then was able to land his third ring during this time, while Karen finally landed her first. However, it was all for naught, as Adam immediately landed his fourth and final ring. "MEN WIN REWARD!", exclaimed Jeff. "Guys, enjoy your stay at the hotel, have fun. Women, I have nothing for you. Head back to camp." The guys, still cheering triumphantly, headed to their hotel, while the women returned to camp dejected.

(CONF) "Losing the challenge today was a NIGHTMARE for me!", exclaimed Lex. "Knowing that the guys would be having fun at a nice clean hotel eating food and SINGING while I'm stuck on a dirty beach just gets to me! Adam is a beast and at this point, I question if he's defeatable!"

Otto, Paul, Adam and Chong arrived at their hotel, checking in as they excitedly ran to take a shower before being involved with the activities.

(CONF) "4 FOR 4 BABY!", Adam exclaimed. "Winning this reward to the hotel was awesome! Not only do we get clean beds, but there are all sorts of things for us to do here, like an all you can eat buffet, video games and karaoke! I don't REALLY care about that last one, but we're having fun, so that's what matters! Besides, with the girls out of our hair, I can discuss the plan of attack I have for this round, as to who to take out!"

Otto called out to the guys. "Let's go to karaoke!", he exclaimed. "There's a song I REALLY want to sing, like REALLY, REALLY badly!" He then darted off, with Paul, Adam and Chong following after.

(CONF) "Otto was REALLY excited to do karaoke!", said Chong. "Never knew he was much of a singer, but I'm really curious as to what he'll sing when we get there."

As the four ran in, the karaoke station was empty. "Hello gentlemen, would you like to sing a song?", the moderator asked. "Yes, I certainly would!", exclaimed Otto.

Paul laughed. "What are you going to sing Otto?"

"I can't TELL you that, silly!", Otto replied. "Otherwise it would ruin the surprise!"

Otto then whispered a request into the moderator's ear, smirking and giggling like a schoolgirl. Taking the microphone, he eventually began to sing 'Barbie Girl' by Aqua, moving his hips and feet as he danced and sung simultaenously.

"I'm a barbie girl! In a barbie wooorld! Life in plastic, is FANTASTIC! You can brush my hair, and take me everywhereeee! Imagination, life is your creation! Come on barbie, let's go party! Ah-ah-ah-yeaaah!", Otto sang. He soon finished the song, resulting in cheers from Chong, Paul and Adam.

"Ladies and gentlemen! I present to you the next voice of our generation!", Paul said. The four men then laughed.

"Excellent performance Otto, but the four of us need to talk business.", said Adam.

"Fine with me", said Paul. "Who do you want to vote out next? At this point, we need to turn on each other since all our enemies are gone."

"I was actually thinking Karen", said Adam. "Don't get me wrong, she's a GREAT person and probably one of the nicest and funnest people I've ever met, but the woman could CREAM us all in the finals! Everyone likes her, hell even EMMA got along with her before she was kicked out last round. Besides, she's also a beast at puzzle challenges and that could cause problems if the challenges have puzzles."

"You think we can pull this off?", asked Chong.

"We should be able to", said Adam. "You're basically best friends with Lex, so that's 5 us, 3 them!"

"Good point!", said Chong. "Lex would never turn on us in a million years!"

"Alright, that plan works for me", said Otto. "Karen?"

"KAREN!", the men said as they put their hands together and lifted them up.

(CONF) "So, we determined that we're going to be blindsiding Karen", said Paul. "Adam was right in that with us four plus Lex, we'd easily be able to take her by surprise! Besides, she's only REALLY good at puzzles, so unless the next immunity challenge has a mental component, this should be effortless!"

Back at camp, Lex, Kristie, Jess and Karen walked in, frustrated at another loss.

"Damn it!", exclaimed Kristie. "Adam kicked our butts AGAIN! You sure Probst didn't rig the challenge for him?"

"I wouldn't doubt it", said Jess. "After all, he's told me at least a MILLION times that the first season he saw was Redemption Island and you know the player from THAT season all the newb fans like!"

(CONF) "I was more angry than usual to lose the reward challenge today", said Jess. "Not only did I miss out on sleeping in an actual bed and eating food that won't give me tapeworms, but Adam, a.k.a Donaldson 2.0, won his FOURTH challenge straight! I suppose that he just got lucky with what he got, but frankly, it's worrying me THIS much how well he's doing!"

"Girls, we need to talk", Jess said to Kristie, Lex and Karen.

"Good idea", said Karen. "Besides, we need to figure out who we want totake out next."

"Yeah, I was thinking the same thing", Jess said to Karen. "If you ask me, I really think we should blindside Adam this round if he doesn't win immunity. Do you see that guy in challenges? Before you know it, he could be wearing that necklace up to the finals!"

"Very good points", said Karen. "He's a pretty alright guy, but me with my mom-bod against Conan the Barbarian? That's like a Magikarp taking on a legendary Pokemon!"

(CONF) "Jess told me that she wanted to take out Adam as soon as she got the chance", sad Karen. "While I definitely like him, I will get fucked over HARD if he's left here to win challenges! Besides, him, Paul and Otto have a really strong friendship going on and you'd be crazy to think they'd take anyone but themselves to the end!"

"Are you really sure?", Lex asked. "Adam and I were pretty good friends on Ahay"

"It doesn't matter!", exclaimed Jess. "I don't care if Adam is your best friend, your conjoined twin or your executioner! He's strong! He's pretty well liked! And him, Otto and Paul are inseparable! When Chong gets back here, I need you to isolate him from the other three. I'm going to pretend that Kristie is the target! Kristie, does this work for you?", Jess asked her.

Kristie nodded. "Sounds solid to me"

"Alright, so Kristie is the fake target!" said Jess. "Tell him that and keep him away from the other three guys at ALL costs! Sing your songs to him! Play your little air guitar crap! Just do anything you can to fool him! If you don't do this, I will personally change the target to you! Okay?!"

Lex gulped. "Oh, okay.", she said as she walked off.

(CONF) "Jess seemed REALLY hell-bent on getting out Adam.", Lex said. "I really, really like him as a friend and I feel it would be SOOO mean to just take him out like this. At the same time, Jess told me that I'd be the new target if I don't listen to her, so it seems like I'm gonna have to go along for the ride. Lying to Chong will be a NIGHTMARE, though!"

Karen turned to Jess after Kristie and Lex turned away. "That's some nice strong-arming there!", Karen complimented her.

"I'm a President in training!", exclaimed Jess. "I HAVE to be by default!"

(CONF) "I'm hoping that Lex comes through for the plan!", Jess exclaimed. "She's probably crying her guts out able having to tell a 'mean ol lie' to Chong, but I don't care! If I have it my way, Adam will not be here past day 27! The dam is gonna break and someone's gonna drown!"

As Jess and Karen were walking to the water to wash off before heading to sleep, Jess potted Otto's bag, noticing something jutting out of it. "Hey, what's that?", Jess said as she noticed the object.

"Maybe we should examine it", said Karen.

Jess proceeded to do just that, picking up the object. Upon realizing what it was, her eyes widened. "Son of a bitch!", she exclaimed. "I knew he'd do something like this!". Jess was holding Otto's hidden immunity idol, which she was never informed about.

"Oh shit, that is a real one!", said Karen. "What do we do?"

"Simple", said Jess. "Aside from Lex who will be telling Chong that Kristie's the target, whenever Adam, Otto and Paul are in earshot, we need to make Otto look like the target. Then we can flush out his idol and take Adam out at the same time!"

"I like your thinking Powell!", said Karen.

"Thank you Oakes!", Jess replied.

(CONF) "Me and Jess just unearthed an idol that Otto apparently found", said Karen. "I do understand why he didn't want to tell me, but if that was the case, he should have hidden his idol better, because now this is good leverage to use against Adam!"

The next morning, a boat pulled up to the shore and dropped off Adam, Paul, Otto and Chong. The four proceeded back to the shelter, happy over the fun they had.

"Great night!", exclaimed Chong. "I really wouldn't mind staying there again!"

"Agreed", said Adam. "And the way I see it, we should be back there a few more times in the next week or so, if you know what I mean! Once we pull Lex in on this, nothing is gonna stand in our way!"

(CONF) "Hell of a reward last night!", exclaimed Adam. "Not only did I enjoy some of Otto's grade A singing, but we planned our next target. Why does EVERYTHING go my way? Seriously, there is absolutely no way that things can get any better than this! I'd say the only direction is down now, but hell will have to freeze over for that to happen!"

"Let's go find Lex", said Paul. "Then we can discuss this for sure."

Otto noticed Lex, then called out for her. "Hey Lex, we need to talk to you!". Lex realized who was back, then darted off into the jungle to avoid them finding out about what was to go down.

"That's odd", Paul said. "Normally she's really excited to talk to us.

"Maybe she wants to talk to me", said Chong. "I feel like I get through to her the most easily." Chong said as he went off to find Lex.

"Be back ASAP!", said Paul.

(CONF) "Lex was acting pretty strange just now", said Paul. "Maybe that's not an appropriate word to use, since any 25 year old woman who openly professes to playing air guitar isn't exactly what the layman would call 'normal', but still this girl's organs are on the floor the minute she opens up and yet now it's like she's been sewn shut!"

"I'm sure this will get figured out!", exclaimed Otto. "Chong can convince Lex to do anything!"

(CONF) "We were all a little bit confused when we saw Lex just take off!", exclaimed Otto. "I do feel confident in her because she's worked with us already, but also because her and Chong are tight. If she betrays him, I will eat demand that a video of me singing 'I'm a Barbie Girl' be uploaded online."

Lex made her way through the clearing, only to find Chong chase after her. She was a little bit startled, but otherwise welcomed him. "Oh, hi Chong", said Lex, clearly troubled.

"Are you okay?", Chong asked with concern. "You seem a little bit antsy."

Lex sighed. "It's the vote tonight.", said Lex. "The girls want to get out Kristie and told me to talk to you."

"Really? Well, the guys wanted to get out Karen", Chong. "Since they think she's nice and all."

Lex knew she had to find a way to change Chong's mind. A growing feeling of dread was developing in her stomach as she mustered up the first lie she could think of.

"Well...", Lex started. "I THINK I heard Kristie was targeting you, but I'm not sure..."

Chong seemed a little surprised. "That's not good", he started. "If that is the case, we should take her out instead."

Lex felt sweat pouring out of her pores, ugly feelings of regret growing. Still, she remembered what Jess said and was too scared to test her. "..Yeah, I guess we should vote for her tonight..", Lex stammered. "..I need to be right back for a minute and then I'm going to come back to you...I think we should spend the rest of the time until the next tribal council just having fun, with more air guitar and songs...you know?", she said as she ran off.

Jess was relaxing in the shelter when Lex approached her.

"What is it?", Jess asked.

"I got Chong on board", said Lex. "I told him Kristie was targetting him and he ate it up."

"Perfect!", exclaimed Jess. "Make sure you spend all of your time with him and don't let him get away!"

"Alright..", Lex replied, visibly uncomfortable with this, but complying anyway, as she went off to Chong again.

(CONF) "I don't want to be arrogant, but manipulating Lex was easy!", proclaimed Jess. "She's a pretty nice girl, if VERY annoying, but man is she dumb! Tell her Chong wants to do something and she just does it! And she'll probably make a great lackey for the rest of the merge, with how easily she can be swayed!"

Otto, Paul and Adam were growing impatient. Yes, Chong and Lex often would discuss the superiority of Bob Dylan over Alice in Chains, but this was long, even for them.

"I feel like something's up", said Paul. "Should we bother checking up on the two? Part of me says yes."

"Nah", said Adam. "We've bene over this. One, they DO have conversations this long. Two, as I said, Lex is Chong's best friend here, aside from us. If he's doing something, she will. Trust me."

Otto sighed. "I suppose you're right", he said. "Lex has been on our side and hasn't backed away once, so I say there's a 5% chance of her being up to something, IF that!"

"I guess", Paul said. He was still feeling apprehensive about the situation, but clearly had no room to argue. the three then headed of, intending to rest for the night soon.

(CONF) "Part of me really worries about Adam's confidence right now", said Paul. "True, Louis had his downfall due to being paranoid, but something here doesn't add up."

Eventually, the members of Picogogeta headed off to sleep. Everyone was tired and needed to recharge for tomorrow. As the sun rose in the sky, Adam ran out to collect the tree mail. "TREEE MAAAIL!", he exclaimed. Adam then opened up the note and began reading it.

"''Today you'll have to use your brain, to get the answers right. About the country you are in, don't know and it will bite!" ''Adam read. "That makes me wonder..", he said with a slight tinge of uncertainty. When Karen heard the note, she became a little bit hopeful she could pull off a win.

(CONF) "The challenge today mentioned something about using your head or knowing something about the country we're in!", said Adam. "I know we're in Madagascar, but that's about it! I know Karen's wicked smart, but she hasn't won a single challenge by now, so why would it just start happening?"

Everyone on Picogogeta headed off to the challenge sight, where Jeff awaited them. "Come on in guys!", Jeff said. "Adam, I'm going to need to take that back", he said as he took the immunity necklace from Adam. "Once again, immunity is back up for grabs. Ready to get to today's challenge?" Everyone nodded.

"Alright, here's how it's going to work", said Jeff. "I am going to be asking you guys a series of trivia questions related to Madagascar. They're initially easy, but they're gonna get harder. The first person to get 5 points wins immunity. Makes sense?" Everyone nodded. "Alright, let's get down to business,", said Jeff.

Jeff then revealed the first question. "Number 1. What's the national animal of Madagascar? A. The orangutan, B. The ring tailed lemur, C. The chimpanzee or D. The baboon?" Everybody wrote B on their paper and held up their answers. "Everyone got it right. That's 1 point for everyone." Everyone then ripped off that sheet of paper, ready for the next question. "Question 2.", said Jeff. "Which ocean does Madagascar border? A. The Indian Ocean B. The Atlantic Ocean or C. The Pacific Ocean." Everyone but Adam and Lex wrote A on their paper. "Everyone but Adam and Lex is right! Everyone else has 2, Adam and lex still have one.

Get ready for question 3." Everyone tore off off the sheet of paper, awaiting the next question. "Question 3", Jeff said. "What is the capital of Madagascar? A. Mahajanga B. Toliara C. Tolanaro or D. Antananarivo?" Only Karen and Jess wrote D, while Adam wrote C, Lex wrote B and everyone else wrote A. "Karen and Jess are right, the rest of you are not", said Jeff. "Karen and Jess are at 3, everyone else but Adam and Lex still at 2."

Everyone then tore off their paper, awaiting the next question. "Question number 4. Which country is to Madagascar's west? A. Kenya B. Gabon C. Mozambique or D. Malawai.?", asked Jeff. Only Karen got the answer right. "Karen is right and now has 4 points! Everyone else still at their same scores as before!" Once again, everyone tore off their paper. "If Karen gets this right, she wins immunity", said Jeff. Adam nervously eyed her, as Karen gave him a look that said 'Game on'.

"Question 5", Jeff started. "What year did the movie Madagascar come out in? If you were on the reward to see this movie, you will have an advantage. A. 2005 B. 2000 C. 2006 D. 2003." Karen and Paul wrote A. "Reveal please", Jeff said. "Once Jeff saw Karen's answer, it was all over. Karen, you have just earned 5 points, so you win immunity!" Karen was elated as she ran over to Jeff to get the necklace, having it put on her. Jess cheered for her, as Adam looked rather disappointed. "Karen, you are safe from the vote and have a 1 in 7 shot of winning the million dollars! Everyone else, one of you has the chance of being the next person voted out of the tribe! Head back to camp to figure out who it will be."

(CONF) "When I realized the challenge would be trivia today, man was I screwed!", Adam explained. "And even worse, Karen ended up winning immunity! That said, I have a feeling me and my boys can recover from this and send out Jess! Lex has been acting weird, but I KNOW she's still with us so as it stands, there is NOO way I'm going home tonight!"

Back at camp, everyone congratulated Karen on her win. "Nice job!", Jess complimented her. "Thanks guys!", said Karen.

(CONF) "What a day this has been!", exclaimed Karen. "First we propose getting out Adam, who has won every individual challenge since now, then of all people, I win immunity! I don't know who the guys were targeting, but if it was me, they're gonna have to have a plan b!"

"Guys, we need to figure out our backup plan", said Paul. "Who should it be? Jess?"

Adam nodded. "Yeah, she's pretty much Karen's partner in crime, so she's the next best thing."

"That makes sense", said Otto.

(CONF) "Unfortunately, things didn't go so well at the immunity challenge today", said Otto. "Adam seemed like he was poised to win due to him being this challenge monster, but at the worst time possible, he gets a trivia challenge! No offense to Adam, but trivia is basically his kryptonite. Even worse is that Karen won the challenge, so now we're going to focus on Jess. I do wonder where Lex has been all this time, but really, there's no sign she'll do anything tricky."

Meanwhile, Lex guided Chong into the jungle. "Hey, since we know who's going, let's just chill", she said. "We don't have much time to do that with how the game is going nowadays!"

Chong nodded slowly. "Oh, uh alright", she said. "You sure you still want to vote Kristie?"

"Yes, I'm sure", Lex said. "Now let's jam out with my air guitar!" she said as she began strumming chords.

Chong followed along, not feeling quite right.

(CONF) "Am I the worst friend in the world?!", Lex exclaimed. "All my life I've been taught to be honest, to not do sneaky things like this! Yet before I came on here, a bunch of friends of mine said that I had to be willing to do stuff like this, or else be voted out first! I know I didn't get out first, but still...i hope after this vote is done, I can go back to being my fun-loving, non-deceiving self, because frankly, I'm not feeling well deep inside."

Jess sat in the shelter next to Kristie and Karen. "Alright you two, I'm going to need both of you to say you're voting for Otto loudly so he'll bring his idol tonight and play it on himself. Okay?"

The two nodded. "Okay", they said.

(CONF) "Initially, I was a little bit unsure of this plan", said Kristie. "Jess told me that she intended to use me as a fake target so that Chong couldn't speak to the guys and I wondered if there was a trick behind her trick, so to speak. But as I've continued to talk to her, I genuinely think that she's trustworthy. Maybe after this vote we will continue to work together and if so, I'd love that!"

Noticing Otto, Paul and Adam walking by, Karen initiated the plan.

"Well, Jess", Karen started loudly. "I really think Otto should go home tonight! If we let him stay, he could win challenges AND get lots of jury votes!"

"Good idea!", said Jess just as loudly. "Letting a guy like him go far is akin to destroying your game!"

Otto, Paul and Adam overheard the girls and became nervous.

"It sounds like they're targeting you", said Adam. "Don't you have that idol still?"

Otto nodded. "Of course", he said. "I'm thinking I should play it. What about you guys?"

"Yeah, you better bring it to be safe", said Paul.

Otto nodded. "Alright, sounds like a plan."

(CONF) "When we were getting ready for tribal council tonight, I overheard Jess talking about voting for Otto", said Paul. "I don't want us to make a decision we'll regret, so I talked Otto into using his idol. We're set on Jess, but part of me is a bit worried about what Lex up to, since even the stillest waters run deep."

Jess noticed Paul, Otto and Adam walking down the coast, presumably to Otto's bag to get his idol.

"Perfect!", she smirked while rubbing her hands together.

(CONF) "Adam, Paul and Otto might think that they have a pact to the end and that nothing can stop them, that they're in 'control of the game now'!", said Jess. "But they had no idea I would have everything set up to this degree! I'm a Yale student and a Yale student easily will outwit a blue collar New Englander and an underground rockstar any day! They might think I'm just their loyal ally, but they're wrong! LeagueGirl72 is making her move tonight and they'll know it was me! The King of this island might be gone, but that's fine, since that makes me the Queen!"

"Ready to raise hell EmblemKnight?", Jess asked. "You bet LeagueGirl72!", Karen responses. The two fist bumped then headed off to tribal council. Adam, Otto and Paul got Otto's idol, then prepared to head off themselves. "Here goes nothing guys", said Adam as they prepared to walk off.

(CONF) "It seems like things might be a little more crazy than we thought tonight", said Adam. "Jess, Karen and Kristie seem to be gunning for Otto and while I'm a tiny bit nervous he brought his idol, so things should be okay. I don't get why they'd target him first over me, giving I've been such a boss at challenges, but that's fine, cause' I can just ask them what this all about tomorrow after I win the next challenge!"

The eight members of Picogogeta headed off to tribal council, their torches lit. As they sat down, Jeff greeted them. "We will now bring in the first member of our jury..Emma, voted out at the last tribal council." Emma walked in, waving at the others as she sat down in one of the juror reserved seats. Jeff then turned back to the eight. "Adam, this is your first time since the merge where you don't have immunity. Are you afraid at all?"

Adam shook his head. "Honestly Jeff, not really" Adam said. Jess and Karen snickered at each other, unbeknownst to him. "I haven 't heard my name down, but a few others have been mentioned. I guess it just goes to show you that when you think you're a threat, sometimes others don't and when you think you'' re not one, others do."

"Jess, I noticed a few looks from you", said Jeff. "Any thoughts on what Adam said in regards to what makes someone a threat or not?"

"Definitely", said Jess. "I think obviously a person who's strong is going to be a threat at this point, but there are other factors too of course."

"What kind of factors?", Jeff asked.

"Well, things like social skills and intelligence for sure", Jess said. "If someone here easily makes friends and is well-liked, of course you're going to want to vote them out, just as if someone is intelligent, they could be a threat in puzzle based challenges."

"Karen, you won immunity tonight.", said Jeff. "Do you fear you could be a threat?"

Karen shrugged. "I definitely think that's a viable possibility", said Karen. "While I haven't heard my name being explicitly mentioned, I definitely am a mental threat and I'm friends with everyone still here, so I certainly would fit the social bill as well."

"Otto, Adam said that sometimes certain people may be threats even when they don't know it. Do you think that statement ring true to you?"

Otto nodded. "For sure Jeff", Otto said. "I won't be specific, but I did hear certain names being passed around by certain people, but it doesn't matter, because if anything happens tonight, I'm ready for it. It can be hard keeping up with everything in this game, but with the right mind, it's possible."

"Lex, what do you feel is the toughest aspect of the game for you right now?" Jeff asked her.

"I think it's all the lying", Lex said. "I'm a very honest person by nature, someone who tells people what she thinks and who tries to be upfront, so when I'm not allowed to be truthful or if I have to decieve others and all that to get ahead, I do feel uncomfortable."

"Paul, do you think that Lex's statement is indicative of her coming to terms with that aspect of the game and embracing it, or do you think it's her sticking true to her morals?"

Paul shrugged. "I'm not sure", Paul said. "I do think Lex is a fairly honest person, but in a game like this, where people will do anything to win the money words only mean so much. Whether she's staying true to herself or stating to lie, cheat and steal as they say, I'll find that out after you read the votes."

"Very interesting", Jeff said. "Karen, are you keeping your immunity?"

"Yep", she nodded.

"Very well. It is time to vote. Jess, you're up first.", Jeff said. Jess walked up to the voting booth and wrote down "ADAM". "Sorry Adam, but I'm not going head to head with the reincarnation of Hercules in this game." Adam then voted and wrote down "JESSICA". "At this point, it's every man for himself and you're too damn dangerous to keep around." Chong then walked up and wrote down "KRISTIE". "I don't want to do this Kris, but I heard you were voting for me and I wanna stay in this game a little bit more. Good luck in life." Lex then walked up to the voting booth, though her vote was not seen. "I really really like you and I'm sorry it had to come down to this. Come to my concerts, please, it's only a game, I'm sorry." After she put her vote in the urn, Karen, Kristie, Paul and Otto then voted. Once Otto sat down, Jeff went to go collect the urn.

"I'll go tally the votes", Jeff said as he went to get the urn. Once he came back, he made his usual statement. "If anybody has a hidden immunity idol and you want to play it, now would be the time to do so." Otto took Jeff up on his offer, pulling out his idol. "Jeff, as I told you, I heard a certain name being passed around and it was mine." As he handed it to Jeff, Karen and Jess high-fived each other. "I'm going to play it on me", Otto said, walking back down to his seat. "The rules of Survivor state that in the event that a hidden immunity idol is played, the person with the next highest number of votes will be voted out instead. This is indeed a hidden immunity idol, so any votes cast for Otto will not count. Once the votes are read the decision is final. Person voted out will be asked to leave the tribal council area immediately. I'll read the votes."

"First vote...Kristie"

"Second vote..Jess"

"Third vote...Jess, that's two for Jess, one for Kristie." Adam seemed pleased so far.

"Fourth vote...Jess, that's three for Jess, one for Kristie." Jess figured these were just the three votes against her from the guys minus Chong, so she didn't freak out.

"Fifth vote.........Adam, that's three Jess, one Kristie, one Adam." Adam, Otto and Paul were visibly confused.

"Sixth vote...Adam, that's two for Adam, three for Jess, one for Kristie." Adam dropped his jaw as he realized what was going on.

"Seventh vote...Adam, that's three votes Adam, three votes Jess, one for Kristie..one vote left." Jeff said. Adam and Jess nervously awaited the result.

"Eleventh person voted out of Survivor: Madagascar and the 2nd member of our jury...Adam, you need to bring me your torch." Adam remained shocked as he exclaimed "DAMN IT!", watching as Karen and Jess fist-bumped each other. Placing his torch down, he waved goodbye to Paul and Otto. "Adam, the tribe has spoken", Jeff said, as he snuffed his torch. "It's time for you to go!", Adam walked out, still confused, while Paul and Otto also were shocked. "Well, tonight clearly was not expected for some of you. Could this mean continued fracturing in the seven of you? Time will tell. Grab your torches, head back to camp, good night." The seven remaining Picogogeta members walked out of tribal council, their torches still lit in the night sky.

Adam's Final Words: "This was NOT something I saw coming. Me and the guys thought it was gonna be Otto, we planned for that and it failed. I guess I was right in that people saw me as a threat even if I didn't because I'm talking here right now. Whoever was behind this, I'm definitely pretty annoyed and I hope you have a good explanation at the final tribal council."

Episode 11: "It's Time to Put a Hit on the Hitter"
''Last time on Survivor...after Emma was voted out, Adam's unbridled confidence began to annoy Jess. At the reward challenge the next day, Adam won his fourth straight individual challenge, taking Paul, Otto and Chong with him to a resort hotel. The four discussed a plan to blindside Karen, who they felt was a social and intellectual threat to win. Back at the camp, the girls were frustrated over yet another challenge loss to Adam, particularly Jess, who proposed blindsiding him. Pulling in Lex, Jess instructed her to mislead Chong into voting for Kristie, while the girls would vote for Adam. When Jess found out Otto was in possession of the hidden immunity idol, she decided to decided to mislead Otto, Paul and adam into thinking Otto was the target. At the immunity challenge, Adam's winning streak came to an end when Karen, their intended target, decisively beat the others in a trivia contest. Lex began feeling guilt over having to deceive her friend, while Jess, Karen and Kristie claimed Otto was the target near him, causing him to bring his idol to tribal council. At tribal council, a fearful Otto played the idol on himself, only for Adam to be blindsided, much to his and Paul's shock. 7 are left, who will be voted out tonight?''

Upon returning to camp, Jess high-fived Karen over the successful blindside of Adam. "Not gonna lie, that was a job well done!", Jess said to Karen.

"You said it!", Karen replied.

(CONF) "We just took out Adam at tribal council and Paul and Otto were HORRIBLY surprised!", exclaimed Jess. "Not to sound sadistic, but I actually enjoyed seeing them squirm! When I take out either Paul or Otto next, I hope they're just as shocked!"

Otto and Paul were still completely taken over what happened, with Otto especially confused.

"What the hell happened?!", exclaimed Otto. "I thought Lex was definitely with us!"

"I had my doubts", said Paul. "Especially given how long she was in the jungle with Chong!"

(CONF) "When I saw the votes keep coming for Adam, my mind was not functioning at that point!", exclaimed Paul. "I assumed that Lex was going to vote with us, but after she disappeared for hours and Chong followed her, I suspected something was up. Adam and Otto insisted that things would go well, but look at us now! Not going to lie, this is almost as quick a loss of power as Louis' was!"

Paul found Lex hiding in the bushes, getting impatient. "Lex, please get out of the bushes. I need to talk to you", Paul said.

Lex sighed. "I get it, I screwed up!", she whined.

Paul sighed in return. "I have to be honest, I am disappointed in you", he started. "Think about your morals, your principles." Hoping this would persuade her to flip on Jess, he left to leave her to think.

(CONF) "Paul approached me just just and he wasn't happy", said Lex. "I know I screwed up voting for Adam, but Jess did tell me I'd be toast if I didn't listen. I know that Chong's probably upset too, but I really don't know about all of this..."

Chong was pretty saddened over the events, feeling as if he had been bamboozled unfairly.

(CONF) "When I saw that I cast the only vote for Kristie, I figured someone had tricked me.", said Chong. "I know that Lex told me that Kristie was trying to get me out, so I don't know whether she was set up or not. Either way, I feel really hurt and betrayed by all of this."

Otto found Paul after he had spoken to Lex. "What are we going to do?, Otto wondered to him.

Paul turned to him. "I'm actually trying to set one thing in motion", Paul said to Otto.

"What kind of plan?", Otto wondered curiously.

"Let's just say it involved a certain overly emotional girl", said Paul. "That girl might be feeling some type of guilt, but I want to give it a night to fester in her."

Piecing together what Paul meant, Otto smirked. "Hmm, now that might be just what we need!", exclaimed Otot.

(CONF) "Paul told me that he had this planned out idea in mind to help us", said Otto. "I am pretty sure it involved Lex, so that's a bit risky. Clearly she proved she can be swayed THAT easily, so I guess we'll have to hope the pendulum swings in our direction!"

The seven decided to get some rest, needing to conserve their energy for the next morning. For the first time during the game, the sun did not rise, but instead ominous creeping clouds did. Just as the contestants wished to exit their shelter for the day, a downpour of rain began soaking the camp. To pass the time, Jess had Karen tell her stories of video games she created in college.

"So, what was this game about again?", Jess asked. "I apologize for asking, but it was just so ESOTERIC!"

Karen gladly repeated, explaining. "You basically had to rescue dogs from this alien warrior", said Karen.

"Oh, that's pretty neat!", said Jess. "I wish I majored in computer programming. I'm a political science major, so all I do is lie to people for a living!"

Karen laughed. "Well, that's ONE thing you were honest about you duplicitous PIT!"

Kristie sighed in annoyance. "I get it! You like games!"

(CONF) "Jess and Karen have been annoying me a bit lately", said Kristie. "It's fine that they like video games, in fact I don't mind playing them from time to time, but can they ever talk about anything that isn't a reference to some game from like 1993?! I know they're my allies, but they really emphasize the "evil" in necessary evil! If there was a way out, I would take it!"

Mid-conversation, Karen noticed the usual slip of parchment, the hopped out of the shelter to get it.

"Treemail!", she exclaimed. Everyone huddled around Karen as she read the note.

"Today you're gonna have to do a little bit of all! You'll swim, you'll throw and when you solve the puzzle you'll feel tall!", Karen read. "Sounds like an obstacle course."

(CONF) "I'm definitely pretty excited for this challenge" said Karen. "With Adam gone, a lot of us have a better chance of winning and not only do I want the rewards, but I definitely think it'll be easier to scheme when he can't potentially join us on trips."

The seven Picogogeta members then arrived at the challenge site. "Come on in guys!" Jeff greeted them. "Ready to get to today's reward challenge?" Everyone nodded yes. "Alright, for today's challenge, you'll be divided into two groups of three.", Jeff said "The first person in the group is going to swim out into the ocean, then dive underwater and unhook a bag of balls. After they've unhooked the bag, they will swim back and give the bag to the next group member. That group member will use the balls to smash 3 tiles. Once the tiles are smashed, the final group member will race up a very steep ledge using a rope, and once they're at the top, they will solve a sliding puzzle. First group to solve their puzzle, wins reward. Wanna know what you're playing for?" Everyone nodded yes.

"The winning team will go on a cruise with live music, alcohol and a wonderful view of the ocean, where you can watch the dolphins swim. Because there's one extra person, someone's not going to be selected. I have 7 rocks in my hand and whoever selects the orange rock will be sitting this challenge out. However, if the winning team wants to take that person, they may. Please take a rock and don't look", said Jeff. "Everyone pulled a rock out of the bag and reveal." Everyone showed their hands and Chong ended up having the orange rock. "Chong, sit on the bench, you will go on the reward if the winning team says you can. Everyone else, I'll give you a moment to strategize."

"Group 1 is Jess on swimming, Lex on tiles and Karen on the puzzle, while Group 2 is Paul swimming, Kristie throwing and Otto on the puzzle. Survivors ready? GO!" Immediately, Paul was ahead of Jess on the swimming as he quickly hurried to the buoy. Jess was slightly behind, not able to keep up with Paul. "Paul takes an early lead, Jess must catch up!", yelled Jeff. Paul then dived below and unhooked the bag, quickly swimming back. Jess tried to keep up, but was still behind, even after she grabbed her bag of balls. Paul then made it to shore, handing the bag to Kristie. Jess soon followed after, handing her bag to Lex. "Both teams are now able to smash their tiles! GO!", Jeff yelled. Kristie hurled a ball at one of the tiles and completely missed, while Lex was able to smash hers instantly. Though Kristie tried again, she came up short once more. "Lex off to an early lead smashing the tiles, Kristie needs to catch up!", said Jeff. While Kristie eventually managed to smash her first tile, Lex had already smashed her second and then her third. "Lex done smashing, Karen can now work on the puzzle!", said Jeff.

Karen then began running up the ledge with the rope, though she fell the first few times. Kristie eventually was able to smash her remaining tiles, then tagged Otto for him to go. "Karen struggling a bit on the ledge, Kristie finally done with her tiles, Otto is going for the puzzle now!", Jeff announced. Eventually, Karen managed to climb to the top, while Otto got there on his first try. "Both teams now on the puzzle!", Jeff announced. Though Otto made some progress, Karen was smoking through it, it hardly being a challenge for her. "Karen KILLING it on this puzzle!", Jeff said. Otto eventually started to catch up to her, but it was no use as Karen finished her puzzle. "Jeff, I'm done!", Karen announced. Jeff then checked her puzzle. "Karen's right! Karen, Jess and Lex win reward!" The three women cheered, with Karen using the ladder on the side to climb down and hug the other two. "Karen, Jess, Lex, nice job! The cruise will be waiting for you! But before you go, are you taking Chong or not?", Jeff asked.

"We're gonna take Chong!", said Jess. Chong happily ran over to the group. "Alright, the four of you enjoy your afternoon!", Jeff said. "Paul, Kristie and Otto, I've got nothing for you. Head back to camp." As the three did so, Chong, Jess, Karen and Lex headed off to the cruise.

(CONF) "I definitely needed to bring Chong with us today", said Jess. "If I can convince him to forgive Lex, which shouldn't be a problem since he's super chill, then I can definitely take out Paul's ass next, which will be a lot of fun to do! Taking out a mactor is sorta like hunting rabbits, while a superfan? I'm like Captain Ahab taking out Moby Dick!"

As the four arrived on the cruise, they were greeted by the live band, who were playing Malagasy music. "Welcome and enjoy the show!", they said. As everyone listened, Lex felt a little bit uneasy.

(CONF) "I've been thinking about what Paul said", said Lex. "I know that what I did last night was because I needed to play the game, but I lied to Chong and that's just wrong. Being a Nirvana fan, I've always liked the band because Kurt seemed like the guy who was REAL, like, he didn't do anything he felt was wrong. and in order to make right with the band, I have to apologize to Chong and stay real with him."

Chong was listening to the band as he downed a tequila, when Lex approached him. "Hey, is it okay if I speak to you for a second?", Lex asked.

"Oh, okay", Chong said. "What's going on?"

"I really wanted to apologize for the last vote", Lex said. "I felt horrible for the vote, but Jess threatened me with being voted out and I was scared. I'm so sorry I lied to you and everything. Are we still friends?"

Chong seemed touched and hugged her. "Of course we still are!", Chong said. "I'm not the type to hold grudges anyway. Now what do you say we watch the band?"

Lex nodded. "Sounds like fun!", she said as the two proceeded to watch.

(CONF) "I couldn't stay mad at Lex", said Chong. "Even if she made a mistake, it is in my heart to forgive her, as she has shown remorse for what she did. And since we've gotten along together for so long, why waste it?"

Karen and Jess were at a table of their own, watching Lex and Chong. "Should we worry about them?", Jess asked. "They're supposed to be working for us and watching them makes up makes me wonder if they'll go back to Paul, being his friends and all."

"I think we can figure this out" said Karen. "Maybe if we catch Paul acting dishonorably or in a controlling way, then we can convince Chong to turn on him. If he does, Lex will since she's attached to him."

Jess nodded. "Not a bad plan Kar! I can see why you're the puzzle queen here with that brain of yours!"

"Don't mention it!", Karen said smiling.

(CONF) "When we saw Lex and Chong making up after Lex tricked him last round, I was a little nervous.", said Karen. "At the same time, I remembered how much of a personal code Chong has, so I figure that when we get back to camp, with a few lies, we should be able to get Chong and Lex away from Otto and Paul!"

Back at camp, Pau, Otto and Kristie were annoyed over their loss.

(CONF) "Even if I was forced to sit out the challenge today, I probably wouldn't have been picked.", said Paul. "When you go from Michael Corleone to Fredo, you don't exactly have much social leeway, particularly when you lose your Sonny, like I did with Adam. I know that if Louis was a movie mob boss he'd be Scarface, so what I need to do is figure out what Jess would be, to see if I can take down the mob."

"I really would have liked that cruise today", Otto said to Paul.

"Me too", said Paul to Otto.

Kristie suddenly stepped up and walked off into the jungle. "Sorry guys, but I need some alone time", said Kristie. "Gotta figure some things out."

(CONF) "While I wouldn't have minded winning the reward today, I also wasn't THAT upset either", said Kristie. "Jess and Karen can be a bit much to work with and frankly, I wasn't completely comfortable with them using my name as a decoy during the last elimination. I'm gonna ride them out for a little while longer, but otherwise, I'm not sure."

"What's her problem?", Paul asked.

"I dunno" said Otto. "Though I remember she was getting pretty annoyed with Jess and Karen earlier today before the reward.....THAT'S IT!", he suddenly exclaimed.

"What's it?", Paul asked.

"Her annoyance with the two is giving me an idea!", Otto said.

"What idea?", Paul asked.

"Well, I do know she's unsure if she wants to work with Jess and Karen much longer", said Otto. "What if there was a way to convince the two to turn on her because of that?"

"Do you have any dirt on her?", asked Paul.

"Well, she DOES have the idol", said Otto.

"That gives me a PERFECT idea then!", exclaimed Paul.

"What is it?", Otto asked.

"Well, we can probably convince Jess to turn against Kristie with only one idol in her pocket", said Paul. "But if we create a fake one and hide it in her bag? Jess wil lthink she has TWO idols and will probably think Kristie is conspiring against her!"

"That is diabolical", said Otto. "...I LOVE IT!"

(CONF) "Me and Paul were thinking hard about how Kristie seems to be falling out with Jess and Karen.", said Otto. "And when Paul proposed the idea to plant a fake in her bag, to make Jess think she has two idols?! I was amazed at his creativity! It must be rubbing off on him!"

The two headed off to the craft kit that they got on the first day. "For one, we'll need to make it look different than the fake we made for Louis", said Paul. "Any ideas?"

"I have one!", Otto exclaimed. "Why not paint it orange? We can say it's orange because it's a merge idol!"

"Good idea!", said Paul "I think we still have some orange paint from the merge feast." Paul went to look for the painting, finding the jar full of orange paint as he hoped. "Perfect!"

As the two began painting a block of wood that they felt resembled the idol well enough, Otto voiced some concern.

"Hey, what if Jess realizes this is a fake?", said Otto.

"I actually thought about that", said Paul. "But I figured out a solution to that problem. Jess is such a big fan of the show that she'd know that in several seasons, the idols don't all look the same. So if we plant that seed of doubt in her mind, that it might plausibly be an idol, then she'l; probably believe it!"

"Again, that's diabolical and I LOVE it!", exclaimed Otto. The two then went off to hide their completed fraud idol in Kristie's bag, placing it next to her real one. "I had it jut out a little so Jess could see it!", said Paul. The two then ran off.

(CONF) "I knew that being an obsessive superfan had its uses!", said Paul. "Jess has seen every season, I believe, so it's not a stretch to say this is a real one! After all, with the shit that passed for idols on Ghost Island, it's impossible to claim that something can't be an idol anymore! I bet Probst's old shirts will count soon! All I know is that when Jess gets back to camp later, all hell is gonna break loose and I'm gonna like it!"

After a few hours passed, Jess, Karen, Lex and Chong returned. Kristie had been walking on the beach during this time and once she saw Jess, she high-tailed out. "I'm gonna be back in a bit!", Kristie said as she headed back to the jungle.

(CONF) "Even looking at Jess and Karen is getting me nervous.", said Kristie. "I'm scared I'll blurt something out about not really liking working with them, so I'm trying to avoid them like hell. I think apart is better than together because what can happen if I can't even speak to them?!"

Jess noticed Kristie go off, turning to Karen. "Where do you think she's going?"

Karen shrugged. "Beats me.", As the two were talking, Paul called out to Jess. "Jess, I need to speak to you for a moment!"

Jess sighed. "What do you want Paul? This better be good."

Paul directed Jess to Kristie's bag. "Look inside. Then you'll know why I called for you.", Paul said.

Jess did as he said, presumably just to humor him. However, as she continued looking through, she felt two objects in the bag that made her nervous. Pulling them out, her eyes bugged out wildly. "THAT BITCH!", she screamed. "I guess this wasn't for no reason after all!"

(CONF) "When I got back to camp, I initially planned on turning Lex and Chong against Paul, given that he was the next target for me.", said Jess. "But then Paul called me over. And I must admit, I didn't know why he'd do that, given we're enemies and all now. But when I looked through Kristie's bag and saw not just one, but TWO idols! God, I was FURIOUS! Given what happened this morning, it makes sense she did something like this! I said it once and I'll say it again, anyone who finds an idol without telling me is on my shit list! Kristie's done that and by doing that, she's fucked with me. And when you fuck with me in this game, you're gone!"

"So, you see what I meant now?", asked Paul.

"Damn right I do!", exclaimed Jess. "If she's going to keep secrets like this from me, I'd rather get her out this round, as soon as possible! Are you with me?"

"Wait, you voted against Adam last round! What do you mean?", Paul asked suspiciously.

"Yes, we're still against each other, but we both have the same enemy, so I need all the help I can get.", said Jess. "Tell Otto about this, I'll tell Lex and Chong later."

He nodded. "Works for me!", he said as he went off to find Otto.

(CONF) "For a girl who seems so intelligent, she definitely didn't act like it just now!", exclaimed Paul. "But to be fair to her, everyone has the same goal and it's to protect your turf. If someone's against you, you take them out and get help taking them out, even if the person who's helping you is normally your enemy. When they're thinking it's time to put a hit on the hitter, you hit them back!"

Meanwhile, as Kristie walked back to camp, she bumped into Lex. "Oops", she said. "Sorry about that. Can I talk to you for a minute?"

Lex seemed a bit surprised. "Uh, sure. What's up?"

"I'm getting sick of Jess and Karen", Kristie said. "I know we're supposed to be allies, but they just drain me and I can't do this any longer with them. Are you wiling tovote for Jess tonight with me? And maybe try to talk to Chong, Paul and Otto?"

Lex didn't want to say no, fearing Kristie's reaction. She knew in her heart what her intentions truly were, but all she could muster up was a weak, impotent response. "Yeah, sure..", she whispered, walking off slowly.

"Thanks!", said Kristie as Lex walked off.

(CONF) "Augh, I did it again!", Lex exclaimed. "I told myself to be honest and I lied again! Do I say anything to Kristie? Or do I do what the 'right thing' in this game is, which I see a the WRONG thing?! God, this is so CHALLENGING! When you're a rockstar, it's much simpler! If you want to stage dive, you stage dive, if you want to sing, you sing! If you want to break your guitar, you do it! I shouldn't have kept Splemain as an indie band, because if I did, I'd probably be on world tour right now and chilling in hotels instead of this!"

Eventually, the seven fell asleep. The sun then rose next morning, as Paul went to get the usual mail.

"TREEMAIL!", he shouted. Paul then took out the note and read it aloud.

"''Today the challenge you'll be in will involve shooting darts. And if you have skills that don't blow, you will have done your part." ''

(CONF) "As long as Kristie doesn't win immunity today, I'm going to be happy", said Paul. "At this rate, if I'm Goku, then Kristie is Raditz and Jess is Piccolo. Whether we continue being enemies or become friends next round is up in the air, but we do have a common cause today and given the reference, even if it takes 20 episodes of us staring down Kristie, whatever gets her out is fine with me!"

The seven members arrived at the challenge site when Jeff greeted them. "Come on in guys!", he said. "Karen, I'm going to have to take it back", Jeff said as he took the immunity necklace from Karen. "Once again, immunity is back up for grabs. Ready to get to today's challenge?" Everyone nodded.

"Alright, for today's challenge, you will be using a Malagasy blowgun to fire darts at a target. Two people are going to go for the first two rounds, while three will go for the final round. The person with the highest score for the first two rounds will move onto the final round, where they will face off against the one person who hasn't gone at all. The person who scores the highest in the final round, wins immunity. Let's get onto the first matchup!"

"Paul is taking on Jess! Paul, you go first!", Jeff said. Paul approached the target, then placed the dart inside the blowgun. He took a quick huff and blow into the blowgun, resulting in him hitting the bullseye. Jess took a shot, but was just outside of the bullseyes. "Paul is closer to the bullseye, so Paul moves on!", said Jeff. "Next up are Kristie and Chong! Survivors ready? Go!" Chong went first, firing at the target. He was just outside of the bullseye, then let Kristie go. Kristie completely missed, hitting the outer red ring. "Chong is WAY closer to the bullseye, so he moves on!", Jeff said.